P. 1
Hp Blade Switch

Hp Blade Switch

|Views: 640|Likes:
Published by Saurabh Mahajan

More info:

Published by: Saurabh Mahajan on Oct 25, 2011
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

11/08/2012

pdf

text

original

Sections

  • Preface
  • Additional references
  • Connecting to the Switch
  • Establishing a console connection
  • Setting an IP address
  • Establishing a Telnet connection
  • Establishing an SSH connection
  • Accessing the switch
  • Setup vs. CLI
  • Command Line History and Editing
  • Idle Timeout
  • Typographic Conventions
  • Using the Setup Utility
  • Information Needed for Setup
  • Starting Setup When You Log In
  • Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually
  • Stopping Setup
  • Restarting Setup
  • Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration
  • Setup Part 2: Port Configuration
  • Setup Part 3: VLANs
  • Setup Part 4: IP Configuration
  • IP Interfaces
  • Default Gateways
  • IP Routing
  • Setup Part 5: Final Steps
  • Optional Setup for Telnet Support
  • Configuring SNMP Support
  • Setting Passwords
  • Changing the Default Administrator Password
  • Changing the Default User Password
  • Changing the Default Operator Password
  • The Main Menu
  • Menu Summary
  • Global Commands
  • Command Line Interface Shortcuts
  • CLI List and Range Inputs
  • Command Stacking
  • Command Abbreviation
  • Tab Completion
  • The Information Menu
  • Information Menu
  • System Information Menu
  • SNMPv3 System Information Menu
  • SNMPv3 USM User Table Information
  • SNMPv3 View Table Information
  • SNMPv3 Access Table Information
  • SNMPv3 Group Table Information
  • SNMPv3 Community Table Information
  • SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information
  • SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information
  • SNMPv3 Notify Table Information
  • SNMPv3 Dump Information
  • Show Recent Syslog Messages
  • User Status Information
  • Layer 2 Information Menu
  • FDB Information Menu
  • Show All FDB Information
  • Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu
  • Show All LACP Information
  • Layer 2 Failover Information Menu
  • Show Layer 2 Failover Information
  • Hot Links Information Menu
  • Hotlinks Trigger Information
  • LLDP Information Menu
  • LLDP Remote Device Information
  • LLDP Remote Devices Information
  • Unidirectional Link Detection Information Menu
  • UDLD Port Information
  • OAM Discovery Information Menu
  • OAM Port Information
  • 802.1X Information
  • Spanning Tree Information
  • RSTP/MSTP Information
  • Common Internal Spanning Tree Information
  • VLAN Information
  • Layer 3 Information Menu
  • IP Routing Information Menu
  • Show All IP Route Information
  • ARP Information Menu
  • OSPF Information Menu
  • OSPF General Information
  • OSPF Interface Information
  • OSPF Database Information Menu
  • OSPF Route Codes Information
  • Routing Information Protocol Information Menu
  • RIP Routes Information
  • Show RIP Interface Information
  • IP Information
  • IGMP Multicast Group Information Menu
  • IGMP Multicast Router Port Information Menu
  • IGMP Multicast Router Dump Information
  • IGMP Group Information
  • VRRP Information
  • VRRP information:
  • ServerMobility™ Port Information
  • Quality of Service Information Menu
  • 802.1p Information
  • Access Control List Information Menu
  • Access Control List Information
  • RMON Information Menu
  • RMON History Information
  • RMON Alarm Information
  • RMON Event Information
  • Link Status Information
  • Port Transceiver Status
  • Server Link Failure Detection Information
  • Information Dump
  • StatisticsMenu
  • Port Statistics Menu
  • 802.1x Authenticator Statistics
  • 802.1x Authenticator Diagnostics
  • Bridging Statistics
  • Ethernet Statistics
  • Interface Statistics
  • Interface Protocol Statistics
  • Link Statistics
  • RMON Statistics
  • Layer 2 Statistics Menu
  • FDB Statistics
  • LACP Statistics
  • Hotlinks Statistics
  • LLDP Port Statistics
  • OAM Statistics
  • Layer 3 Statistics Menu
  • IPv4 Statistics
  • Route Statistics
  • ARP Statistics
  • DNS Statistics
  • ICMP Statistics
  • TCP Statistics
  • UDP Statistics
  • IGMP Statistics
  • OSPF Statistics Menu
  • OSPF Global Statistics
  • VRRP Statistics
  • Routing Information Protocol Statistics
  • Management Processor Statistics Menu
  • MP Packet Statistics
  • UCB Statistics
  • CPU Statistics
  • ACL Statistics Menu
  • ACL Statistics List
  • SNMP Statistics
  • NTP Statistics
  • NTP statistics:
  • Server Link Failure Detection Statistics
  • Statistics Dump
  • Server Link Failure Detection statistics:
  • ConfigurationMenu
  • Viewing, Applying, Reverting, and Saving Changes
  • Viewing Pending Changes
  • Applying Pending Changes
  • Reverting Changes
  • Saving the Configuration
  • System Configuration Menu
  • System Host Log Configuration Menu
  • Secure Shell Server Configuration Menu
  • RADIUS Server Configuration Menu
  • TACACS+ Server Configuration Menu
  • LDAP Server Configuration Menu
  • NTP Server Configuration Menu
  • System SNMP Configuration Menu
  • SNMPv3 Configuration Menu
  • User Security Model Configuration Menu
  • SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu
  • View-Based Access Control Model Configuration Menu
  • SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu
  • SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu
  • SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu
  • SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu
  • SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration Menu
  • System Access Configuration Menu
  • Management Networks Configuration Menu
  • User Access Control Configuration Menu
  • System User ID Configuration Menu
  • HTTPS Access Configuration
  • sFlow Configuration Menu
  • sFlow Port Configuration Menu
  • Port Configuration Menu
  • Temporarily Disabling a Port
  • Port Link Configuration Menu
  • UniDirectional Link Detection Configuration Menu
  • Port OAM Configuration Menu
  • Port ACL Configuration Menu
  • Port Spanning Tree Configuration Menu
  • Quality of Service Configuration Menu
  • 802.1p Configuration Menu
  • Access Control List Configuration Menu
  • ACL Configuration Menu
  • Ethernet Filtering Configuration Menu
  • IP version 4 Filtering Configuration Menu
  • TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration Menu
  • ACL Metering Configuration Menu
  • Re-Mark Configuration Menu
  • Re-Mark In-Profile Configuration Menu
  • Re-Mark Out-of-Profile Configuration Menu
  • Re-mark Update User Priority Configuration Menu
  • Packet Format Filtering Configuration Menu
  • ACL Group Configuration Menu
  • Port Mirroring
  • Port-Mirroring Configuration Menu
  • Layer 2Configuration Menu
  • 802.1X Configuration Menu
  • 802.1X Global Configuration Menu
  • 802.1X Guest VLAN Configuration Menu
  • 802.1X Port Configuration Menu
  • RSTP/MSTP Configuration Menu
  • Common Internal Spanning Tree Configuration Menu
  • CIST Bridge Configuration Menu
  • CIST Port Configuration Menu
  • Spanning Tree Configuration Menu
  • Spanning Tree Bridge Configuration Menu
  • Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu
  • Forwarding Database Configuration Menu
  • Static Multicast MAC Configuration Menu
  • Static FDB Configuration Menu
  • LLDP Configuration Menu
  • LLDP Port Configuration Menu
  • LLDP Optional TLV Configuration Menu
  • Trunk Configuration Menu
  • IP Trunk Hash Configuration Menu
  • IP Trunk Hash Menu
  • LACP Configuration Menu
  • LACP Port Configuration Menu
  • Layer 2 Failover Configuration Menu
  • Failover Trigger Configuration Menu
  • Auto Monitor Configuration Menu
  • Manual Monitor Configuration Menu
  • Manual Monitor Port Configuration Menu
  • Manual Monitor Control Configuration Menu
  • Hot Links Configuration Menu
  • Hot Links Trigger Configuration Menu
  • Hot Links Trigger Master Configuration Menu
  • Hot Links Trigger Backup Configuration Menu
  • VLANConfiguration Menu
  • Protocol-Based VLAN Configuration Menu
  • Private VLAN Configuration Menu
  • Layer 3Configuration Menu
  • IP Interface Configuration Menu
  • Default Gateway Configuration Menu
  • IPv4 Static Route Configuration Menu
  • ARP Configuration Menu
  • ARP Static Configuration Menu
  • IP Forwarding Configuration Menu
  • Network Filter Configuration Menu
  • Routing Map Configuration Menu
  • IP Access List Configuration Menu
  • Routing Information Protocol Configuration Menu
  • Routing Information Protocol Interface Configuration Menu
  • RIP Route Redistribution Configuration Menu
  • Open Shortest Path First Configuration Menu
  • Area Index Configuration Menu
  • OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu
  • OSPF Interface Configuration Menu
  • OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu
  • OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu
  • OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu
  • OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu
  • IGMP Configuration Menu
  • IGMP Snooping Configuration Menu
  • IGMP Version 3 Configuration Menu
  • IGMP Static Multicast Router Configuration Menu
  • IGMP Filtering Configuration Menu
  • IGMP Filter Definition Menu
  • IGMP Filtering Port Configuration Menu
  • Domain Name System Configuration Menu
  • Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu
  • VRRP Configuration Menu
  • Virtual Router Configuration Menu
  • Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration Menu
  • Virtual Router Group Configuration Menu
  • Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu
  • VRRP Interface Configuration Menu
  • VRRP Tracking Configuration Menu
  • ServerMobility™ Configuration Menu
  • ServerMobility™ Port Configuration Menu
  • ServerMobility™ Auto-Recovery Configuration Menu
  • IP Loopback Interface Configuration Menu
  • Remote Monitoring Configuration
  • RMON History Configuration Menu
  • RMON Event Configuration Menu
  • RMON Alarm Configuration Menu
  • Server Link Failure Detection Configuration
  • SFD Link to Monitor Menu
  • SFD Link to Enable Menu
  • Saving the Active Switch Configuration
  • Restoring the Active Switch Configuration
  • The Operations Menu
  • Operations Menu
  • Operations-Level Port Options Menu
  • Operations-Level Port 802.1X Options Menu
  • Operations-Level VRRP Options Menu
  • Boot Menu
  • Updating the Switch Software Image
  • Loading New Software to Your Switch
  • Using the BBI
  • Using the CLI
  • Selecting a Software Image to Run
  • Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch
  • Selecting a Configuration Block
  • Resetting the Switch
  • Accessing the ISCLI
  • The Maintenance Menu
  • Maintenance Menu
  • System Maintenance Menu
  • Forwarding Database Maintenance Menu
  • Debugging Menu
  • ARP Cache Maintenance Menu
  • IP Route Manipulation Menu
  • LLDP Cache Manipulation Menu
  • IGMP Maintenance Menu
  • IGMP Snooping Maintenance Menu
  • IGMP Multicast Routers Maintenance Menu
  • Uuencode Flash Dump
  • FTP/TFTP System Dump Put
  • Clearing Dump Information
  • Unscheduled System Dumps

BLADE OS™

Command Reference
HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch Version 5.1 Advanced Functionality Software

Part Number: BMD00114, August 2009

2350 Mission College Blvd. Suite 600 Santa Clara, CA 95054 www.bladenetwork.net

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference Copyright © 2009 BLADE Network Technologies, Inc., 2350 Mission College Blvd., Suite 600, Santa Clara, California, 95054, USA. All rights reserved. Part Number: BMD00114. This document is protected by copyright and distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying, distribution, and decompilation. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of BLADE Network Technologies, Inc. Documentation is provided “as is” without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including any kind of implied or express warranty of non-infringement or the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. U.S. Government End Users: This document is provided with a “commercial item” as defined by FAR 2.101 (Oct. 1995) and contains “commercial technical data” and “commercial software documentation” as those terms are used in FAR 12.211-12.212 (Oct. 1995). Government End Users are authorized to use this documentation only in accordance with those rights and restrictions set forth herein, consistent with FAR 12.211- 12.212 (Oct. 1995), DFARS 227.7202 (JUN 1995) and DFARS 252.227-7015 (Nov. 1995). BLADE Network Technologies, Inc. reserves the right to change any products described herein at any time, and without notice. BLADE Network Technologies, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the use of products described herein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by BLADE Network Technologies, Inc. The use and purchase of this product does not convey a license under any patent rights, trademark rights, or any other intellectual property rights of BLADE Network Technologies, Inc. Originated in the USA. BLADE OS and BLADE are trademarks of BLADE Network Technologies, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Cisco® and EtherChannel® are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Any other trademarks appearing in this manual are owned by their respective companies.

2

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

Contents
Preface 13 Additional references 13 15

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 15 Connecting to the Switch 15 Establishing a console connection Setting an IP address 16 Establishing a Telnet connection 16 17 Establishing an SSH connection Accessing the switch 19 Setup vs. CLI 20 20 Command Line History and Editing Idle Timeout 20 21 Typographic Conventions

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 23 25 Using the Setup Utility 25 Information Needed for Setup Starting Setup When You Log In 25 Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually 26 26 Stopping Setup Restarting Setup 26 Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration 27 28 Setup Part 2: Port Configuration Setup Part 3: VLANs 30 Setup Part 4: IP Configuration 31 31 IP Interfaces Default Gateways 32 IP Routing 33 33 Setup Part 5: Final Steps Optional Setup for Telnet Support 34 Configuring SNMP Support 35 35 Setting Passwords Changing the Default Administrator Password 36 Changing the Default User Password 38 39 Changing the Default Operator Password
BMD00114, August 2009 Contents 3

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

Chapter 3: Menu Basics 41 The Main Menu 41 Menu Summary 42 Global Commands 43 Command Line History and Editing Command Line Interface Shortcuts CLI List and Range Inputs 46 46 Command Stacking Command Abbreviation 47 Tab Completion 47

45 46

Chapter 4: The Information Menu 49 Information Menu 49 System Information Menu 52 54 SNMPv3 System Information Menu SNMPv3 USM User Table Information 56 57 SNMPv3 View Table Information SNMPv3 Access Table Information 58 SNMPv3 Group Table Information 59 59 SNMPv3 Community Table Information SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information 60 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information 61 62 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information SNMPv3 Dump Information 63 General System Information [angus] [count] 64 66 Show Recent Syslog Messages User Status Information 67 Layer 2 Information Menu 68 72 FDB Information Menu Show All FDB Information 73 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu 74 75 Show All LACP Information Layer 2 Failover Information Menu 75 Show Layer 2 Failover Information 76 77 Hot Links Information Menu Hotlinks Trigger Information 77 LLDP Information Menu 78 79 LLDP Remote Device Information

4

Contents

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

Unidirectional Link Detection Information Menu 80 UDLD Port Information 80 81 OAM Discovery Information Menu OAM Port Information 81 802.1X Information 82 84 Spanning Tree Information RSTP/MSTP Information 86 Common Internal Spanning Tree Information 88 90 Trunk Group Information[angus] [count] [grover] VLAN Information 91 Layer 3 Information Menu 92 94 IP Routing Information Menu Show All IP Route Information 95 ARP Information Menu 97 Show All ARP Entry Information [angus] [count] [grover] ARP Address List Information [angus] [count] 98 100 OSPF Information Menu OSPF General Information 102 OSPF Interface Information 102 103 OSPF Database Information Menu OSPF Route Codes Information 105 Routing Information Protocol Information Menu 106 106 RIP Routes Information Show RIP Interface Information 106 IPv6 Routing Information Menu 107 107 IPv6 Routing Table Information IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Cache Information Menu 108 IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Cache Information 108 109 Interface Information IP Information 110 IGMP Multicast Group Information Menu 114 115 IGMP Multicast Router Port Information Menu IGMP Multicast Router Dump Information 115 IGMP Group Information 116 117 VRRP Information ServerMobility™ Port Information 118 Quality of Service Information Menu 119 119 802.1p Information Access Control List Information Menu 121 Access Control List Information 122
BMD00114, August 2009

98

Contents

5

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

RMON Information Menu 123 RMON History Information 124 125 RMON Alarm Information RMON Event Information 127 Link Status Information[Grover Count Angus ] 128 131 Port Information [angus] [count] Port Transceiver Status [Grover Count Zoe ] 133 Server Link Failure Detection Information 134 134 Information Dump Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 135 135 Statistics Menu 137 Port Statistics Menu 802.1x Authenticator Statistics 139 802.1x Authenticator Diagnostics 140 143 Bridging Statistics Ethernet Statistics 144 147 Interface Statistics Interface Protocol Statistics 149 Link Statistics 149 150 RMON Statistics Layer 2 Statistics Menu 153 FDB Statistics 154 155 LACP Statistics Hotlinks Statistics 156 LLDP Port Statistics 157 158 OAM Statistics OAM Statistics 158 Layer 3 Statistics Menu 159 162 IPv4 Statistics Route Statistics 165 ARP Statistics 165 166 DNS Statistics ICMP Statistics 167 TCP Statistics 169 171 UDP Statistics IGMP Statistics 172 OSPF Statistics Menu 173 174 OSPF Global Statistics VRRP Statistics 178
6 Contents BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

Routing Information Protocol Statistics 179 Management Processor Statistics Menu 180 181 MP Packet Statistics TCP Statistics 183 UCB Statistics 183 184 CPU Statistics ACL Statistics Menu 185 ACL Statistics List 185 186 SNMP Statistics NTP Statistics 190 Server Link Failure Detection Statistics 192 192 Statistics Dump Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 193 Configuration Menu 193 195 Viewing, Applying, Reverting, and Saving Changes Viewing Pending Changes 195 196 Applying Pending Changes Reverting Changes 196 Saving the Configuration 196 198 System Configuration Menu System Host Log Configuration Menu 201 Secure Shell Server Configuration Menu 203 205 RADIUS Server Configuration Menu TACACS+ Server Configuration Menu 207 LDAP Server Configuration Menu 211 213 NTP Server Configuration Menu System SNMP Configuration Menu 214 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu 217 219 User Security Model Configuration Menu SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu 221 View-Based Access Control Model Configuration Menu 222 224 SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu 225 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu 226 227 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration Menu 229

BMD00114, August 2009

Contents

7

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

System Access Configuration Menu 230 Management Networks Configuration Menu 232 233 User Access Control Configuration Menu System User ID Configuration Menu 234 HTTPS Access Configuration 235 236 sFlow Configuration Menu sFlow Port Configuration Menu 237 Port Configuration Menu 238 241 Temporarily Disabling a Port Port Link Configuration Menu 241 UniDirectional Link Detection Configuration Menu 243 244 Port OAM Configuration Menu Port ACL Configuration Menu 245 Port Spanning Tree Configuration Menu 246 247 Quality of Service Configuration Menu 802.1p Configuration Menu 248 249 Access Control List Configuration Menu ACL Configuration Menu 250 Ethernet Filtering Configuration Menu 252 253 IP version 4 Filtering Configuration Menu TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration Menu 255 ACL Metering Configuration Menu 256 258 Re-Mark Configuration Menu Re-Mark In-Profile Configuration Menu 259 Re-Mark Out-of-Profile Configuration Menu 259 260 Re-mark Update User Priority Configuration Menu Packet Format Filtering Configuration Menu 261 ACL Group Configuration Menu 262 263 Port Mirroring Port-Mirroring Configuration Menu 264 Layer 2 Configuration Menu 265 267 802.1X Configuration Menu 802.1X Global Configuration Menu 268 802.1X Guest VLAN Configuration Menu 270 271 802.1X Port Configuration Menu RSTP/MSTP Configuration Menu 273 Common Internal Spanning Tree Configuration Menu 275 276 CIST Bridge Configuration Menu CIST Port Configuration Menu 277

8

Contents

BMD00114, August 2009

August 2009 326 Contents 9 .BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference Spanning Tree Configuration Menu 279 Spanning Tree Bridge Configuration Menu 281 283 Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu Forwarding Database Configuration Menu 285 Static Multicast MAC Configuration Menu 286 287 Static FDB Configuration Menu LLDP Configuration Menu 288 LLDP Port Configuration Menu 290 291 LLDP Optional TLV Configuration Menu Trunk Configuration Menu 293 IP Trunk Hash Configuration Menu 294 295 IP Trunk Hash Menu LACP Configuration Menu 296 LACP Port Configuration Menu 297 298 Layer 2 Failover Configuration Menu Failover Trigger Configuration Menu 299 300 Auto Monitor Configuration Menu Manual Monitor Configuration Menu 301 Manual Monitor Port Configuration Menu 302 303 Manual Monitor Control Configuration Menu Hot Links Configuration Menu 304 Hot Links Trigger Configuration Menu 305 306 Hot Links Trigger Master Configuration Menu Hot Links Trigger Backup Configuration Menu 307 VLAN Configuration Menu 308 310 Protocol-Based VLAN Configuration Menu Private VLAN Configuration Menu 312 Layer 3 Configuration Menu 313 315 IP Interface Configuration Menu Default Gateway Configuration Menu 316 IPv4 Static Route Configuration Menu 317 318 ARP Configuration Menu ARP Static Configuration Menu 319 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu 320 321 Network Filter Configuration Menu Routing Map Configuration Menu 322 IP Access List Configuration Menu 324 325 Routing Information Protocol Configuration Menu Routing Information Protocol Interface Configuration Menu RIP Route Redistribution Configuration Menu 328 BMD00114.

August 2009 .1 Command Reference Open Shortest Path First Configuration Menu 329 Area Index Configuration Menu 331 333 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu OSPF Interface Configuration Menu 334 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu 336 338 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu 339 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu 340 341 IGMP Configuration Menu IGMP Snooping Configuration Menu 342 IGMP Version 3 Configuration Menu 344 345 IGMP Static Multicast Router Configuration Menu IGMP Filtering Configuration Menu 346 IGMP Filter Definition Menu 347 348 IGMP Filtering Port Configuration Menu Domain Name System Configuration Menu 349 350 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu VRRP Configuration Menu 351 Virtual Router Configuration Menu 353 356 Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration Menu Virtual Router Group Configuration Menu 358 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu 360 361 VRRP Interface Configuration Menu VRRP Tracking Configuration Menu 362 ServerMobility™ Configuration Menu 363 365 ServerMobility™ Port Configuration Menu ServerMobility™ Auto-Recovery Configuration Menu 366 IP Loopback Interface Configuration Menu 367 368 Remote Monitoring Configuration RMON History Configuration Menu 369 RMON Event Configuration Menu 370 371 RMON Alarm Configuration Menu Server Link Failure Detection Configuration 373 SFD Link to Monitor Menu 374 375 SFD Link to Enable Menu Setup 376 Dump 376 377 Saving the Active Switch Configuration Restoring the Active Switch Configuration 377 10 Contents BMD00114.BLADE OS 5.

1X Options Menu 383 Operations-Level VRRP Options Menu Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu 385 385 Boot Menu 386 Updating the Switch Software Image Loading New Software to Your Switch 386 Using the BBI 386 388 Using the CLI Selecting a Software Image to Run 389 Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch 390 Selecting a Configuration Block Resetting the Switch 391 391 Accessing the ISCLI 382 389 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 393 393 Maintenance Menu 395 System Maintenance Menu Forwarding Database Maintenance Menu 396 Debugging Menu 397 398 ARP Cache Maintenance Menu IP Route Manipulation Menu 399 LLDP Cache Manipulation Menu 400 401 IGMP Maintenance Menu IGMP Snooping Maintenance Menu 402 IGMP Multicast Routers Maintenance Menu 403 404 Uuencode Flash Dump FTP/TFTP System Dump Put 404 Clearing Dump Information 405 405 Unscheduled System Dumps Index 407 BMD00114.1 Command Reference Chapter 7: The Operations Menu 379 Operations Menu 379 Operations-Level Port Options Menu 381 Operations-Level Port 802.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 Contents 11 .

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference 12 Contents BMD00114. August 2009 .

require some administrative configuration before they can be used effectively. Additional references Additional information about installing and configuring the switch is available in the following guides: HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch User Guide HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch ISCLI Reference HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch Application Guide HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch Browser-based Interface Quick Guide BMD00114.Preface The HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch (GbE2c) is ready to perform basic switching functions right out of the box. The BLADE OS 5.1 for the HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch (software part number 485192-B21). The extensive switching software included in the switch provides a variety of options for accessing and configuring the switch: Built-in.1 Command Reference provides a command reference for Advanced Functionality Software (AFS) release 5. Some of the more advanced features. you can view information and statistics about the switch. Using a basic terminal. text-based command line interfaces (BLADE OS CLI and ISCLI) for access via a local terminal or remote Telnet/Secure Shell (SSH) session Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) support for access through network management software such as HP Systems Insight Manager A browser-based management interface for interactive network access through the Web browser The command line interface provides a direct method for collecting switch information and performing switch configuration. however. August 2009 13 . and perform any necessary configuration.

1 Command Reference 14 Preface BMD00114. August 2009 .BLADE OS 5.

August 2009 15 .) An ASCII terminal or a computer running terminal emulation software set to the parameters shown in the table below: Table 1 Console configuration parameters Parameter Value Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control 9600 8 None 1 None BMD00114.CHAPTER 1 The Command Line Interface Connecting to the Switch You can access the command line interface in any one of the following ways: Using a console connection via the console port Using a Telnet connection over the network Using a Secure Shell (SSH) connection to securely log in over a network Establishing a console connection To establish a console connection with the switch. you need: A null modem cable with a female DB-9 connector (See the HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch User Guide for more information.

You will be required to enter a password for access to the switch. Uplink port access: Using a Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) server—By default. 3. 4. you also must configure the management gateway (gateway 4). you must configure the management port with an IP address. and administrator access as those available through the console port. operator.BLADE OS 5. Configuring manually—If the network does not support BOOTP. the management interface is set up to request its IP address from a BOOTP server. The switch supports four concurrent Telnet connections. see the “Setting passwords” section in the “First-time configuration” chapter.1 Command Reference To establish a console connection with the switch: 1. Power on the terminal. add the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the switch to the BOOTP configuration file located on the BOOTP server. 2. The MAC address can be found in the System Information menu. If you want to access the switch from a remote network. Connect the terminal to the console port using the null modem cable. you do not have to configure the MAC address.) Setting an IP address To access the switch via a Telnet or an SSH connection. Telnet provides the same options for user. Press the Enter key a few times on the terminal to establish the connection.) If you are using a DHCP server that also does BOOTP. (For more information. Telnet is enabled on the switch. 16 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface BMD00114. you must configure the management interface (interface 256) with an IP address. Configuring manually—If the network does not support DHCP. August 2009 . By default. you need to have an Internet Protocol (IP) address set for the switch. the management interface (interface 256) requests its IP address from a DHCP server. Establishing a Telnet connection A Telnet connection offers the convenience of accessing the switch from any workstation connected to the network. The switch can get its IP address in one of the following ways: Management port access: Using a Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP) server—When the /cfg/sys/dhcp command is enabled. The default value for the /cfg/sys/dhcp command is enabled. (See the “System information” section in the “Information Menu” chapter. If you have a BOOTP server on the network.

Similarly. this method does not provide a secure connection. Therefore. See the “Secure Shell Server configuration” section in the “Configuration Menu” chapter for information on how to configure SSH. the system will fail to perform the key generation if an SSH/SCP client is logging in at that time. operator. Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) BMD00114. The supported SSH encryption and authentication methods are listed below. SSH ensures that all data sent over the network is encrypted and secure. The Secure Shell (SSH) protocol enables you to securely log into the switch over the network. The switch can perform only one session of key/cipher generation at a time. The password entered determines the access level: administrator. Server Host Authentication—Client RSA authenticates the switch in the beginning of every connection Key Exchange—RSA Encryption: AES256-CBC AES192-CBC AES128-CBC 3DES-CBC 3DES ARCFOUR User Authentication—Local password authentication. August 2009 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 17 . followed by the switch IP address: telnet <switch IP address> You will then be prompted to enter a password. As a secure alternative to using Telnet to manage switch configuration. an SSH/Secure Copy (SCP) client will not be able to log in if the switch is performing key generation at that time or if another client has just logged in before this client.1 Command Reference Once the IP parameters are configured. Establishing an SSH connection Although a remote network administrator can manage the configuration of a switch via Telnet. you must first configure it on the switch. To establish a Telnet connection with the switch. run the Telnet program on the workstation and enter the telnet command. or user. you can access the CLI using a Telnet connection.BLADE OS 5. See the “Accessing the switch” section later in this chapter for description of default passwords. In order to use SSH.

followed by the user account name and the switch IP address: >> # ssh <user>@<switch IP address> You will then be prompted to enter your password. enter yes to continue. August 2009 .1 for Linux (freeware) SecureCRT® 4. Once the IP parameters are configured. SSH service is not enabled on the switch.5 and 2.1 Command Reference The following SSH clients are supported: SSH 3. To establish an SSH connection with the switch.0.58 (Simon Tatham) for Windows Note – The switch implementation of SSH is based on versions 1. and supports SSH clients from version 1. Inc.9 for Linux (FC 3) FedoraCore 3 for SCP commands PuTTY Release 0.BLADE OS 5. SSH clients of other versions are not supported. By default. you can access the command line interface to enable SSH.0 through version 2.) OpenSSH_3. run the SSH program on the workstation by issuing the ssh command.0.0. You may configure the client software to use protocol SSH version 1 or version 2. Note – The first time you run SSH from the workstation.1. At the prompt.8 (VanDyke Technologies. a warning message might appear. 18 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface BMD00114.

Users may display information that has no security or privacy implications. Levels of access to the CLI and Web management functions and screens increase as needed to perform various switch management tasks.BLADE OS 5. Because any changes an operator makes are undone by a reset of the switch. Access to switch functions is controlled through the use of unique usernames and passwords. August 2009 . Administrator—Only administrators can make permanent changes to the switch configuration. operators cannot severely impact switch operation. The default user names/password for each access level is listed in the following table. user Operator Administrator The Operator manages all functions of the switch. The superuser Administrator has complete access to all menus. Operators have access to the switch management features used for daily switch operations. The password entered determines the access level. Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 19 BMD00114. He or she can view all switch status information and statistics. except the management ports. or SSH. Because administrators can also make temporary (operator-level) changes as well. The three levels of access are: User—User interaction with the switch is completely passive. but do have access to the Maintenance menu. Once you are connected to the switch via the local console. admin information. and configuration commands on the switch. changes that are persistent across a reboot/reset of the switch. the switch provides different levels or classes of user access. but cannot make any configuration changes to the switch. Operator—Operators can only effect temporary changes on the switch. such as switch statistics and current operational state information. Table 2 User Access Levels User Account Description and Tasks Performed Password User The User has no direct responsibility for switch management. The Operator oper can reset ports. see “Setting Passwords” on page 35. These changes will be lost when the switch is rebooted/reset. For more information. Administrators can access switch functions to configure and troubleshoot problems on the switch. they must be aware of the interactions between temporary and permanent changes.1 Command Reference Accessing the switch To enable better switch management and user accountability. nothing can be changed on the switch. Telnet. including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. you are prompted to enter a password. Note – It is recommended that you change default switch passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies.

shortcuts. some menu options will not be available.BLADE OS 5. access to each user level can be disabled by setting the password to an empty value. see “System Configuration Menu” on page 198. the system will ask whether you wish to run Setup (see Chapter 2. For information about changing this parameter.1 Command Reference Note – With the exception of the “admin” user. August 2009 . Setup vs. which can be set from 1 to 60 minutes. you are given complete access to the switch. always available] Note – If you are accessing a user account. The following table shows the Main Menu with administrator privileges. the Main Menu of the CLI is displayed instead. If the switch is still set to its factory default configuration. and command line editing functions. 20 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface BMD00114. This function is controlled by the idle timeout parameter. a utility designed to help you through the first-time configuration process. Command Line History and Editing For a description of global commands. CLI Once the administrator password is verified.” Idle Timeout By default. [Main Menu] info stats cfg oper boot maint diff apply save revert exit - Information Menu Statistics Menu Configuration Menu Operations Command Menu Boot Options Menu Maintenance Menu Show pending config changes [global command] Apply pending config changes [global command] Save updated config to FLASH [global command] Revert pending or applied changes [global command] Exit [global command. If the switch has already been configured. “First-Time Configuration”). the switch will disconnect your Telnet session after 10 minutes of inactivity. see “Menu Basics” on page 41.

enter: host# telnet <IP address> examples as a parameter placeholder. Replace the indicated text with the appropriate real name or value when using the command. Read your User’s Guide thoroughly. or words to be emphasized. and directories used within the text. View the readme. BMD00114. Do not type the brackets. August 2009 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 21 . Do not type the brackets. special terms.txt file. AaBbCc123 This bold type appears in command examples. Table 3 Typographic Conventions Typeface or Symbol Meaning Example AaBbCc123 This type is used for names of commands. It also depicts on-screen computer output Main# and prompts. This also shows book titles. files.1 Command Reference Typographic Conventions The following table describes the typographic styles used in this book.BLADE OS 5. Main# sys <AaBbCc123> This italicized type appears in command To establish a Telnet session. [ ] Command items shown inside brackets host# ls [-a] are optional and can be used or excluded as the situation demands. It shows text that must be typed in exactly as shown.

August 2009 .BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference 22 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface BMD00114.

After connecting. The system displays the Main Menu with administrator privileges. Connect to the switch console. August 2009 23 . enter the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# /cfg BMD00114. HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch for HP c-Class BladeSystem Copyright(C)2003 Hewlett-Packard Development Company.P.Exit [global command.Operations Command Menu boot .Statistics Menu cfg .Information Menu stats . From the Main Menu. [Main Menu] info . the login prompt displays. Enter admin as the default administrator password. L. perform the following steps.Boot Options Menu maint .Maintenance Menu diff .Revert pending or applied changes [global command] exit .Apply pending config changes [global command] save . Password: 2.Show pending config changes [global command] apply .Configuration Menu oper .Save updated config to FLASH [global command] revert . To begin first-time configuration of the switch. always available] >> Main# 3. 1.CHAPTER 2 First-Time Configuration This chapter describes how to perform first-time configuration and how to change system passwords.

the BLADE OS software includes a Setup utility.Layer 2 Menu l3 .Restore current configuration from FTP/TFTP server cur .Port Mirroring Menu l2 . [Configuration Menu] sys .Port Menu qos .Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg .BLADE OS 5.Layer 3 Menu rmon . “Connecting to the Switch”).QOS Menu acl .Server Link Failure Detection Menu setup . This chapter describes how to use the Setup utility and how to change system passwords.RMON Menu sfd .Display current configuration To help with the initial process of configuring your switch. you must first connect to the switch (see Chapter 1.1 Command Reference The Configuration Menu is displayed. August 2009 .Backup current configuration to FTP/TFTP server gtcfg . 24 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration BMD00114.Access Control List Menu pmirr . The Setup utility prompts you step-by-step to enter all the necessary information for basic configuration of the switch.Step by step configuration set up dump .System-wide Parameter Menu port . Before you run Setup.

Connect to the switch. Setup can also be activated manually from the command line interface any time after login. Enter Password: BMD00114. Information Needed for Setup Setup requests the following information: Basic system information Date & time Whether to use Spanning Tree Protocol or not Optional configuration for each port Speed.1 Command Reference Using the Setup Utility Whenever you log in as the system administrator under the factory default configuration. and negotiation mode (as appropriate) Whether to use VLAN tagging or not (as appropriate) Optional configuration for each VLAN Name of VLAN Whether the VLAN uses Jumbo Frames or not Which ports are included in the VLAN Optional configuration of IP parameters IP address. After connecting. subnet mask.BLADE OS 5. and VLAN for each IP interface IP addresses for default gateway Whether IP forwarding is enabled or not Starting Setup When You Log In The Setup prompt appears automatically whenever you login as the system administrator under the factory default settings. duplex. 1. the login prompt will appear as shown below. August 2009 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 25 . flow control. you are asked whether you wish to run the Setup utility.

To ease the configuration of the switch. When you abort Setup. Enter y to begin the initial configuration of the switch. August 2009 . or y to restart the Setup program at the beginning. or if the administrator Main Menu appears instead.BLADE OS 5. Restarting Setup You can restart the Setup utility manually at any time by entering the following command at the administrator prompt: # /cfg/setup 26 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration BMD00114. the system will prompt: Would you like to run from top again? [y/n] Enter n to abort Setup. press <Ctrl-C> during any Setup question. 3. If you are certain that you need to return the switch to its factory default settings. If the factory default configuration is detected. the system configuration has probably been changed from the factory default settings. 2009 The switch is booted with factory default configuration. Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually Stopping Setup To abort the Setup utility. the system prompts: HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch 18:44:05 Wed Jan 3. see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 390. a "Set Up" facility which will prompt you with those configuration items that are essential to the operation of the switch is provided. Enter admin as the default administrator password. Would you like to run "Set Up" to configure the switch? [y/n]: Note – If the default admin login is unsuccessful.1 Command Reference 2. or n to bypass the Setup facility.

To keep the current month. press <Enter>. the Setup utility prompts you to input basic system information. To keep the current day. If you decide not to configure VLANs during this session. and IP interfaces.BLADE OS 5. press <Enter>. the system prompts: "Set Up" will walk you through the configuration of System Date and Time. [type Ctrl-C to abort "Set Up"] 1. VLANs. Otherwise enter n. August 2009 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 27 . 2. To keep the current year. BMD00114. Enter the hour of the current system time at the prompt: System Time: Enter hour in 24-hour format [18]: Enter the hour as a number from 00 to 23. 2009. press <Enter>. To keep the current hour. 3. you can configure them later using the configuration menus. For more information on configuring VLANs. press <Enter>.1 Command Reference Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration When Setup is started. Next. Spanning Tree. Enter the year of the current date at the prompt: System Date: Enter year [2009]: Enter the four-digits that represent the year. or by restarting the Setup facility. Enter the day of the current date at the prompt: Enter day [3]: Enter the date as a number from 1 to 31. Port Speed/Mode. Enter the month of the current system date at the prompt: System Date: Enter month [1]: Enter the month as a number from 1 to 12. 5. The system displays the date and time settings: System clock set to 18:55:36 Wed Jan 28. Enter y if you will be configuring VLANs. 4. see the BLADE OS Application Guide.

press <Enter>. 28 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration BMD00114.1 Command Reference 6. or enter e to enable BOOTP. Enter the seconds of the current time at the prompt: Enter seconds [37]: Enter the seconds as a number from 00 to 59. you must decide whether you will configure VLANs and VLAN tagging: Port Config: Will you configure VLANs and VLAN tagging for ports? [y/n] If you decide not to configure VLANs during this session. Enable or disable BOOTP at the prompt: BootP Option: Current BOOTP: enabled Enter new BOOTP [d/e]: Enter d to disable BOOTP. 2009.BLADE OS 5. press <Enter>. Enter the minute of the current time at the prompt: Enter minutes [55]: Enter the minute as a number from 00 to 59. you can configure them later using the configuration menus. August 2009 . 8. see your Application Guide. 7. or by restarting the Setup facility. To keep the current second. The system then displays the date and time settings: System clock set to 8:55:36 Wed Jan 28. Setup Part 2: Port Configuration When configuring port options for your switch. 9. To keep the current minute. For more information about configuring VLANs. some prompts and options may be different. or enter n to leave Spanning Tree on. Before you configure ports. Turn Spanning Tree Protocol on or off at the prompt: Spanning Tree: Current Spanning Tree Group 1 setting: ON Turn Spanning Tree Group 1 OFF? [y/n] Enter y to turn off Spanning Tree.

BLADE OS 5. To skip port configuration. To keep the current setting. or skip port configuration at the prompt: Port Config: Enter port (1-24): If you wish to change settings for individual ports. 2. 5. the system prompts: Gig Link Configuration: Port Flow Control: Current Port 21 flow control setting: both Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]: Enter rx to enable receive flow control. Configure Gigabit Ethernet port autonegotiation mode. Select the port to configure. the system prompts: Port Auto Negotiation: Current Port 21 autonegotiation: Enter new value ["on"/"off"]: on Enter on to enable port autonegotiation. the system prompts: Port VLAN tagging config (tagged port can be a member of multiple VLANs) Current VLAN tag support: disabled Enter new VLAN tag support [d/e]: Enter d to disable VLAN tagging for the port or enter e to enable VLAN tagging for the port. If configuring VLANs. To keep the current setting. or none to turn flow control off for the port. off to disable it. tx for transmit flow control. Otherwise enter n. Configure Gigabit Ethernet port flow parameters. both to enable both. August 2009 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 29 . If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector. If you have selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1. If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector. press <Enter>. enable or disable VLAN tagging for the port. enter the number of the port you wish to configure. 3. Enter y if you will be configuring VLANs. or press <Enter> to keep the current setting. press <Enter> without specifying any port and go to “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 30. 4. BMD00114. press <Enter>.1 Command Reference 1.

4. and confirm placement of the port into this VLAN. Otherwise. Enter the VLAN port numbers: Define Ports in VLAN: Current VLAN 2: empty Enter ports one per line. Enter the new VLAN name at the prompt: Current VLAN name: VLAN 2 Enter new VLAN name: Entering a new VLAN name is optional. NULL at end: If you wish to change settings for individual VLANs. To use the pending new VLAN name. Select the VLAN to configure. To skip VLAN configuration. 2. NULL at end: Enter each port. Setup Part 3: VLANs If you chose to skip VLANs configuration back in Part 2. by port number. or skip VLAN configuration at the prompt: VLAN Config: Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4094.1d)/[1](RSTP)/[0-32](MSTP): 30 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration BMD00114. enter the number of the VLAN you wish to configure. press <Enter> without specifying any port. The system prompts you to configure the next port: Enter port (1-24): When you are through configuring ports. Configure Spanning Tree Group membership for the VLAN: Spanning Tree Group membership: Enter new STG index [1-128](802. August 2009 .1 Command Reference 6. skip to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 31.BLADE OS 5. 3. repeat the steps in this section. 1. press <Enter> without specifying any port. When you are finished adding ports to this VLAN. press <Enter> without typing a VLAN number and go to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 31. press <Enter>.

No two IP interfaces can be on the same IP subnet.0 To keep the current setting. 2. Setup Part 4: IP Configuration The system prompts for IP parameters. The system prompts you to configure the next VLAN: VLAN Config: Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4094. IP Interfaces IP interfaces are used for defining subnets to which the switch belongs. press <Enter> without typing an interface number and go to “Default Gateways” on page 32. press <Enter> without specifying any VLAN. you can lose the connection to the Onboard Administrator. The IP address assigned to each IP interface provide the switch with an IP presence on your network. press <Enter>.0. To skip IP interface configuration.BLADE OS 5. When all VLANs have been configured. or skip interface configuration at the prompt: IP Config: IP interfaces: Enter interface number: (1-256) If you wish to configure individual IP interfaces. Up to 256 IP interfaces can be configured on the GbE2c.0. 1. The interfaces can be used for connecting to the switch for remote configuration.1 Command Reference 5. and for routing between subnets and VLANs (if used). Select the IP interface to configure. NULL at end: Repeat the steps in this section until all VLANs have been configured. enter the number of the IP interface you wish to configure. enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation: Current IP address: Enter new IP address: 0. BMD00114. if you change the IP address of IF 256. August 2009 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 31 . For the specified IP interface. Note – Because interface 256 is reserved for switch management.

press <Enter>. select a default gateway for configuration. To skip default gateway configuration.0.0.0. or skip default gateway configuration: IP default gateways: Enter default gateway number: (1-4) Enter the number for the default gateway to be configured. At the prompt. or press <Enter> without specifying a VLAN number to accept the current setting. or n to leave it disabled: Enable IP interface? [y/n] 6.0 To keep the current setting.BLADE OS 5.0. specify a VLAN for the interface. enter y to enable the IP interface. August 2009 . 5. enter the IP address for the selected default gateway: Current IP address: Enter new IP address: 0. 2.0 Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation. or press <Enter> without specifying an address to accept the current setting. At the prompt. If configuring VLANs. 4. press <Enter> without typing a gateway number and go to “IP Routing” on page 33. At the prompt.1 Command Reference 3. enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation: Current subnet mask: Enter new subnet mask: 0. At the prompt. 32 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration BMD00114. press <Enter> without specifying any interface number. Default Gateways 1. When all interfaces have been configured. The system prompts you to configure another interface: Enter interface number: (1-256) Repeat the steps in this section until all IP interfaces have been configured. This prompt appears if you selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1: Current VLAN: 1 Enter new VLAN [1-4094]: Enter the number for the VLAN to which the interface belongs.

enter n. where subnets may not have a direct presence on the switch. IP routing between them can be performed entirely within the switch. Enter n to continue without reviewing the changes.1 Command Reference 3. When prompted. To disable IP forwarding. enter y to enable the default gateway. This eliminates the need to send inter-subnet communication to an external router device. 1. The system prompts you to configure another default gateway: Enter default gateway number: (1-4) Repeat the steps in this section until all default gateways have been configured. 2. When all default gateways have been configured. enable or disable forwarding for IP Routing: Enable IP forwarding? [y/n] Enter y to enable IP forwarding. This part of the Setup program prompts you to configure the various routing parameters. Setup Part 5: Final Steps 1. At the prompt. When prompted. August 2009 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 33 . can be accomplished through configuring static routes or by letting the switch learn routes dynamically. To keep the current setting. IP Routing When IP interfaces are configured for the various subnets attached to your switch. We recommend that you review the changes. decide whether you wish to review the configuration changes: Review the changes made? [y/n] Enter y to review the changes made during this session of the Setup utility. press <Enter> without specifying any number. press <Enter>. Routing on more complex networks.BLADE OS 5. At the prompt. decide whether to restart Setup or continue: Would you like to run from top again? [y/n] Enter y to restart the Setup utility from the beginning. or n to continue. BMD00114. or n to leave it disabled: Enable default gateway? [y/n] 4.

Enter n to return to the “Apply the changes?” prompt.1 Command Reference 3. 5. Telnet is enabled by default. 4. Optional Setup for Telnet Support Note – This step is optional. Changes are normally applied. decide whether to make the changes permanent: Save changes to flash? [y/n] Enter y to save the changes to flash. the system prompts whether to abort them: Abort all changes? [y/n] Enter y to discard the changes. Apply and save the configuration(s). Perform this procedure only if you are planning on connecting to the switch through a remote Telnet connection. At the prompt. If you do not apply or save the changes. Changes are normally saved at this point. it is recommended that you change the default passwords as shown in “Setting Passwords” on page 35. Enter n to continue without saving the changes. Next. >> System# apply >> System# save 34 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration BMD00114. Note – After initial configuration is complete. decide whether to apply the changes at the prompt: Apply the changes? [y/n] Enter y to apply the changes. August 2009 . To change the setting. 1. use the following command: >> # /cfg/sys/access/tnet 2. or n to continue without applying.BLADE OS 5.

or administrator password. they are public and private respectively: >> # /cfg/sys/ssnmp/rcomm|wcomm 3. August 2009 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 35 . 4. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode. To change the user. Set SNMP read or write community string. enter the proper community string.1 Command Reference Configuring SNMP Support Note – SNMP support is enabled by default. BMD00114. By default. 1. Use the following command to enable Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) support: >> # /cfg/sys/access/snmp disable|read only|read/write 2. When prompted. >> System# apply >> System# save Setting Passwords It is recommended that you change the user and administrator passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies.BLADE OS 5. Apply and save configuration if you are not configuring the switch with Telnet support. operator. Note – If you forget your administrator password. Otherwise apply and save after the performing the “Optional Setup for Telnet Support” steps. you must log in using the administrator password. Passwords cannot be modified from the user or operator command mode.

information.RMON Menu sfd .Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg .Step by step configuration set up dump . August 2009 .Access Control List Menu pmirr . use the following procedure: 1.QOS Menu acl . use the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# /cfg The Configuration Menu is displayed. From the Main Menu.Server Link Failure Detection Menu setup . [Configuration Menu] sys . To change the default password.Backup current configuration to FTP/TFTP server gtcfg .Port Menu qos .Port Mirroring Menu l2 .1 Command Reference Changing the Default Administrator Password The administrator has complete access to all menus.Layer 2 Menu l3 . Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password. select the System Menu: >> Configuration# sys 36 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration BMD00114.Layer 3 Menu rmon .BLADE OS 5.Restore current configuration from FTP/TFTP server cur . including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords.Display current configuration 3.System-wide Parameter Menu port . 2. The default password for the administrator account is admin. From the Configuration Menu. and configuration commands.

[System Menu] syslog sshd radius tacacs+ ldap ntp ssnmp access sflow date time timezone olddst dlight idle notice bannr hprompt reminder rstctrl cur .Enable/disable Telnet access tsbbi .SSH Server Menu .Enable/disable HTTP (Web) access tnet .Set system DST for US prior to 2007 .Set HTTP (Web) server port number http .Enable/disable user configuration from BBI cur .Set login notice .Management Network Definition Menu user .Set system time . August 2009 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 37 .LDAP Authentication Menu .Display current system access configuration 5.Set system daylight savings .1 Command Reference The System Menu is displayed. From the System Menu.Set Telnet server port number tport .NTP Server Menu .Syslog Menu . System Access# user/admpw BMD00114.Enable/disable Reminders .User Access Control Menu (passwords) https .Enable/disable System reset on panic .Set the TFTP Port for the system wport .Set system timezone (daylight savings) .Set SNMP access control tnport . select the System Access Menu: >> System# access The System Access Menu is displayed.System SNMP Menu .Display current system-wide parameters 4.Set login banner .Enable/disable Telnet/SSH configuration from BBI userbbi .Set system date .TACACS+ Authentication Menu .System Access Menu .Set timeout for idle CLI sessions .HTTPS Web Access Menu snmp .sFlow Menu . [System Access Menu] mgmt .BLADE OS 5.Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt . Select the administrator password.RADIUS Authentication Menu .

Apply and save your change by entering the following commands: System# apply System# save Changing the Default User Password The user login has limited control of the switch. 2. use the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# cfg 3. Enter the new administrator password at the prompt: Enter new administrator password: 8. select the System Access Menu: >> System# access 38 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration BMD00114. as shown in the following procedure.. select the System Menu: >> Configuration# sys 4. Enter the current administrator password at the prompt: Changing ADMINISTRATOR password.. 1. at the prompt: Re-enter new administrator password: 9. you can view switch information and statistics.BLADE OS 5. 7. Enter the new administrator password. This password can be changed from the user account. Through a user account. From the System Menu. validation required. but you can’t make configuration changes. August 2009 . Only the administrator can change all passwords. Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password. Enter current administrator password: Note – If you forget your administrator password. The default password for the user account is user. From the Configuration Menu. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode. From the Main Menu. again.1 Command Reference 6.

Only the administrator has the ability to change passwords. again. Select the user password. August 2009 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 39 . validation required. Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password. use the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# cfg BMD00114. Enter the new user password. System# user/usrpw 6. This password cannot be changed from the operator account..1 Command Reference 5. Only the administrator can change the user password. Enter the current administrator password at the prompt. as shown in the following procedure.BLADE OS 5. Operators have access to the switch management features used for daily switch operations. Enter current administrator password: 7.. Enter the new user password at the prompt: Enter new user password: 8. The operator can reset ports or the entire switch. 1. Changing USER password. By default. operators cannot severely impact switch operation. at the prompt: Re-enter new user password: 9. Apply and save your changes: System# apply System# save Changing the Default Operator Password The operator manages all functions of the switch. Entering the administrator password confirms your authority. 2. Because any changes an operator makes are undone by a reset of the switch. From the Main Menu. the operator account is disabled and has no password. Operators can only effect temporary changes on the switch. These changes will be lost when the switch is rebooted/reset.

BLADE OS 5. Enter the new operator password. Changing OPERATOR password. select the System Access Menu: >> System# access 5. Enter the current administrator password at the prompt.. From the System Menu. Select the user password. again. at the prompt: Re-enter new operator password: 9.. August 2009 .1 Command Reference 3. Entering the administrator password confirms your authority. Apply and save your changes: System# apply System# save 40 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration BMD00114. From the Configuration Menu. System# user/opw 6. Only the administrator can change the operator password. validation required. Enter the new operator password at the prompt: Enter new operator password: 8. select the System Menu: >> Configuration# sys 4. Enter current administrator password: 7.

The following table shows the Main Menu for the administrator login. In addition. the administrator can use the CLI for performing all levels of switch configuration. August 2009 41 . and provides a list of commands and shortcuts that are commonly available from all the menus within the CLI. [Main Menu] info stats cfg oper boot maint diff apply save revert exit - Information Menu Statistics Menu Configuration Menu Operations Command Menu Boot Options Menu Maintenance Menu Show pending config changes [global command] Apply pending config changes [global command] Save updated config to FLASH [global command] Revert pending or applied changes [global command] Exit [global command. The Main Menu The Main Menu appears after a successful connection and login. This chapter describes the Main Menu commands. the various commands have been logically grouped into a series of menus and sub-menus. Below each menu is a prompt where you can enter any command appropriate to the current menu. To make the CLI easy to use. Some features are not available under the user login. always available] BMD00114.CHAPTER 3 Menu Basics The BLADE OS Command Line Interface (CLI) is used for viewing switch information and statistics. Each menu displays a list of commands and/or sub-menus that are available. along with a summary of what each command will do.

1 Command Reference Menu Summary Information Menu Provides sub-menus for displaying information about the current status of the switch: from basic system settings to VLANs. and to clear entries in the forwarding database and the ARP and routing tables. TCP. UDP. Maintenance Menu This menu is used for debugging purposes. It is also used for activating or deactivating optional software packages. or sending NTP requests. and VRRP statistics. enabling you to generate a dump of the critical state information in the switch. Configuration Menu This menu is available only from an administrator login. selecting configuration blocks. and for resetting the switch when necessary. enabling or disabling FDB learning on a port. Operations Menu Operations-level commands are used for making immediate and temporary changes to switch configuration. DNS. and more. Changes can be saved to non-volatile memory. August 2009 . Included are port. Changes to configuration are not active until explicitly applied. It includes sub-menus for configuring every aspect of the switch. ICMP.BLADE OS 5. IF. Boot Options Menu This menu is used for upgrading switch software. Statistics Menu Provides sub-menus for displaying switch performance statistics. 42 Chapter 3: Menu Basics BMD00114. IP. SNMP. This menu is used for bringing ports temporarily in and out of service. routing. ARP.

go to the Main Menu. Otherwise. Go up one level in the menu structure. August 2009 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 43 . When used without a value. lines diff apply save revert BMD00114. You will see the following screen: Global Commands: [can be issued from any menu] help up print lines verbose exit diff apply save revert apply ping traceroute telnet pushd popd who chpass_s pwd quit revert history chpass_p The following are used to navigate the menu structure: . or command separator ! Execute command from history Table 4 Description of Global Commands Command ? command or help . For help on a specific command. Apply pending configuration changes.. or print . Move up one menu level / Top menu if first. or up / Action Provides more information about a specific command on the current menu. navigating through menus. type help. These commands are useful for obtaining online help. the current setting is displayed. When used without the command parameter. a summary of the global commands is displayed.. If placed at the beginning of a command. Print current menu . and for applying and saving configuration changes. The default is 24 lines. Show any pending configuration changes. Use this command to restore configuration parameters set since last apply. Set lines to a value of 0 (zero) to disable pagination. Remove pending configuration changes between “apply” commands. Write configuration changes to non-volatile flash memory.1 Command Reference Global Commands Some basic commands are recognized throughout the menu hierarchy. Display the current menu. Set the number of lines (n) that display on the screen at one time.BLADE OS 5. this is used to separate multiple commands placed on the same line.

Use this command to identify the route used for station-to-station connectivity across the network. Use this command to remove any configuration changes made since last save.1 Command Reference Table 4 Description of Global Commands Command revert apply Action Remove pending or applied configuration changes between “save” commands. max-hops (optional) is the maximum distance to trace (1-32 devices). Use this command to verify station-to-station connectivity across the network. The format is as follows: traceroute <host name>| <IP address> [<max-hops (1-32)> [msec delay]] Where IP address is the hostname or IPv4 address of the target station. exit or quit ping traceroute pwd verbose n telnet history pushd popd chpass_p chpass_s 44 Chapter 3: Menu Basics BMD00114. Configures the password for the secondary TACACS+ server. This command is used to telnet out of the switch.BLADE OS 5. As with ping. and delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds for wait for the response. Exit from the command line interface and log out. 1 =Normal: Prompts and requested output are shown. msec delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds between attempts. Go to the menu path and position previously saved by using pushd. tries (optional) is the number of attempts (1-32). the DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. Sets the level of information displayed on the screen: 0 =Quiet: Nothing appears except errors—not even prompts. This command displays the most recent commands. Configures the password for the primary TACACS+ server. August 2009 . but no menus. The format is as follows: ping <host name>|<IP address> [tries (1-32)> [msec delay]] Where IP address is the hostname or IPv4 address of the device. Save the current menu path. so you can jump back to it using popd. When used without a value. The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. 2 =Verbose: Everything is shown. The format is as follows: telnet <hostname>|<IP address> [port] Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device. the current setting is displayed. Display the command path used to reach the current menu.

(Also the right arrow key. The following options are available globally at the command line: Table 5 Command Line History and Editing Options Option Description history !! !n <Ctrl-p> or Up arrow key Display a numbered list of the last 64 previously entered commands. The recalled command can be entered as is.) Move the cursor forward one position to the right. Repeat the nth command shown on the history list.) Recall the previous command from the history list. Delete one character at the cursor position. (Also the up arrow key. The recalled command can be entered as is. Kill (erase) all characters from the cursor position to the end of the command line. or Down arrow key This can be used multiple times to work forward through the last 64 commands. you can retrieve and modify previously entered commands with just a few keystrokes.) Move the cursor back one position to the left. (Also the left arrow key.) Erase one character to the left of the cursor position. <Ctrl-n> (Also the down arrow key.) Recall the next command from the history list.BLADE OS 5. Move cursor to the end of the command line.1 Command Reference Command Line History and Editing Using the command line interface. Print the current level menu list. (Also the Delete key. Repeat the last entered command. Move the cursor to the beginning of command line. Clear the entire line. <Ctrl-a> <Ctrl-e> <Ctrl-b> or Left arrow key <Ctrl-f> or Right arrow key <Backspace> or Delete key <Ctrl-d> <Ctrl-k> <Ctrl-l> <Ctrl-u> Other keys . Insert new characters at the cursor position. Redraw the screen. or edited using the options below. August 2009 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 45 . This can be used multiple times to work backward through the last 64 commands. BMD00114. or edited using the options below.

4095 1-20 1-5. you can type multiple commands on a single line.3. separated by forward slashes (/).90-99. For example. Ranges can also be used to apply the same command option to multiple items. August 2009 . CLI List and Range Inputs For CLI commands that allow an individual item to be selected from within a numeric range.4090-4095 1-5. the keyboard shortcut to access the Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu from the Main# prompt is as follows: Main# cfg/l2/stg 1/port 46 Chapter 3: Menu Basics BMD00114.19.4090-4095 (show all VLANs) (show only VLAN 1) (show listed VLANs) (show range 1 through 20) (show multiple ranges) (show a mix of lists and ranges) The numbers in a range must be separated by a dash: <start of range>-<end of range> Multiple ranges or list items are permitted using a comma: <range or item 1>.BLADE OS 5. to enable multiple ports with one command: # /cfg/port 1-4/ena (Enable ports 1 though 4) Command Stacking As a shortcut. the /info/vlan command permits the following options: # # # # # # /info/vlan /info/vlan /info/vlan /info/vlan /info/vlan /info/vlan 1 1. You can connect as many commands as required to access the menu option that you want.20.1 Command Reference Command Line Interface Shortcuts The following shortcuts allow you to enter commands quickly and easily.<range or item 2> Do not use spaces within list and range specifications. For example. For example. lists and ranges of items can now be specified.

August 2009 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 47 .BLADE OS 5. that command will be supplied on the command line. If the Tab key is pressed without any input on the command line. If only one command fits the input text when Tab is pressed. the currently active menu will be displayed. Entering additional letters will further refine the list of commands or options displayed.1 Command Reference Command Abbreviation Most commands can be abbreviated by entering the first characters which distinguish the command from the others in the same menu or sub-menu. For example. the CLI will display all commands or options in that menu that begin with that letter. the command shown above could also be entered as follows: Main# c/l2/stg 1/po Tab Completion By entering the first letter of a command at any menu prompt and pressing the Tab key. waiting to be entered. BMD00114.

August 2009 .BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference 48 Chapter 3: Menu Basics BMD00114.

Show system port and gea port mapping transcvr .CHAPTER 4 The Information Menu You can view configuration information for the switch in both the user and administrator command modes.Show RMON information link . This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch information. see page 68. /info Information Menu [Information Menu] sys .Show link status port . with pointers to detailed information.Layer 3 Information Menu qos . see page 52. l2 Displays the Layer 2 Information Menu.Dump all information The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 6.System Information Menu l2 . For details.QoS Menu acl . Table 6 Information Menu Options (/info) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System Information Menu.Show Server Link Failure Detection information dump .Layer 2 Information Menu l3 .Show Port Transceiver status sfd . For details. August 2009 49 .Show ACL information rmon . BMD00114.Show port information geaport .

August 2009 . rmon Displays the Remote Monitoring (RMON) Information Menu. qos Displays the Quality of Service (QoS) Information Menu. including: Port name and number Port speed Duplex mode (half. down.1 Command Reference Table 6 Information Menu Options (/info) Command Syntax and Usage l3 Displays the Layer 3 Information Menu. see page 122. For details. For details. see page 123. see page 92. For details. or disabled) For details. 50 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. or both) Link status (up. or auto) Flow control for transmit and receive (no. see page 119. acl Displays the current configuration profile for each Access Control List (ACL) and ACL Group. geaport Displays GEA port mapping information. yes. full. For details. link Displays configuration information about each port. see page 128. port Displays port status information. used by Technical Support personnel. see page 131.BLADE OS 5. including: Port name and number Whether the port uses VLAN Tagging or not Port VLAN ID (PVID) Port name VLAN membership Fast Fowarding status FDB Learning status Flood Blocking status For details.

August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 51 . If you want to capture dump data to a file. For details. For details. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. see page 133. sfd Displays Server Link Failure Detection information. depending on your configuration). see page 134. BMD00114.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference Table 6 Information Menu Options (/info) Command Syntax and Usage transcvr Displays the status of the port transceiver module on each uplink port. dump Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more.

general Displays system information.1 Command Reference /info/sys System Information Menu [System Menu] snmpv3 general log user dump SNMPv3 Information Menu Show general system information Show last 100 syslog messages Show current user status Dump all system information The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 7. including: System date and time Switch model name and number Switch name and location Time of last boot MAC address of the switch management processor IP address of management interface Hardware version and part number Software image file and version number Configuration name Log-in banner. see page 54. see page 66. log Displays most recent syslog messages. Table 7 System Menu Options (/info/sys) Command Syntax and Usage snmpv3 Displays SNMPv3 Information Menu. For details. see page 64.BLADE OS 5. if one is configured For details. To view the menu options. 52 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. August 2009 . with pointers to where detailed information can be found.

depending on your configuration). August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 53 . see page 67.BLADE OS 5. BMD00114.1 Command Reference Table 7 System Menu Options (/info/sys) Command Syntax and Usage user Displays configured user names and their status. dump Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more. For details.

comm Displays information about the community table information. To view a sample. sub-trees. see page 58. To view the table.Show notify table information dump .Show usmUser table information view .Show all SNMPv3 information Table 8 SNMPv3 information Menu Options (/info/sys/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage usm Displays User Security Model (USM) table information.1 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3 SNMPv3 System Information Menu SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by supporting the following: a new SNMP message format security for messages access control remote configuration of SNMP parameters For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276. mask and type of view. see page 59. see page 57.Show vacmViewTreeFamily table information access . To view a sample. [SNMPv3 Information Menu] usm . see page 59.Show community table information taddr .Show vacmSecurityToGroup table information comm . view Displays information about view. user name.Show targetAddr table information tparam . group Displays information about the group that includes. see page 56. 54 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. and group name. access Displays View-based Access Control information. To view a sample.Show targetParams table information notify .BLADE OS 5.Show vacmAccess table information group . August 2009 . the security model. To view a sample.

To view a sample. see page 61. BMD00114. To view a sample. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 55 . tparam Displays the Target parameters table information. see page 60.BLADE OS 5. dump Displays all the SNMPv3 information. see page 62. see page 63. To view a sample. To view a sample.1 Command Reference Table 8 SNMPv3 information Menu Options (/info/sys/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage taddr Displays the Target Address table information. notify Displays the Notify table information.

The USM user table contains the following information: the user name a security name in the form of a string whose format is independent of the Security Model an authentication protocol. DES PRIVACY NO AUTH. NO PRIVACY Table 9 USM User Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/usm) Field Description User Name Protocol This is a string that represents the name of the user that you can use to access the switch.1 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/usm SNMPv3 USM User Table Information The User-based Security Model (USM) in SNMPv3 provides security services such as authentication and privacy of messages. The software also supports two authentication algorithms: MD5 and HMAC-SHA.BLADE OS 5. This security model makes use of a defined set of user identities displayed in the USM user table. August 2009 . BLADE OS supports DES algorithm for privacy. DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA. 56 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. which is an indication that the messages sent on behalf of the user can be authenticated the privacy protocol usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only Protocol -------------------------------HMAC_MD5. This indicates whether messages sent on behalf of this user are protected from disclosure using a privacy protocol.

Displays the MIB subtree as an OID string.3 1.15 1.6.3. Mask Type BMD00114.1 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/view SNMPv3 View Table Information The user can control and restrict the access allowed to a group to only a subset of the management information in the management domain that the group can access within each context by specifying the group’s rights in terms of a particular MIB view for security reasons.3.3.6. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 57 .6.3. Displays whether a family of view subtrees is included or excluded from the MIB view.3 1.6. A view subtree is the set of all MIB object instances which have a common Object Identifier prefix to their names.BLADE OS 5.6.1. Displays the bit mask.3.3.6.1.16 1.1. View Name ----------------iso v1v2only v1v2only v1v2only v1v2only Subtree -----------------1.18 Mask -------------Type -------included included excluded excluded excluded Table 10 SNMPv3 View Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/view) Field Description View Name Subtree Displays the name of the view.

which could be the read or write type of operation or notification into a MIB view. Displays the security model used. 58 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. The View-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of a group. a write-view and a notify-view. Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the read access. For example. SNMPv1. Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the write access. The read-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group while reading the objects. or authPriv. security information. Group Name ---------v1v2grp admingrp Model ------snmpv1 usm Level -----------noAuthNoPriv authPriv ReadV ---------iso iso WriteV ---------iso iso NotifyV ---------v1v2only iso Table 11 SNMPv3 Access Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/access) Field Description Group Name Model Level ReadV WriteV NotifyV Displays the name of group. The notify-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when sending a notification. The write-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when writing objects.BLADE OS 5. or SNMPv2 or USM. Displays the Notify view to which this entry authorizes the notify access.1 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/access SNMPv3 Access Table Information The access control sub system provides authorization services. noAuthNoPriv. The vacmAccessTable maps a group name. a context. This group's access rights are determined by a read-view. authNoPriv. and a message type. August 2009 . Displays the minimum level of security required to gain rights of access. for example.

which is any one of: USM. Sec Model ---------snmpv1 usm usm User Name ------------------------------v1v2only adminmd5 adminsha Group Name -------------------v1v2grp admingrp admingrp Table 12 SNMPv3 Group Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/group) Field Description Sec Model User Name Group Name Displays the security model used. /info/sys/snmpv3/comm SNMPv3 Community Table Information This command displays the community table information stored in the SNMP engine.---------.-------------------. Displays the access name of the group. SNMPv2. Displays the User Security Model (USM) user name. Displays the name for the group. and SNMPv3. This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints from which a command responder application accepts management requests and to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap.---------trap1 public v1v2only v1v2trap Table 13 SNMPv3 Community Table Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/comm) Field Description Index Name User Name Tag Displays the unique index value of a row in this table Displays the community string.1 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/group SNMPv3 Group Table Information A group is a combination of security model and security name that defines the access rights assigned to all the security names belonging to that group. BMD00114. which represents the configuration.BLADE OS 5. Index Name User Name Tag ---------. SNMPv1. The group is identified by a group name. Displays the community tag. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 59 .

Displays the SNMP UDP port number.81. The value of this object identifies an entry in the snmpTargetParamsTable.---------.--------------trap1 47. 60 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.66 162 v1v2trap v1v2param Table 14 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/taddr) Field Description Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params Displays the locally arbitrary. Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------.--------------. Displays the transport addresses.25. The identified entry contains SNMP parameters to be used when generating messages to be sent to this transport address. but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargetAddrEntry.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/taddr SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information This command displays the SNMPv3 target address table information. August 2009 . This column contains a list of tag values which are used to select target addresses for a particular SNMP message. which is stored in the SNMP engine.---.

Displays the Message Processing Model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry.1 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/tparam SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information Name MP Model --------------. The system may choose to return an inconsistentValue error if an attempt is made to set this variable to a value for a security model which the system does not support. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 61 . Sec Level BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. which identifies the entry on whose behalf SNMP messages will be generated using this entry. Displays the security model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. Displays the level of security used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. Displays the securityName. but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargeParamsEntry.-------v1v2param snmpv2c User Name -------------v1v2only Sec Model --------snmpv1 Sec Level --------noAuthNoPriv Table 15 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/tparam) Field Description Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Displays the locally arbitrary.

This represents a single tag value which is used to select entries in the snmpTargetAddrTable. August 2009 . no entries are selected. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable that contains a tag value equal to the value of this entry.-------------------v1v2trap v1v2trap Table 16 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/notify) Field Description Name Tag The locally arbitrary. but unique identifier associated with this snmpNotifyEntry.1 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/notify SNMPv3 Notify Table Information Name Tag -------------------. 62 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. If this entry contains a value of zero length. is selected.BLADE OS 5.

3 v1v2only 1.6.1.---------.------------------------------snmpv1 v1v2only usm adminmd5 usm adminsha Group Name ----------------------v1v2grp admingrp admingrp snmpCommunity Table: Index Name User Name Tag ---------.BLADE OS 5.15 v1v2only 1.3.3.--------------snmpTargetParams Table: Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Sec Level -------------------.--------------.3 v1v2only 1. NO PRIVACY Level -----------noAuthNoPriv authPriv ReadV ---------iso iso WriteV ---------iso iso NotifyV ---------v1v2only iso vacmViewTreeFamily Table: View Name Subtree -------------------.-------.16 v1v2only 1.---------snmpNotify Table: Name Tag -------------------.1 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/dump SNMPv3 Dump Information usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only vacmAccess Group Name ---------v1v2grp admingrp Table: Model ------snmpv1 usm Protocol -------------------------------HMAC_MD5.6.-------------------. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 63 . DES PRIVACY NO AUTH.-------------------snmpTargetAddr Table: Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------.1.---------.18 Mask ------------ Type -------------included included excluded excluded excluded vacmSecurityToGroup Table: Sec Model User Name ---------.-----------------.--------.3.3.---. DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA.3.3.6.6.6.1.--------------iso 1.------- BMD00114.6.

Last boot reason: reset from console MAC address: 00:17:65:fa:e0:00 IP (If 1) address: 20.BLADE OS 5. 14 minutes and 52 seconds.0 (FLASH image1).200. 2009 Time zone: America/US/Pacific Daylight Savings Time Status: Disabled GbE2c Ethernet Blade Switch for HP c-Class BladeSystem sysName: sysLocation: RackId: Default RUID RackName: MyRack EnclosureSerialNumber: USE843HAJH EnclosureName: Top-Chassis BayNumber: 4 Switch has been up for 2 days. or factory default) Login banner. backup. 6 hours. if one is configured 64 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. active configuration.1 Command Reference /info/sys/general General System Information System Information at 13:14:11 Tue Jan 3. System information includes: System date and time Switch model name and number HP c-Class Rack name and location Time of last boot MAC address of the switch management processor IP address of the switch Management MAC address and IP address Software image file and version number Current configuration block (active.1.2 Revision: 0A Switch Serial No: MY36012345 Hardware Part No: 410917-B21 Spare Part No: 414037-001 Software Version 5.22. August 2009 .

BLADE OS 5. depending on the condition as shown below. EMERG: indicates the system is unusable ALERT: Indicates action should be taken immediately CRIT: Indicates critical conditions ERR: indicates error conditions or errored operations WARNING: indicates warning conditions NOTICE: indicates a normal but significant condition INFO: indicates an information message DEBUG: indicates a debug-level message BMD00114. One of eight different prefixes is used. included in text form as a prefix to the log message. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 65 .1 Command Reference /info/sys/log Show Recent Syslog Messages Date Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Time 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:42 17:25:42 17:25:42 17:25:42 17:25:42 17:25:42 17:25:42 Criticality level NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: Message link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on port port port port port port port port port port port port port port port port port port port port port 1 8 7 12 11 14 13 16 15 17 20 23 22 23 21 4 3 6 5 10 9 Each syslog message has a criticality level associated with it.

enabled . offline Current strong password settings: strong password status: disabled This command displays the status of the configured usernames. August 2009 . dis.1 Command Reference /info/sys/user User Status Information Usernames: user .offline admin .BLADE OS 5. password valid.offline oper .disabled . cos user .Always Enabled .online 1 session Current User ID table: 1: name paul . 66 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.

Table 17 Layer 2 Menu Options (/info/l2) Command Syntax and Usage fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Information Menu. For details. see page 75.1 Command Reference /info/l2 Layer 2 Information Menu [Layer 2 Menu] fdb lacp failovr hotlink lldp udld oam 8021x stp cist trunk vlan dump Forwarding Database Information Menu Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Show Failover information Show Hot Links information LLDP Information Menu UDLD Information Menu OAM Information Menu Show 802. see page 72. failovr Displays the Layer 2 Failover Information menu.BLADE OS 5. hotlink Displays the Hot Links Information menu. lacp Displays the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu. udld Displays the Unidirectional Link Detection (UDLD) Information menu. For details. For details. For details. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 67 .1X information Show STP information Show CIST information Show Trunk Group information Show VLAN information Dump all layer 2 information The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 17. lldp Displays the LLDP Information menu. see page 77. BMD00114. see page 78. For details. with pointers to where detailed information can be found. see page 74. For details. see page 80.

For details. see page 84. see page 82. RSTP. including the status (on or off). 68 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. August 2009 . see page 81. or MSTP). and Maintenance (OAM) Information menu. For details. you can view the following STP bridge information: Priority Hello interval Maximum age value Forwarding delay Aging time You can also see the following port-specific STP information: Port priority Cost State Port Fast Forwarding state For details.1 Command Reference Table 17 Layer 2 Menu Options (/info/l2) Command Syntax and Usage oam Displays the Operation. and VLAN membership. 8021x Displays the 802.1X Information Menu.BLADE OS 5. PVRST. Administration. stp Displays Spanning Tree information. Spanning Tree mode (STP/PVST+. In addition to seeing if STP is enabled or disabled.

including the MSTP digest and VLAN membership. CIST bridge information includes: Priority Hello interval Maximum age value Forwarding delay Root bridge information (priority. trunk When trunk groups are configured. For details. path cost. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. MAC address. see page 91. dump Dumps all switch information available from the Layer 2 menu (10K or more. see page 88.BLADE OS 5. see page 90. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. BMD00114. vlan Displays VLAN configuration information. depending on your configuration).1 Command Reference Table 17 Layer 2 Menu Options (/info/l2) Command Syntax and Usage cist Displays Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) information. root port) CIST port information includes: Port number and priority Cost State For details. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 69 . If you want to capture dump data to a file. including: VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Port membership of the VLAN VLAN management status For details.

08:00:20:12:34:56 You can also enter the MAC address using the format. vlan <VLAN number> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN.1 Command Reference /info/l2/fdb FDB Information Menu [Forwarding Database Menu] find . For more information.Show FDB entries on a single VLAN state .BLADE OS 5. 70 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. Note – The master forwarding database supports up to 8K MAC address entries on the MP per switch. dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. state unknown|forward|trunk Displays all FDB entries of a particular state. xxxxxxxxxxxx.Show FDB entries by state dump . Table 18 FDB Information Menu Options (/info/l2/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage find <MAC address> [<VLAN>] Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. Enter the MAC address using the format. August 2009 . see page 73.Show all FDB entries The forwarding database (FDB) contains information that maps the media access control (MAC) address of each known device to the switch port where the device address was learned. For example. 080020123456 port <port number> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port.Show FDB entries on a single port vlan .Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port . The FDB also shows which other ports have seen frames destined for a particular MAC address. For example. You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device.

refer to “Forwarding Database Maintenance Menu” on page 396. the port field represents the trunk group number. but has only been seen as a destination address.BLADE OS 5. When an address is in the unknown state. means that it has been learned by the switch. no outbound port is indicated. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 71 .” Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database To clear the entire FDB. the MAC address has not yet been learned by the switch.1 Command Reference /info/l2/fdb/dump Show All FDB Information MAC address ----------------00:04:38:90:54:18 00:09:6b:9b:01:5f 00:09:6b:ca:26:ef 00:0f:06:ec:3b:00 00:11:43:c4:79:83 VLAN ---1 1 4095 4095 1 Port ---21 21 22 22 21 Trnk ---State ----FWD FWD FWD FWD FWD Permanent --------- P An address that is in the forwarding (FWD) state. although ports which reference the address as a destination will be listed under “Reference ports. When in the trunking (TRK) state. If the state for the port is listed as unknown (UNK). BMD00114.

Show all LACP ports information Use these commands to display Link Aggregation Protocol (LACP) status information about each port on the switch. dump Displays a summary of LACP information. August 2009 . port Displays LACP information about the selected port.Show LACP aggregator information for the port .BLADE OS 5. see page 75.Show LACP port information .1 Command Reference /info/l2/lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu [LACP Menu] aggr port dump . Table 19 LACP Menu Options (/info/l2/lacp) Command Syntax and Usage aggr <port number> Displays detailed information about the LACP aggregator used by the selected port. For details. 72 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.

BLADE OS 5.. Displays the value of the port’s adminkey. Shows the value of the port’s operational key. LACP dump includes the following information for each uplink port: lacp adminkey operkey selected prio aggr trunk status Displays the port’s LACP mode (active.1 Command Reference /info/l2/lacp/dump Show All LACP Information port mode adminkey operkey selected prio aggr trunk status ----------------------------------------------------------------------1 off 1 1 yes 32768 ---2 off 2 2 yes 32768 ---3 off 3 3 no 32768 ---4 off 4 4 no 32768 ---5 off 5 5 no 32768 ---. Table 20 Failover Menu Options (/info/l2/failovr) Command Syntax and Usage trigger <trigger number> Displays detailed information about the selected Layer 2 Failover trigger. Indicates whether the port has been selected to be part of a Link Aggregation Group. passive. or off). August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 73 . /info/l2/failovr Layer 2 Failover Information Menu [Failover Info Menu] trigger . BMD00114. Displays the aggregator associated with each port. Displays the status of LACP on the port (up or down).Show Trigger information Table 20 describes the Layer 2 Failover information options.. This value represents the LACP trunk group number. Shows the value of the port priority.

If Spanning-Tree is enabled. Even if a port’s link status is Down. 74 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. from a teaming perspective the port status is Operational. the monitor port is considered to be failed.BLADE OS 5. the port is in the Forwarding state. August 2009 . the port is aggregated. If the port is a member of an LACP trunk group.1 Command Reference /info/l2/failovr/trigger <trigger number> Show Layer 2 Failover Information Trigger 1 Auto Monitor: Enabled Trigger 1 limit: 0 Monitor State: Up Member Status ------------------trunk 1 21 Operational 22 Operational Control State: Auto Disabled Member Status ------------------1 Operational 2 Operational 3 Operational 4 Operational . If any of the above conditions are not true.. since the trigger is Up. A control port is considered to be operational if the monitor trigger state is Up. A monitor port’s Failover status is Operational only if all the following conditions hold true: Port link is up. and the LACP status is Not Aggregated.. A control port’s status is displayed as Failed only if the monitor trigger state is Down. Spanning-Tree status is Blocking.

preempt enabled. /info/l2/hotlink/trigger Hotlinks Trigger Information Hot Links Info: Trigger Current global Hot Links setting: ON bpdu disabled sndfdb disabled Current Trigger 1 setting: enabled name "Trigger 1".Show Trigger information Table 21 Hot Links menu options (/info/l2/hotlink) Command Syntax and Usage trigger Displays status and configuration information for each Hot Links trigger. fdelay 1 sec Active state: None Master settings: port 21 Backup settings: port 22 Hot Links trigger information includes the following: Hot Links status (on or off) Status of BPDU flood option Status of FDB send option Status and configuration of each Hot Links trigger BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 75 . see page 77. To view a sample display.1 Command Reference /info/l2/hotlink Hot Links Information Menu [Hot Links Info Menu] trigger .

Show LLDP port information rx .Show all LLDP information Table 22 LLDP Information menu options (/info/l2/lldp) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) port information. rx Displays information about the LLDP receive state machine. tx Displays information about the LLDP transmit state machine. see page 79. remodev Displays information received from LLDP -capable devices.Show LLDP remote devices information dump .1 Command Reference /info/l2/lldp LLDP Information Menu [LLDP Information Menu] port .BLADE OS 5.Show LLDP transmit state machine information remodev .Show LLDP receive state machine information tx . August 2009 . 76 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. dump Displays all LLDP information. To view a sample display.

boot image: version 5.. To view detailed information about a device. Local Port Alias: 22 Remote Device Index : 1 Remote Device TTL : 132 Remote Device RxChanges : false Chassis Type : Mac Address Chassis Id : 00-18-b1-4c-0d-00 Port Type : Locally Assigned Port Id : 24 Port Description : ethernet (1000) System Name : 1:10Gb Ethernet Blade Switch System Description : HP 1:10Gb Ethernet Blade Switch.1.132 Interface Subtype : ifIndex Interface Number : 1 Object Identifier : BMD00114.120.0 System Capabilities Supported : bridge System Capabilities Enabled : bridge Remote Management Address: Subtype : IPv4 Address : 10. flash image: version 5.100. follow the remodev command with the index number of the remote device.BLADE OS 5.0. as shown below. LLDP remote device information provides a summary of information about remote devices connected to the switch.. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 77 .1 Command Reference /info/l2/lldp/remodev LLDP Remote Device Information LLDP Remote Devices Information LocalPort | Index | Remote Chassis ID | Remote Port | Remote System Name ----------|-------|----------------------|-------------|------------------22 | 1 | 00 18 b1 4c 0d 00 | 24 | 1:10Gb Ethernet .1.

August 2009 . neighbor mismatch) 78 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. /info/l2/udld/port <port number> UDLD Port Information UDLD information on port 21 Port enable administrative configuration setting: Enabled Port administrative mode: normal Port enable operational state: link up Port operational state: advertisement Port bidirectional status: bidirectional Message interval: 15 Time out interval: 5 Neighbor cache: 1 neighbor detected Entry #1 Expiration time: 31 seconds Device Name: Device ID: 00:da:c0:00:04:00 Port ID: 21 UDLD information includes the following: Status (enabled or disabled) Mode (normal or aggressive) Port state (link up or link down) Bi-directional status (unknown. see page 80. To view a sample display.1 Command Reference /info/l2/udld Unidirectional Link Detection Information Menu [UDLD Information Menu] port . TX-RX loop. dump Displays all UDLD information.Show UDLD port information dump . bidirectional.Show all UDLD information Table 23 UDLD Information menu options (/info/l2/udld) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays UDLD information about the selected port. unidirectional.

August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 79 . BMD00114. dump Displays all OAM information.Show OAM port information dump . /info/l2/oam/port <port number> OAM Port Information OAM information on port 21 State enabled Mode active Link up Satisfied Yes Evaluating No Remote port information: Mode active MAC address 00:da:c0:00:04:00 Stable Yes State valid Yes Evaluating No OAM port display shows information about the selected port and the peer to which the link is connected. To view a sample display.Show all OAM information Table 24 OAM Discovery Information menu options (/info/l2/oam) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays OAM information about the selected port.1 Command Reference /info/l2/oam OAM Discovery Information Menu [OAM Information Menu] port .BLADE OS 5. see page 81.

1 Command Reference /info/l2/8021x 802.-----------.-----------. Table 25 802. Displays the Access Control authorization mode for the port. -----------------------------------------------------------------* .Port down or disabled The following table describes the IEEE 802.---------1 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *2 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *3 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *4 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *5 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *6 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *7 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *8 force-auth authorized initialize initialize 9 force-auth authorized initialize initialize 10 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *11 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *12 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *13 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *14 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *15 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *16 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *17 force-auth unauthorized initialize initialize *18 force-auth unauthorized initialize initialize *19 force-auth unauthorized initialize initialize *20 force-auth unauthorized initialize initialize ..BLADE OS 5. August 2009 .1X Information System capability System status Protocol version Guest VLAN status Guest VLAN : : : : : Authenticator disabled 1 disabled none Authenticator Backend Port Auth Mode Auth Status PAE State Auth State ----..1X parameters.-------------. The Authorization mode can be one of the following: force-unauth auto force-auth 80 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.1X Parameter Descriptions (/info/l2/8021x) Parameter Description Port Auth Mode Displays the port number.

1X Parameter Descriptions (/info/l2/8021x) (continued) Parameter Description Auth Status Authenticator PAE State Displays the current authorization status of the port.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference Table 25 802. The PAE state can be one of the following: initialize disconnected connecting authenticating authenticated aborting held forceAuth Backend Auth State Displays the Backend Authorization State. The Backend Authorization state can be one of the following: initialize request response success fail timeout idle BMD00114. Displays the Authenticator Port Access Entity State. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 81 . either authorized or unauthorized.

----------.1 Command Reference /info/l2/stp Spanning Tree Information -----------------------------------------------------------------upfast disabled.-------. in addition to seeing if STG is enabled or disabled. ! = Automatic path cost.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP). the IEEE 802. If IEEE 802.----------------. update 40 Pvst+ compatibility mode enabled -----------------------------------------------------------------Spanning Tree Group 1: On (STP/PVST+) VLANs: 1 Current Root: ffff 00:13:0a:4f:7d:d0 Parameters: Priority 65534 Path-Cost 0 Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel 21 2 20 15 FwdDel 15 Aging 300 Hello 2 MaxAge 20 Port Priority Cost FastFwd State Designated Bridge Des Port ---. you can view the following STG bridge information: Table 26 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Current Root The Current Root shows information about the root bridge for the Spanning Tree.------1 2 3 . August 2009 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 n n n FORWARDING * FORWARDING * FORWARDING * * = STP turned off for this port.---.1D Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). When STP is used. The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STG root bridge. The switch software uses the IEEE 802.-------..1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP). Priority (bridge) 82 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. Information includes the priority (in hexadecimal format) and MAC address of the root. or Per VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (PVRST) are turned on. see “RSTP/MSTP Information” on page 86.BLADE OS 5..

The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. if applicable. A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated. The maximum age parameter specifies. or DISABLED. Information includes the priority (hex) and MAC address of the Designated Bridge. The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge connected to each port. The aging time parameter specifies. the lower the path cost.1 Command Reference Table 26 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions (continued) Parameter Description Hello The hello time parameter specifies. LISTENING. how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). in seconds. The state field shows the current state of the port.BLADE OS 5. the faster the port. the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. FORWARDING. The FastFwd shows whether the port is in Fast Forwarding mode or not. the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the Forwarding Database. LEARNING. which permits the port that participates in Spanning Tree to bypass the Listening and Learning states and enter directly into the Forwarding state. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. in seconds. Generally speaking. The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. in seconds. The Forward Delay parameter specifies. Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. in seconds. the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigure the STG network. the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from listening to learning and from learning state to forwarding state. The state field can be either BLOCKING. The identifier of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is connected. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 83 . MaxAge FwdDel Aging Priority (port) Cost FastFwd State Designated Bridge Designated Port BMD00114.

Table 27 RSTP/MSTP Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Current Root The Current Root shows information about the root bridge for the Spanning Tree.-------. Priority (bridge) Hello 84 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP). * = STP turned off for this port.1 Command Reference /info/l2/stg RSTP/MSTP Information Spanning Tree Group 1: On (RSTP) VLANs: 1 Current Root: ffff 00:13:0a:4f:7d:d0 Parameters: Priority 61440 Path-Cost 0 Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel 21 2 20 15 FwdDel 15 Aging 300 Hello 2 MaxAge 20 Port Prio Cost State Role Designated Bridge Des Port Type ---. The following table describes the STP parameters in RSTP or MSTP mode. you can view RSTP/MSTP bridge information for the Spanning Tree Group and port-specific RSTP information. how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU).---1 0 0 DSB 2 0 0 DSB 3 0 0 DSB 4 0 0 DSB .------------------..BLADE OS 5.-----. The switch software can be set to use the IEEE 802. Information includes the priority (in hexadecimal format) and MAC address of the root.---.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) or the IEEE 802. If RSTP/MSTP is turned on (see page 273). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. The hello time parameter specifies. in seconds..---.---. August 2009 . The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STP root bridge.

Forwarding (FWD). the faster the port.1 Command Reference Table 27 RSTP/MSTP Parameter Descriptions (continued) Parameter Description MaxAge The maximum age parameter specifies. The aging time parameter specifies. Learning (LRN). Generally speaking. and whether the port is an edge port. The port role can be one of the following: Designated (DESG). Alternate (ALTN). the lower the path cost. Root (ROOT). or Disabled (DSB). A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. The Role field shows the current role of this port in the Spanning Tree. Master (MAST). the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from listening to learning and from learning state to forwarding state. Information includes the priority (in hexadecimal format) and MAC address of the Designated Bridge. The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigures the STP network. the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the Forwarding Database. The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is connected. The State field shows the current state of the port. in seconds. The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. P2P. Type of link connected to the port. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 85 . Backup (BKUP). or SHARED. FwdDel Aging Prio (port) Cost State Role Designated Bridge Designated Port Type BMD00114. The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge connected to each port. the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. in seconds. Disabled (DSB). in seconds. Link type values are AUTO. The State field in RSTP or MSTP mode can be one of the following: Discarding (DISC). if applicable.BLADE OS 5. The Forward Delay parameter specifies.

---. Edge * = STP turned off for this port.. 128 128 128 128 2000 FWD 2000 FWD 2000 DSB 2000 DSB DESG 8000-00:03:42:fa:3b:80 8001 4 DESG 8000-00:03:42:fa:3b:80 8002 P2P. The following table describes the CIST parameters. Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value.1 Command Reference /info/l2/cist Common Internal Spanning Tree Information Common Internal Spanning Tree: on VLANs MAPPED: 1-4094 VLANs: 1 4095 Current Root: 8000 00:11:58:ae:39:00 Cist Regional Root: 8000 00:11:58:ae:39:00 Parameters: Path-Cost 0 Path-Cost 0 Port MaxAge FwdDel 0 20 15 Priority MaxAge FwdDel Hops 61440 20 15 20 Port Prio Cost State Role Designated Bridge Des Port Hello Type ---..---1 2 3 4 .----.---.---. you can view CIST bridge and port-specific information. The CIST Regional Root shows information about the root bridge for this MSTP region. CIST Regional Root Priority (bridge) Hello 86 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU).-----. Values on this row of information refer to the regional root. The hello time parameter specifies.--------------------. In addition to seeing if Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) is enabled or disabled. in seconds.BLADE OS 5. Table 28 CIST Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description CIST Root The CIST Root shows information about the root bridge for the Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST). The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STP root bridge. Values on this row of information refer to the CIST root.-------. August 2009 .

Link type values are AUTO. The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigure the STP network. The port role can be one of the following: Designated (DESG). Type of link connected to the port. the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state. The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is connected. Master (MAST). or Forwarding (FWD).1 Command Reference Table 28 CIST Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description MaxAge The maximum age parameter specifies. and whether the port is an edge port. FwdDel Priority (port) Cost State Role Designated Bridge Designated Port Type BMD00114. The state field shows the current state of the port. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 87 . The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge connected to each port. Alternate (ALTN). the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. Root (ROOT). the faster the port. The Role field shows the current role of this port in the Spanning Tree. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. Disabled (DSB). if applicable. Generally speaking. in seconds. The forward delay parameter specifies. in seconds. or SHARED. Information includes the priority (in hexadecimal format) and MAC address of the Designated Bridge. The state field can be either Discarding (DISC). Backup (BKUP).BLADE OS 5. Learning (LRN). A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated. P2P. or Unknown (UNK). The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. the lower the path cost.

the remaining ports in the trunk group will also be set to forwarding.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 .Static Port state: 17: STG 1 forwarding 18: STG 1 forwarding When trunk groups are configured. 88 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. Note – If Spanning Tree Protocol on any port in the trunk group is set to forwarding.1 Command Reference /info/l2/trunk Trunk Group Information Trunk group 1: Enabled Protocol . you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups.

BLADE OS 5. Port membership is represented in slot/port format. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 89 .---------------Default VLAN ena 4 5 redlan ena 24 ixiaTraffic ena 1 12 13 23 bpsports ena 3-6 8-10 Mgmt VLAN ena 18 Protocol -------1 FrameType EtherType -------------------Ether2 0080 Priority -------0 Status -----ena Ports ----------4 PVLAN ----1 PVLAN ----none PVLAN-Tagged Ports --------------------------none Type --------primary Mapped-To ---------empty Status ---------ena Ports ----------------empty Private-VLAN -----------20 This information display includes all configured VLANs and all member ports that have an active link state.-----.1 Command Reference /info/l2/vlan VLAN Information VLAN ---1 24 300 4000 4095 Name Status Ports -------------------------------. VLAN information includes: VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Port membership of the VLAN Protocol-based VLAN information Private VLAN configuration BMD00114.

1 Command Reference /info/l3 Layer 3 Information Menu [Layer 3 Menu] route arp ospf rip ip igmp vrrp sm dump IP Routing Information Menu ARP Information Menu OSPF Routing Information Menu RIP Routing Information Menu Show IP information Show IGMP Snooping Multicast Group information Show Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol information Server Mobility Information Menu Dump all layer 3 information The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 29. and gateway address Type of route Tag indicating origin of route Metric for RIP tagged routes. see page 106. For details. arp Displays the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Information Menu. 90 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. For details. Using the options of this menu. the system displays the following for each configured or learned route: Route destination IP address. see page 100. specifying the number of hops to the destination (1-15 hops.BLADE OS 5. ospf Displays OSPF routing Information Menu. August 2009 . see page 97. For details. rip Displays Routing Information Protocol Menu. Table 29 Layer 3 Menu Options (/info/l3) Command Syntax and Usage route Displays the IP Routing Menu. see page 94. subnet mask. or 16 for infinite hops) The IP interface that the route uses For details. with pointers to detailed information.

For details. VLAN number. see page 110. IP information. and health status IP forwarding settings. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. If you want to capture dump data to a file. BMD00114. route map settings igmp Displays IGMP Information Menu.BLADE OS 5. subnet mask. network filter settings. For details. Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use. vrrp Displays the VRRP Information Menu. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 91 . sm Displays the Server Mobility Information Menu. see page 114. For details. and operational status. depending on your configuration).1 Command Reference Table 29 Layer 3 Menu Options (/info/l3) Command Syntax and Usage ip Displays IP Information. dump Dumps all switch information available from the Layer 3 Menu (10K or more. see page 118. gateway number. IP address. IP address. see page 117. includes: IP interface information: Interface number. For details.

tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|broadcast|martian|multicast Displays routes of a single tag. August 2009 .BLADE OS 5. 92 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.Show if . Table 30 Route Information Menu Options (/info/l3/route) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as 192. type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast Displays routes of a single type.Show dump .17.44)> Displays routes to a single gateway.4.Show type . see Table 31 on page 95.Show gw .17. For a description of IP routing types.101)> Displays a single route by destination IP address.1 Command Reference /info/l3/route IP Routing Information Menu [IP Routing Menu] find . gw <default gateway address (such as 192. you can display all or a portion of the IP routes currently held in the switch. if <interface number> Displays routes on a single interface.Show tag . see Table 32 on page 96. For a description of IP routing types.4.Show a single route by destination IP address routes to a single gateway routes of a single type routes of a single tag routes on a single interface all routes Using the commands listed below. dump Displays all routes configured in the switch. see page 95. For more information.

0.255.38 local addr 256 * 12.255.--------. Packets will be delivered to a destination host or subnet attached to the switch.20.0.0 172.0.0 0.0 224.0 172.0 martian martian * 224.0.0.0 0.20. Packets to this destination are discarded. The destination belongs to a host or subnet which is filtered out.0.255.--* 0.BLADE OS 5.255.0 255.1 Command Reference /info/l3/route/dump Show All IP Route Information Status code: * .0.38 direct fixed 256 * 12.0.0.255.--------------.20.255.255.255 255. Indicates a broadcast route.255 255.0.0.0.255 172.255.255.---.0. Indicates a multicast route.60.0.0 martian martian * 12.255 broadcast broadcast The following table describes the Type parameters.0.0 255.--------------.0 240.0 0. Indicates a route to one of the switch’s IP interfaces.20.255.0 multicast addr * 255.20.38 255.255 172.20.0.best Destination Mask Gateway Type Tag Metr If --------------. BMD00114.0.0.0.60.255.255 broadcast broadcast 256 * 224.1 indirect static 256 * 127.20.0.60. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 93 .60.0.0 0.255.255.0.0.0. Table 31 IP Routing Type Parameters Parameter Description indirect direct local broadcast martian multicast The next hop to the host or subnet destination will be forwarded through a router at the Gateway address.--------.255 255.

The address is a static route which has been configured on the switch. The address was learned by Open Shortest Path First (OSPF). Indicates a multicast address. The address belongs to a filtered group. The address was learned by the Routing Information Protocol (RIP). August 2009 .BLADE OS 5. Table 32 IP Routing Tag Parameters Parameter Description fixed static addr rip ospf broadcast martian multicast The address belongs to a host or subnet attached to the switch. The address belongs to one of the switch’s IP interfaces. Indicates a broadcast address.1 Command Reference The following table describes the Tag parameters. 94 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.

VLAN and port for the address. see page 98. including: IP address and MAC address of each entry Address status flag (see below) The VLAN and port to which the address belongs The ports which have referenced the address (empty if no port has routed traffic to the IP address shown) For more information. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 95 . address status flags (see Table 33 on page 97). IP mask. BMD00114. MAC address. Table 33 ARP Information Menu Options (/info/l3/arp) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as.101> Displays a single ARP entry by IP address. and VLAN flags. 192.1 Command Reference /info/l3/arp ARP Information Menu [Address Resolution Protocol Menu] find .BLADE OS 5.Show ARP entries on a single VLAN addr . and port referencing information.Show ARP entries on a single port vlan .Show ARP address list dump .Show a single ARP entry by IP address port . vlan <VLAN number> Displays the ARP entries on a single VLAN.17. addr Displays the ARP address list: IP address. port <port number> Displays the ARP entries on a single port. dump Displays all ARP entries.4.Show all ARP entries The ARP information includes IP address and MAC address of each entry.

18.255.----------------205.50.255 00:70:cf:03:20:06 VLAN Pass-Up ---.23.----4095 1 96 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. The MAC address has not been learned. Indirect route entry.255.1 255. the designated port will be the normal ingress port.1 00:1a:4b:cd:77:36 4095 19 12.111 00:1f:29:95:f7:e5 4095 19 12.20. If you have VMA turned off. Unresolved ARP entry.BLADE OS 5.----.20.178.---12. August 2009 . the referenced port will be the designated port. The Flag field is interpreted as follows: Table 34 ARP Dump Flag Parameters Flag Description P R U Permanent entry created for switch IP interface.66 255.20.--------------.----------------.60.255.255.255 00:22:00:b8:c0:01 205.1 Command Reference /info/l3/arp/dump Show All ARP Entry Information IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port --------------.---.38 P 00:22:00:b8:c0:01 4095 Note – If you have VMA turned on.20. /info/l3/arp/addr ARP Address List Information IP address IP mask MAC address --------------.178.1.60.1 00:15:40:07:20:42 4095 19 12.

it displays area information for all the areas. if <interface number> Displays interface information for a particular interface.Show OSPF information Table 35 OSPF Information Menu options (/info/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage general Displays general OSPF information.Show general information aindex . sumaddr <area index (0-2)> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to non-NSSA areas.1 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf OSPF Information Menu [OSPF Information Menu] general .Show OSPF routes dump .C. If no parameter is supplied.Database Menu sumaddr . nbr <nbr router-id (A. it displays the information about all the current neighbors.Show summary address list nsumadd . If no router ID is supplied.B. it displays information for all the interfaces.BLADE OS 5. aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays area information for a particular area index.Show neighbor(s) information dbase . If no parameter is supplied.Show NSSA summary address list routes . BMD00114. To view menu options. see page 103. virtual Displays information about all the configured virtual links.Show interface(s) information virtual .D)> Displays the status of a neighbor with a particular router ID.Show area(s) information if . See page 102 for a sample output.Show details of virtual links nbr . dbase Displays OSPF database menu. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 97 . See page 102 for a sample output.

See page 105 for a sample output. 98 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. routes Displays OSPF routing table. August 2009 . dump Displays the OSPF information.1 Command Reference Table 35 OSPF Information Menu options (/info/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage nsumadd <area index (0-2)> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to NSSA areas.

1. Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.10.12.10.0.1. Dead 40. of which 2 are >=INIT state.10.1 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf/general OSPF General Information OSPF Version 2 Router ID: 10.12.10.1 Backup Designated Router (ID) 10.1 Started at 1663 and the process uptime is 4626 Area Border Router: yes.1.BLADE OS 5.10. Wait 1663. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 99 .10. Hello 10.14.1.10. Poll interval 0.0.12. Transit delay 1 Neighbor count is 1 If Events 4.2 Timer intervals.1. Retransmit 5.10. Ip Address 10.0 Authentication : none Import ASExtern : yes Number of times SPF ran : 8 Area Border Router count : 2 AS Boundary Router count : 0 LSA count : 5 LSA Checksum sum : 0x2237B Summary : noSummary /info/l3/ospf/if <interface number> OSPF Interface Information Ip Address 10.0. Area 0. State DR. Authentication type none BMD00114. Ip Address 10. of which 3-transit 0-nssa Area Id : 0.0.10.10. Admin Status UP Router ID 10. AS Boundary Router: no LS types supported are 6 External LSA count 0 External LSA checksum sum 0x0 Number of interfaces in this router is 2 Number of virtual links in this router is 1 16 new lsa received and 34 lsa originated from this router Total number of entries in the LSDB 10 Database checksum sum 0x0 Total neighbors are 1. 2 are >=EXCH state. 2 are =FULL state Number of areas is 2.

D> | <self> Displays ASBR summary LSAs.1.LS Database summary ext .Router LS Database info self .All Table 36 OSPF Database Information Menu Options (/info/l3/ospf/dbase) Command Syntax and Usage advrtr <router-id (A. The usage of this command is as follows: asbrsum adv-rtr 20. asbrsum link-state-id 10.1. asbrsum with no parameters displays all the ASBR summary LSAs. for example: 20. No parameters are required.1.1.BLADE OS 5.Network LS Database info nssa .1. dbsumm Displays the following information about the LS database in a table format: Number of LSAs of each type in each area. 100 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.1 Displays ASBR summary LSAs having the advertising router 20.External LS Database info nw .1.B.Self Originated LS Database info summ .LS Database info for an Advertising Router asbrsum .B. Total number of LSAs for all LSA types for all areas combined.1.NSSA External LS Database info rtr .1.1.B. asbrsum self Displays the self advertised ASBR summary LSAs.1.Network-Summary LS Database info all . asbrsum <adv-rtr (A. Total number of LSAs for each LSA type for all areas combined.1.1.1 Displays ASBR summary LSAs having the link state ID 10.C. Total number of LSAs for each area.C.D)> Takes advertising router as a parameter.C.ASBR Summary LS Database info dbsumm . Displays all the Link State Advertisements (LSAs) in the LS database that have the advertising router with the specified router ID.D)> | <link_state_id (A.1. August 2009 .1 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf/dbase OSPF Database Information Menu [OSPF Database Menu] advrtr .

summ <adv-rtr (A. No parameters are required.B.B.D)>|<link_state_id (A.C. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 101 . The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.C. nw <adv-rtr (A. nssa <adv-rtr (A. all Displays all the LSAs.C.D>|<self> Displays the router (type 1) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.D)>|<link_state_id (A.D>|<self> Displays the network summary (type 3) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.B. rtr <adv-rtr (A.B.D>|<self> Displays the NSSA (type 7) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.B. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.C.B.1 Command Reference Table 36 OSPF Database Information Menu Options (/info/l3/ospf/dbase) Command Syntax and Usage ext <adv-rtr (A.C. self Displays all the self-advertised LSAs.B.D)>|<link_state_id (A.BLADE OS 5.C. BMD00114.C.C.B.D>|<self> Displays the network (type 2) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSA.network LS database.D>|<self> Displays the AS-external (type 5) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.

0. E2 .2 172.BLADE OS 5.OSPF external type 2 best IA *IA *IA E2 E2 1.18.0.1 2.0.1.0.0.0/30 via 1.1 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf/routes OSPF Route Codes Information Codes: IA N1 E1 * OSPF inter area.0.0.1.0/0 via 1.0.OSPF NSSA external type 2 OSPF external type 1.2/32 via 30. N2 .0.0. OSPF NSSA external type 1.1. August 2009 .0.0.0/30 via 1.1.0/30 directly connected 0.1 13.1 172.2 102 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.1.0.0.1.18.1/32 via 30.

0. listen enabled.key none BMD00114. enabled version 2.4.BLADE OS 5.1.4. For more information.0.0.1. Table 37 RIP Information Menu Options (/info/l3/rip) Command Syntax and Usage routes Displays RIP routes. including the routes that are undergoing garbage collection with metric = 16.Show RIP routes dump . /info/l3/rip/routes RIP Routes Information >> IP Routing# /info/l3/rip/routes 30. see page 106.0.1. dump <interface number or zero for all IFs)> Displays RIP user’s configuration.0/24 directly connected 3.1. For more information.1 Command Reference /info/l3/rip Routing Information Protocol Information Menu [RIP Information Menu] routes .2 metric 2 This table contains all dynamic routes learnt through RIP.1.0/16 via 30.11 metric 16 10.1.1. mcast enabled. trigg enabled.Show RIP user's configuration Use this menu to view information about the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) configuration and statistics.0. metric 1 auth none.0/8 via 30.2 metric 3 20.11 metric 4 4. This table does not contain locally configured static routes. default none poison disabled.0/8 via 30. see page 106.2.0.1. /info/l3/rip/dump <interface number> Show RIP Interface Information RIP USER CONFIGURATION : RIP on update 30 RIP Interface 1 : 10.0.0.0/8 via 30. split horizon enabled. supply enabled. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 103 .1.1.

255. vlan 1. broadcast address. up Loopback interface information: Default gateway information: metric strict 1: 20.27.BLADE OS 5.144. vlan 4095. dirbr disabled. including the forwarding status of directed broadcasts. up active Current ServerMobility settings: OFF ServerMobility Encoding Scheme: switch ServerMobility ports: empty DHCP request filtering enabled ports: empty Relay on non-ServerMobility ports: Ena Active-Backup ports: Auto-Recovery: Disabled Auto-Recovery Time: 5 seconds Current IP forwarding settings: OFF. and the status of ICMP re-directs Network filter settings Route map settings 104 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.255. FAILED 4: 10.0 10.100.255.0 200. IP address.200.1 Command Reference /info/l3/ip IP Information IP information: Interface information: 1: 20.200. and operational status. 256: 10. VLAN number.255.255.2 255.1. and health status Server Mobility settings IP forwarding settings. vlan 4095.27. IP address.144. Loopback interface information. vlan any. noicmprd disabled Current network filter settings: none Current route map settings: IP information includes: IP interface information: Interface number.100.27. DOWN Reminder: Please make sure that ports are in VLAN 1 and have link.11 255. August 2009 .255.144.100. gateway number.200. subnet mask. if applicable Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use.1.

vlan <VLAN number> Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single VLAN. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 105 .1 Command Reference /info/l3/igmp IGMP Multicast Group Information Menu [IGMP Multicast mrouter find vlan port trunk detail dump Menu] Show IGMP Snooping Multicast Router Port information Show a single group by IP group address Show groups on a single vlan Show groups on a single port Show groups on a single trunk Show detail of a single group by IP group address Show all groups Table 40 describes the commands used to display information about IGMP groups learned by the switch.BLADE OS 5. port <port number> Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single port. see page 115. trunk <trunk number> Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single trunk group. including source and timer information. For details. see page 115 BMD00114. Table 38 IGMP Multicast Group Information Menu Options (/info/l3/igmp) Command Syntax and Usage mrouter Displays the IGMP Multicast Router menu. dump Displays information for all multicast groups. To view menu options. detail <IP address> Displays details about IGMP multicast groups. find <IP address> Displays a single IGMP multicast group by its IP address.

1.10.1 2 21 10.------10.10.43 9 24 --------.Show all multicast router ports on a single vlan dump .BLADE OS 5.5 2 23 10.1.1. dump Displays information for all multicast groups learned by the switch.1 Command Reference /info/l3/igmp/mrouter IGMP Multicast Router Port Information Menu [IGMP Multicast Router Menu] vlan . August 2009 . Table 39 IGMP Mrouter Information Menu Options (/info/igmp/mrouter) Command Syntax and Usage vlan <VLAN number> Displays the multicast router ports configured or learned on the selected VLAN.1.------. info/l3/igmp/mrouter/dump IGMP Multicast Router Dump Information SrcIP VLAN Port Version Expires MRT ------128 125 unknown QRV ---2 QQIC ---125 -------------------.Show all learned multicast router ports Table 41 describes the commands used to display information about multicast routers (Mrouters) learned through IGMP Snooping.-------V3 4:09 V2 4:09 V2 static IGMP Mrouter information includes: Source IP address VLAN and port where the Mrouter is connected IGMP version Mrouter expiration Maximum query response time Querier’s Robustness Variable (QRV) Querier’s Query Interval Code (QQIC) 106 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.

0.1.1 2 24 V3 INC No 10.1.0.x) are not snooped/relayed and will not appear.-------.43 235.------.0.0.1.1.1 Command Reference info/l3/igmp/dump IGMP Group Information Note: Local groups (224.10.-----.1.--10.------.1 232.1.1.1 9 21 V3 INC 2:26 Yes * 236. Source Group VLAN Port Version Mode Expires Fwd -------------.--------------.BLADE OS 5.5 232.1 2 24 V3 INC 4:16 Yes 10.----.0.0.1.1 9 21 V3 EXC Yes IGMP Group information includes: IGMP source address IGMP Group address VLAN and port IGMP version IGMPv3 filter mode Expiration timer value IGMP multicast forwarding state BMD00114.1 2 24 V3 INC 4:16 Yes * 232. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 107 .1.10.1.

A virtual router is the owner when the IP address of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same. minimizing the number of unique IP addresses that must be configured. based on a number of priority criteria.BLADE OS 5. init identifies that the virtual router is waiting for a startup event. renter. master. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. Activity status master identifies the elected master virtual router. Proxy status. 205. proxy When virtual routers are configured. backup 1. if vrid 3. you can view the status of each virtual router using this command. 205. VRRP 1: 2: 3: information: vrid 2. 108 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.210. if vrid 1. if 1.18. Server status. The proxy state identifies virtual proxy routers. For example. master. backup identifies that the virtual router is in backup mode. During the election process. or transitions to backup if it is not the IP address owner. VRRP information includes: Virtual router number Virtual router ID and IP address Interface number Ownership status owner identifies the preferred master virtual router.202. If the master fails.204. it transitions to master if its priority is 255. renter identifies virtual routers which are not owned by this device. where the virtual router shares the same IP address as a proxy IP address. prio 100. prio 100.178. The use of virtual proxy routers enables redundant switches to share the same IP address. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.178.178. prio 100.18. The server state identifies virtual routers. 205. renter. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master. once it receives a startup event. renter.1 Command Reference /info/l3/vrrp VRRP Information Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the GbE2c provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. August 2009 .18. Priority value. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. (the IP address owner). the virtual router with the highest priority becomes master. server 1.

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference /info/l3/sm/port ServerMobility™ Port Information -----------------------------------------------------Server Mobility Port 2 Information: client-id = 01:00:22:00:7b:82:42 agent. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 109 .circuit-id = 00:22:00:7b:82:42 agent.remote-id = Server Mobility : enabled Filtering : enabled Failover : no backup port This display includes the following information for each port that has ServerMobility configured: Agent Circuit ID—hexadecimal value of the DHCP option 82 Agent Circuit ID Agent Remote ID—hexadecimal value of the DHCP option 82 Agent Remote ID ServerMobility status (enabled or disabled) Status of ServerMobility filtering Backup port BMD00114.

1 Command Reference /info/qos Quality of Service Information Menu [QoS Menu] 8021p .-----0 0 1 1 0 1 2 0 1 3 0 1 4 1 2 5 1 2 6 1 2 7 1 2 Current port priority information: Port Priority COSq Weight ----.1p Information Menu.BLADE OS 5. see page 119.---.Show QOS 802.---.1p information Table 40 QoS Menu Options (/info/qos) Command Syntax and Usage 8021p Displays the 802.-------. 110 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.1p Information Current priority to COS queue information: Priority COSq Weight -------..-----1 0 0 1 2 0 0 1 3 0 0 1 4 0 0 1 5 0 0 1 6 0 0 1 . August 2009 . /info/qos/8021p 802. For details..

1p port priority information.1p Port Priority Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Port Priority COSq Weight Displays the port number.1 Command Reference The following table describes the IEEE 802.1p priority level. BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. Displays the scheduling weight of the COS queue. Table 41 802.1p Priority-to-COS Queue Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Priority COSq Weight Displays the 802. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 111 . Displays the scheduling weight. Displays the Class of Service queue.1p priority level. Displays the Class of Service queue.1p priority to COS queue information. Displays the 802. The following table describes the IEEE 802. Table 42 802.

acl-grp Displays ACL group information.BLADE OS 5. For details.Show ACL list acl-grp .1 Command Reference /info/acl Access Control List Information Menu [ACL Information Menu] acl-list . 112 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.Show ACL group Table 43 ACL Information Menu Options (/info/acl) Command Syntax and Usage acl-list Displays ACL list information. see page 122. August 2009 .

Set use of TOS precedence to disabled Egress Port : 24 Actions : Permit Filter 100 profile: Ethernet .BLADE OS 5.Set max burst size : 32 Re-Mark . if applicable.Set committed rate : 64 . August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 113 .Set to disabled .SMAC : 00:21:00:00:00:00/ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff Meter . Access Control List (ACL) information includes configuration settings for each ACL list.1 Command Reference /info/acl/acl-list Access Control List Information Current ACL List information: -----------------------Filter 4 profile: Meter . BMD00114. Displays the egress port configured for the ACL. Displays the configured action for the ACL. Displays the ACL re-mark parameters.Set committed rate : 64 .Set to disabled .Set use of TOS precedence to disabled Actions : No ACL groups configured. Table 44 ACL List Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Filter x profile Meter Re-Mark Egress Port Actions Indicates the ACL number.Set max burst size : 32 Re-Mark . Displays the ACL meter parameters.

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/info/rmon

RMON Information Menu
[RMON Information Menu] hist - Show RMON History group information alarm - Show RMON Alarm group information event - Show RMON Event group information dump - Show all RMON information

The following table describes the Remote Monitoring (RMON) Information menu options. Table 45 RMON Information Menu Options (/info/rmon)
Command Syntax and Usage

hist Displays RMON History information. For details, see page 124. alarm Displays RMON Alarm information. For details, see page 125. event Displays RMON Event information. For details, see page 127. dump Displays all RMON information.

114

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/info/rmon/hist

RMON History Information
RMON History group configuration: Index ----1 2 3 4 5 IFOID Interval Rbnum Gbnum ------------------------------ -------- ----- ----1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.24 30 5 5 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.22 30 5 5 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.20 30 5 5 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.19 30 5 5 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.24 1800 5 5

The following table describes the RMON History Information parameters. Table 46 RMON History Parameter Descriptions
Parameter Description

Index IFOID Interval Rbnum Gbnum

Displays the index number that identifies each history instance. Displays the MIB Object Identifier. Displays the time interval for each sampling bucket. Displays the number of requested buckets, which is the number of data slots into which data is to be saved. Displays the number of granted buckets that may hold sampled data.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

115

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/info/rmon/alarm

RMON Alarm Information
RMON Alarm group configuration: Index Interval Type rLimit fLimit rEvtIdx fEvtIdx last value ----- -------- ---- -------- -------- ------- ------- ---------1 30 abs 10 0 1 0 0 2 900 abs 0 10 0 2 0 3 300 abs 10 20 0 0 0 4 1800 abs 10 0 1 0 0 5 1800 abs 10 0 1 0 0 8 1800 abs 10 0 1 0 56344540 10 1800 abs 10 0 1 0 0 11 1800 abs 10 0 1 0 0 15 1800 abs 10 0 1 0 0 18 1800 abs 10 0 1 0 0 100 1800 abs 10 0 1 0 0 Index OID ----- -----------------------------1 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.257 2 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.11.258 3 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.12.259 4 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.13.260 5 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.14.261 8 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.280 10 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.15.262 11 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16.263 15 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.19.266 18 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.279 100 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.17.264

The following table describes the RMON Alarm Information parameters. Table 47 RMON Alarm Parameter Descriptions
Parameter Description

Index Interval

Displays the index number that identifies each alarm instance. Displays the time interval over which data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds.

116

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

Table 47 RMON Alarm Parameter Descriptions (continued)
Parameter Description

Type

Displays the method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds, as follows: abs—absolute value, the value of the selected variable is compared directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval. delta—delta value, the value of the selected variable at the last sample is subtracted from the current value, and the difference compared with the thresholds.

rLimit fLimit rEvtIdx fEvtIdx Last value OID

Displays the rising threshold for the sampled statistic. Displays the falling threshold for the sampled statistic. Displays the rising alarm event index that is triggered when a rising threshold is crossed. Displays the falling alarm event index that is triggered when a falling threshold is crossed. Displays the last sampled value. Displays the MIB Object Identifier for each alarm index.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

117

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/info/rmon/event

RMON Event Information
RMON Event group configuration: Index ----1 2 3 4 5 10 11 15 100 Type Last Sent Description ---- ---------------- --------------------------------both 0D: 0H: 1M:20S Event_1 none 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Event_2 log 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Event_3 trap 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Event_4 both 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Log and trap event for Link Down both 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Log and trap event for Link Up both 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Send log and trap for icmpInMsg both 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Send log and trap for icmpInEchos both 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Event_100

The following table describes the RMON Event Information parameters. Table 48 RMON Event Parameter Descriptions
Parameter Description

Index Type Last sent Description

Displays the index number that identifies each event instance. Displays the type of notification provided for this event, as follows: none, log, trap, both. Displays the time that passed since the last switch reboot, when the most recent event was triggered. This value is cleared when the switch reboots. Displays a text description of the event.

118

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/info/link

Link Status Information
Port ---1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Phy-Type -------GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE Speed ----1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 any any 100 any any any any any Duplex -------full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full any any any any any Flow Ctrl --TX-----RX-yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Link -----disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled up disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled

Use this command to display link status information about each port on a switch slot, including: Port number Port speed Duplex mode (half, full, any) Flow control for transmit and receive (no, yes, or both) Link status (up, down, or disabled)

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

119

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/info/port

Port Information
Port Tag MediaRMON Lrn Fld PVID NAME VLAN(s) ---- --- ---- --- --- ----- -------------- ------------------------------1 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink1 1 2 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink2 1 3 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink3 1 4 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink4 1 5 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink5 1 6 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink6 1 7 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink7 1 8 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink8 1 9 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink9 1 10 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink10 1 11 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink11 1 12 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink12 1 13 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink13 1 14 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink14 1 15 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink15 1 16 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink16 1 17 n Auto d e e 1* Xconnect1 1 18 n Auto d e e 1* Xconnect2 1 19 n Auto d e e 4095 Mgmt 4095 20 n Auto d e e 1* Uplink1 1 21 n Auto d e e 1* Uplink2 1 22 n Auto d e e 1* Uplink3 1 23 n Auto d e e 1* Uplink4 1 24 n Auto d e e 1* Uplink5 1 * = PVID is tagged.

Port information includes: Port number Whether the port uses VLAN tagging or not (y or n) Whether the port is configured for Port Fast Fowarding (Fast) Whether the port has FDB learning enabled (Lrn) Whether the port has Port Flood Blocking enabled (Fld) Port VLAN ID (PVID) Port name VLAN membership

120

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/info/transcvr

Port Transceiver Status
Port ----------21 - SFP21 22 - SFP22 23 - SFP23 24 - SFP24 Device TX-Ena RX-Sig TX-Flt Vendor Serial ------- -------- ------ ------ ---------------- ---------------NO Device NO Device SR SFP DISABLED Link none AVAGO AVAGCNA00002D NO Device

This command displays the status of the transceiver module on each external uplink port.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

121

either enabled or disabled LtM status and member ports Spanning Tree status for LtM ports LtE status and member ports /info/dump Information Dump Use the dump command to dump all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more.1 Command Reference info/sfd Server Link Failure Detection Information LtM status: Down Member STG STG State Link Status --------.----------port 17 up port 18 up Server Link Failure Detection (SFD) information includes: SFD status. depending on your configuration). This data is useful for tuning and debugging switch performance. LtE status: Auto Enabled Member Link Status --------. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.BLADE OS 5.----------port 2 disabled 1 DISABLED * port 4 disabled 1 DISABLED * * = STP turned off for this port.---. August 2009 . If you want to capture dump data to a file. 122 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.-----------.

Show SNMP stats ntp .Clear all MP related stats clrports . with pointers to detailed information. This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch statistics. /stats Statistics Menu [Statistics Menu] port .Clear stats for all ports dump .Layer 2 Stats Menu l3 . Use this command to display traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. Table 51 Statistics Menu Options (/stats) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the Port Statistics Menu for the specified port.Dump all stats The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 51.Port Stats Menu l2 . August 2009 135 .Layer 3 Stats Menu mp .CHAPTER 5 The Statistics Menu You can view switch performance statistics in both the user and administrator command modes. l2 Displays the Layer 2 Stats Menu.Show Server Link Failure Detection stats clrmp . To view menu options. see page 137.Show NTP stats sfd .MP-specific Stats Menu acl . BMD00114. see page 153. To view menu options.ACL Stats Menu snmp . Traffic statistics are included in SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects.

snmp Displays SNMP statistics. clrmp Clears all management processor statistics. 136 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. Use this command to view information on how switch management processes and resources are currently being allocated.BLADE OS 5. See page 190 for a sample output and a description of NTP Statistics. dump Dumps all switch statistics. acl Displays ACL Statistics menu. ntp [clear] Displays Network Time Protocol (NTP) Statistics. You can use the clear option to delete all NTP statistics. If you want to capture dump data to a file. see page 159. See page 192 for a sample output and a description of SFD Statistics. August 2009 . set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. see page 192. sfd Displays Server Link Failure Detection (SFD) Statistics. To view menu options. To view menu options. For details. clrports Clears statistics counters for all ports. See page 186 for sample output.1 Command Reference Table 51 Statistics Menu Options (/stats) Command Syntax and Usage l3 Displays the Layer 3 Stats Menu. see page 185. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. To view menu options. mp Displays the Management Processor Statistics Menu. see page 180.

ip Displays IP statistics for the port. See page 149 for sample output.1x statistics for the port.Show 802.Clear all port stats Table 52 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port) Command Syntax and Usage 8021x Displays IEEE 802. See page 150 for sample output.Show bridging ("dot1") stats ether . rmon Displays Remote Monitoring (RMON) statistics for the port. See page 140 for sample output. ether Displays Ethernet (“dot3”) statistics for the port.Show all port stats clear . [Port Statistics Menu] 8021x . See page 149 for sample output.Show RMON stats dump .Show interface ("if") stats ip . August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 137 .Show Ethernet ("dot3") stats if .Show Internet Protocol ("IP") stats link . See page 147 for sample output.1x stats brg . BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. See page 143 for sample output.1 Command Reference /stats/port <port number> Port Statistics Menu This menu displays traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis.Show link stats rmon . See page 144 for sample output. brg Displays bridging (“dot1”) statistics for the port. link Displays link statistics for the port. if Displays interface statistics for the port. Traffic statistics include SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects.

clear This command clears all the statistics on the selected port.1 Command Reference Table 52 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage dump This command dumps all statistics for the selected port. 138 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 .

Authenticator Statistics: eapolFramesRx = eapolFramesTx = eapolStartFramesRx = eapolLogoffFramesRx = eapolRespIdFramesRx = eapolRespFramesRx = eapolReqIdFramesTx = eapolReqFramesTx = invalidEapolFramesRx = eapLengthErrorFramesRx = lastEapolFrameVersion = lastEapolFrameSource = 925 3201 2 0 463 460 1820 1381 0 0 1 00:01:02:45:ac:51 Table 53 802.1 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/8021x 802.1x Authenticator Statistics This menu option enables you to display the 802. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 139 .BLADE OS 5. The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.1x Authenticator Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/8021x) Statistics Description eapolFramesRx eapolFramesTx eapolStartFramesRx eapolLogoffFramesRx eapolRespIdFramesRx eapolRespFramesRx eapolReqIdFramesTx eapolReqFramesTx invalidEapolFramesRx eapLengthErrorFramesRx lastEapolFrameVersion lastEapolFrameSource Total number of EAPOL frames received Total number of EAPOL frames transmitted Total number of EAPOL Start frames received Total number of EAPOL Logoff frames received Total number of EAPOL Response Identity frames received Total number of Response frames received Total number of Request Identity frames transmitted Total number of Request frames transmitted Total number of invalid EAPOL frames received Total number of EAP length error frames received The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.1x authenticator statistics of the selected port. BMD00114.

1x Authenticator Diagnostics This menu option enables you to display the 802. as a result of an EAP-Response/Identity message being received from the Supplicant. Total number of times that the state machine transitions from CONNECTING to AUTHENTICATING. Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to AUTHENTICATED.1x Authenticator Diagnostics of a Port (/stats/port/8021x) Statistics Description authEntersConnecting authEapLogoffsWhile Connecting authEnters Authenticating authSuccessesWhile Authenticating Total number of times that the state machine transitions to the CONNECTING state from any other state. Authenticator Diagnostics: authEntersConnecting authEapLogoffsWhileConnecting authEntersAuthenticating authSuccessesWhileAuthenticating authTimeoutsWhileAuthenticating authFailWhileAuthenticating authReauthsWhileAuthenticating authEapStartsWhileAuthenticating authEapLogoffWhileAuthenticating authReauthsWhileAuthenticated authEapStartsWhileAuthenticated authEapLogoffWhileAuthenticated backendResponses backendAccessChallenges backendOtherRequestsToSupplicant backendNonNakResponsesFromSupplicant backendAuthSuccesses backendAuthFails = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 1820 0 463 5 0 458 0 0 0 3 0 0 923 460 460 460 5 458 Table 54 802. Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING. as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating authentication timeout.1x authenticator diagnostics of the selected port. authTimeoutsWhile Authenticating 140 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. Total number of times that the state machine transitions from CONNECTING to DISCONNECTED as a result of receiving an EAPOL-Logoff message. as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating successful authentication of the Supplicant. August 2009 .BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/8021x 802.

1 Command Reference Table 54 802. Notification. backendAccess Challenges backendOtherRequests ToSupplicant BMD00114.1x Authenticator Diagnostics of a Port (/stats/port/8021x) Statistics Description authFailWhile Authenticating authReauthsWhile Authenticating authEapStartsWhile Authenticating authEapLogoffWhile Authenticating authReauthsWhile Authenticated authEapStartsWhile Authenticated authEapLogoffWhile Authenticated backendResponses Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to HELD. Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING. as a result of an EAPOL-Start message being received from the Supplicant. Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING. Total number of times that the state machine sends an initial Access-Request packet to the Authentication server. Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to DISCONNECTED. or Success message) to the Supplicant. Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING.BLADE OS 5. as a result of an EAPOL-Logoff message being received from the Supplicant. as a result of an EAPOL-Logoff message being received from the Supplicant. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 141 . Total number of times that the state machine receives an initial Access-Challenge packet from the Authentication server. as a result of a re-authentication request Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING. Failure. as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating authentication failure. Indicates that the Authentication Server has communication with the Authenticator. as a result of an EAPOL-Start message being received from the Supplicant. as a result of a re-authentication request. Indicates that the Authenticator chose an EAP-method. Total number of times that the state machine sends an EAP-Request packet (other than an Identity. Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING. Indicates that the Authenticator attempted communication with the Authentication Server.

Total number of times that the state machine receives an Accept message from the Authentication Server. Indicates that the Supplicant has not authenticated to the Authentication Server. Indicates that the Supplicant has successfully authenticated to the Authentication Server.BLADE OS 5.s chosen EAP-method. backendAuthFails 142 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. Total number of times that the state machine receives a Reject message from the Authentication Server. Indicates that the Supplicant can respond to the Authenticator. and the response is something other than EAP-NAK.1x Authenticator Diagnostics of a Port (/stats/port/8021x) Statistics Description backendNonNak ResponsesFrom Supplicant backendAuthSuccesses Total number of times that the state machine receives a response from the Supplicant to an initial EAP-Request. August 2009 .1 Command Reference Table 54 802.

The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state. If this counter is increasing.BLADE OS 5. including bridge management frames. The total number of Forwarding Database entries. Bridging statistics for port 1: dot1PortInFrames: dot1PortOutFrames: dot1PortInDiscards: dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards: dot1StpPortForwardTransitions: 63242584 63277826 0 0 0 Table 55 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg) Statistics Description dot1PortInFrames The number of frames that have been received by this port from its segment. Count of valid frames received which were discarded (that is.1 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/brg Bridging Statistics This menu option enables you to display the bridging statistics of the selected port. including bridge management frames. it indicates that the Forwarding Database is regularly becoming full (a condition which has unpleasant performance effects on the subnetwork). it indicates that the problem has been occurring but is not persistent. A frame received on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function. filtered) by the Forwarding Process. but have been discarded due to a lack of space to store them in the Forwarding Database. If this counter has a significant value but is not presently increasing. dot1PortOutFrames dot1PortInDiscards dot1TpLearnedEntry Discards dot1StpPortForward Transitions BMD00114. Note that a frame transmitted on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function. The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment. which have been or would have been learnt. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 143 .

dot3StatsFCSErrors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check.3 Layer Management. according to the conventions of IEEE 802. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameCheckError status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user).1 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/ether Ethernet Statistics This menu option enables you to display the ethernet statistics of the selected port Ethernet statistics for port 1: dot3StatsAlignmentErrors: dot3StatsFCSErrors: dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames: dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames: dot3StatsLateCollisions: dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions: dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors: dot3StatsFrameTooLongs: dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors: 0 0 0 0 0 0 NA 0 0 Table 56 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics Description dot3StatsAlignment Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check.BLADE OS 5. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the alignmentError status is returned by the MAC service to the Logical Link Control (LLC) (or other MAC user).3 Layer Management. August 2009 . 144 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtained are. according to the conventions of IEEE 802. Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtained are.

BMD00114. A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer transmit error. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 145 . A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts. dot3StatsLateCollisions The number of times that a collision is detected on a particular interface later than 512 bit-times into the transmission of a packet. dot3StatsExcessive Collisions dot3StatsInternalMac TransmitErrors A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific. A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts.2 microseconds on a 10 Mbit/s system. ifOutMulticastPkts. and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames object. Five hundred and twelve bit-times corresponds to 51. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsLateCollisions object. an instance of this object may represent a count of transmission errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted. and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrame object. In particular. ifOutMulticastPkts.1 Command Reference Table 56 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics Description dot3StatsSingleCollision A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for Frames which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision. or ifOutBroadcastPkts.BLADE OS 5. A (late) collision included in a count represented by an instance of this object is also considered as a (generic) collision for purposes of other collision-related statistics. the dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object. dot3StatsMultiple CollisionFrames A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision. or ifOutBroadcastPkts. or the dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors object.

August 2009 . or the dot3StatsFCSErrors object. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsFrameTooLongs object. dot3StatsInternalMac ReceiveErrors A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer receive error. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific.1 Command Reference Table 56 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics Description dot3StatsFrameToo Longs A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. according to the conventions of IEEE 802. 146 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtained are.3 Layer Management. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameTooLong status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). In particular. an instance of this object may represent a count of received errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted.BLADE OS 5. the dot3StatsAlignmentErrors object.

The number of packets. The number of packets. Interface statistics for port 1: ifHCIn Counters Octets: 51697080313 UcastPkts: 65356399 BroadcastPkts: 0 MulticastPkts: 0 FlowCtrlPkts: 0 Discards: 0 Errors: 0 ifHCOut Counters 51721056808 65385714 6516 0 0 0 21187 Table 57 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if) Statistics Description ifInOctets ifInUcastPkts The total number of octets received on the interface. The total number of flow control pause packets received on the interface. which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sublayer. including those that were discarded or not sent. including framing characters. ifInBroadcastPkts ifInMulticastPkts ifInFlowControlPkts ifInDiscards BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.1 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/if Interface Statistics This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port. and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 147 . which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sublayer. For a MAC layer protocol. this includes both Group and Functional addresses. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted.

One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. The total number of flow control pause packets transmitted out of the interface. the number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors. and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface. August 2009 . and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.1 Command Reference Table 57 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if) Statistics Description ifInErrors For packet-oriented interfaces. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. the number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted.BLADE OS 5. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces. this includes both Group and Functional addresses. ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts ifOutBroadcastPkts ifOutMulticastPkts ifOutFlowControlPkts ifOutDiscards ifOutErrors 148 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. For packet-oriented interfaces. For a MAC layer protocol. the number of outbound transmission units that could not be transmitted because of errors. including those that were discarded or not sent. The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. This object is a 64-bit version of ifOutMulticastPkts. including framing characters. the number of inbound transmission units that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. This object is a 64-bit version of ifOutBroadcastPkts. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces. and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer. including those that were discarded or not sent. including those that were discarded or not sent.

Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly. including those received in error. BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 149 . The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing. GEA IP statistics for port 1: ipInReceives : 0 ipInHeaderError: 0 ipInDiscards : 0 Table 58 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip) Statistics Description ipInReceives ipInHeaderErrors The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces. for lack of buffer space). The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch). ipInDiscards /stats/port <port number>/link Link Statistics This menu enables you to display the link statistics of the selected port.1 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/ip Interface Protocol Statistics This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port.BLADE OS 5. but which were discarded (for example. Link statistics for port 1: linkStateChange: 1 Table 59 Link Statistics (/stats/port/link) Statistics Description linkStateChange The total number of link state changes.

BLADE OS 5. August 2009 . broadcast packets. The total number of packets (including bad packets. and multicast packets) received. 150 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. RMON statistics for port 2: etherStatsDropEvents: etherStatsOctets: etherStatsPkts: etherStatsBroadcastPkts: etherStatsMulticastPkts: etherStatsCRCAlignErrors: etherStatsUndersizePkts: etherStatsOversizePkts: etherStatsFragments: etherStatsJabbers: etherStatsCollisions: etherStatsPkts64Octets: etherStatsPkts65to127Octets: etherStatsPkts128to255Octets: etherStatsPkts256to511Octets: etherStatsPkts64Octets: etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets: NA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 60 RMON Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics Description etherStatsDropEvents etherStatsOctets etherStatsPkts etherStatsBroadcastPkts etherStatsMulticastPkts The total number of packets received that were dropped because of system resource constraints.1 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/rmon RMON Statistics This menu enables you to display the Remote Monitoring (RMON) statistics of the selected port. The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.

BLADE OS 5. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 151 . The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).1 Command Reference Table 60 RMON Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics Description etherStatsCRCAlignErrors The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits. and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error). The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were greater than 255 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were greater than 127 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were greater than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets. The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. inclusive. Jabber is defined as the condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms. but including FCS octets). The allowed range to detect jabber is between 20 ms and 150 ms. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were less than or equal to 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits. etherStatsUndersizePkts etherStatsOversizePkts etherStatsFragments etherStatsJabbers etherStatsCollisions etherStatsPkts64Octets etherStatsPkts65to127 Octets etherStatsPkts128to255 Octets etherStatsPkts256to511 Octets BMD00114. The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.

BLADE OS 5. August 2009 . The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were greater than 1023 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).1 Command Reference Table 60 RMON Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics Description etherStatsPkts512to1023 Octets etherStatsPkts1024to1518 Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were greater than 511 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). 152 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114.

See page 155 for sample output. See page 157 for sample output. or for all ports if no port is specified. Use the clear option to delete all FDB statistics. with pointers to detailed information. lacp [<port number>|clear] Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) statistics for a specified port.BLADE OS 5.Show LLDP port stats oam . Use the clear option to delete all LACP statistics. Table 61 Layer 2 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l2) Command Syntax and Usage fdb [clear] Displays FDB statistics.Show LACP stats hotlink . BMD00114. lldp <port number> Displays LLDP port statistics. See page 158 for sample output. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 153 . oam Displays the OAM Statistics menu.1 Command Reference /stats/l2 Layer 2 Statistics Menu [Layer 2 Statistics Menu] fdb . See page 154 for sample output.Show FDB stats lacp . See page 156 for sample output. hotlink Displays Hotlinks statistics.Show OAM stats The Layer 2 statistics provided by each menu option are briefly described in Table 61.Show Hot Links stats lldp .

Highest number of entries recorded at any given time in the Forwarding Database. FDB statistics are described in the following table: Table 62 Forwarding Database Statistics (/stats/fdb) Statistic Description current hiwat Current number of entries in the Forwarding Database.BLADE OS 5. Use the clear option to delete all FDB statistics. and unsuccessful searches. finds. August 2009 .1 Command Reference /stats/l2/fdb [clear] FDB Statistics FDB statistics: current: 83 hiwat: 855 This menu option enables you to display statistics regarding the use of the forwarding database. including the number of new entries. 154 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114.

Total number of LACP data units with an unknown version or type.0 Unknown version/TLV type: .0 LACPDUs transmitted: . length. Total number of LACP marker response data units transmitted.0 Illegal subtype received: . Total number of LACP marker data units transmitted.0 Marker Rsp PDUs transmitted: . Total number of LACP data units transmitted.0 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) statistics are described in the following table: Table 63 LACP Statistics (/stats/l2/lacp) Statistic Description Valid LACPDUs received Valid Marker PDUs received Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received Unknown version/TLV type Illegal subtype received LACPDUs transmitted Marker PDUs transmitted Marker Rsp PDUs transmitted Total number of valid LACP data units received. and value (TLV) received. Total number of LACP data units with an illegal subtype received.0 Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received: .BLADE OS 5.870 Valid Marker PDUs received: . BMD00114. Use the clear option to delete all LACP statistics. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 155 . Total number of valid LACP marker response data units received. Total number of valid LACP marker data units received.6031 Marker PDUs transmitted: .1 Command Reference /stats/l2/lacp [<port number>|clear] LACP Statistics Port 1: -------------------------------------Valid LACPDUs received: .

Total number of FDB update requests that failed. Total number of FDB update requests sent. August 2009 .1 Command Reference /stats/l2/hotlink Hotlinks Statistics Hot Links Trigger Stats: Trigger 1 statistics: Trigger Name: Trigger 1 Master active: Backup active: FDB update: 0 0 0 failed: 0 The following table describes the Hotlinks statistics: Table 64 Hotlinks Statistics (/stats/l2/hotlink) Statistic Description Master active Backup active FDB update failed Total number of times the Master interface transitioned to the Active state.BLADE OS 5. 156 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. Total number of times the Backup interface transitioned to the Active state.

......Frames Transmitted : 0 Frames Received : 0 Frames Received in Errors : 0 Frames Discarded : 0 TLVs Unrecognized : 0 Neighbors Aged Out : 0 .. The following table describes the LLDP port statistics: Table 65 LLDP port Statistics (/stats/l2/lldp) Statistic Frames Transmitted Frames Received Frames Received in Errors Frames Discarded TLVs Unrecognized Neighbors Aged Out Description Total number of LLDP frames transmitted. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 157 . Length. Total number of LLDP frames received. Total number of LLDP frames that had errors...BLADE OS 5. Total number of neighbor devices that have had their LLDP information aged out... BMD00114............. Total number of unrecognized TLV (Type....1 Command Reference /stats/l2/lldp <port number> LLDP Port Statistics LLDP Port 1 Statistics ... Total number of LLDP frames discarded... and Value) fields received.

Local faults detected Remote faults detected 158 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114.1 Command Reference /stats/l2/oam OAM Statistics [OAM statistics Menu] port . August 2009 .Show OAM port statistics dump .Show all OAM statistics The following table describes the OAM statistics commands: Table 66 OAM Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l2) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays OAM statistics for the selected port. /stats/l2/oam/port <port number> OAM Statistics OAM statistics on port 1 -----------------------------------------Information OAMPDU Tx : 0 Information OAMPDU Rx : 0 Unsupported OAMPDU Tx : 0 Unsupported OAMPDU Tx : 0 Local faults ------------0 Link fault records 0 Critical events 0 Dying gasps Remote faults ------------0 Link fault records 0 Critical events 0 Dying gasps OAM statistics include the following: Total number of OAM Protocol Data Units (OAMPDUs) transmitted and received. Total number of unsupported OAM Protocol Data Units (OAMPDU) transmitted and received. dump Displays all OAM statistics.BLADE OS 5. See page 158 for sample output.

OSPF stats vrrp .Show ICMP stats tcp . arp Displays Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) statistics. ip Displays IP statistics.Total number of IGMP groups ipmcgrps .Total number of IPMC groups clrigmp .Clear RIP stats ospfclr .Show TCP stats udp .Show UDP stats igmp .Show IP stats route .Show ARP stats dns . with pointers to detailed information.Clear VRRP stats rip .Show route stats arp .Show DNS stats icmp . See page 162 for sample output. Table 67 Layer 3 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l3) Command Syntax and Usage geal3 Displays the Gigabit Ethernet Aggregators (GEA) statistics menu. See page 165 for sample output.Clear IP stats ripclear . route [clear] Displays route statistics. GEA statistics are used by Technical Support personnel.Dump layer 3 stats The Layer 3 statistics provided by each menu option are briefly described in Table 67.Show RIP stats igmpgrps .Clear IGMP stats ipclear .Show VRRP stats clrvrrp . BMD00114.Clear all OSPF stats dump .1 Command Reference /stats/l3 Layer 3 Statistics Menu [Layer 3 Statistics Menu] geal3 .GEA Layer 3 Stats Menu ip .Show IGMP stats ospf .BLADE OS 5. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 159 . See page 165 for sample output. Use the clear option to delete all route statistics.

160 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. tcp [clear] Displays TCP statistics. See page 169 for sample output. vrrp When virtual routers are configured. See page 178 for sample output. See page 179 for sample output. Use the clear option to delete all TCP statistics. icmp [clear] Displays ICMP statistics. Use the clear option to delete all ICMP statistics. Use the clear option to delete all UDP statistics. ospf Displays OSPF statistics. August 2009 . See page 172 for sample output. you can display the protocol statistics for VRRP. clrvrrp Clears VRRP statistics. See page 173 for sample output. ipmcgrps Displays the total number of current IP multicast groups that are registered on the switch. See page 171 for sample output. udp [clear] Displays UDP statistics. igmpgrps Displays the total number of IGMP groups that are registered on the switch.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference Table 67 Layer 3 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l3) Command Syntax and Usage dns [clear] Displays Domain Name System (DNS) statistics. Use the clear option to delete all DNS statistics. See page 167 for sample output. rip Displays Routing Information Protocol (RIP) statistics. See page 166 for sample output. igmp Displays IGMP statistics.

August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 161 . ripclear Clears Routing Information Protocol (RIP) statistics.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference Table 67 Layer 3 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l3) Command Syntax and Usage clrigmp Clears IGMP statistics. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. ospfclear Clears Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) statistics. Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IPv4 statistics. ipclear Clears IPv4 statistics. If you want to capture dump data to a file. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. BMD00114. dump Dumps all Layer 3 statistics.

including those received in error.0. Class E).1 Command Reference /stats/l3/ip IPv4 Statistics IP statistics: ipInReceives: ipInAddrErrors: ipInUnknownProtos: ipInDelivers: ipOutDiscards: ipReasmReqds: ipReasmFails: ipFragFails: ipRoutingDiscards: ipReasmTimeout: 3115873 35447 500504 2334166 4 0 0 0 0 5 ipInHdrErrors: ipForwDatagrams: ipInDiscards: ipOutRequests: ipOutNoRoutes: ipReasmOKs: ipFragOKs: ipFragCreates: ipDefaultTTL: 1 0 0 1010542 4 0 0 0 255 Table 68 IP Statistics (stats/l3/ip) Statistics Description ipInReceives ipInHdrErrors The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces. The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not their final IP destination.BLADE OS 5. this counter will include only those packets. version number mismatch.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example. time-to-live exceeded. This count includes invalid addresses (for example. including bad checksums. The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch). In entities which do not act as IP Gateways. and so forth. this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. ipInAddrErrors ipForwDatagrams ipInUnknownProtos 162 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114.Route option processing was successful. For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams. as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. 0. August 2009 . other format errors. The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers.0. which were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch). The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. and the Source. errors discovered in processing their IP options.

The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user-protocols (including ICMP). The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms (notably the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received. The number of failures detected by the IP re. but which were discarded (for example. but which were discarded (for example. The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity (the switch). The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this entity (the switch).assembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.BLADE OS 5. for lack of buffer space). The number of IP datagrams successfully re. errors. because their Don't Fragment flag was set.assembled. for example. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams. for lack of buffer space).1 Command Reference Table 68 IP Statistics (stats/l3/ip) Statistics Description ipInDiscards The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 163 . Note that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down. The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. and so forth). which meet this no-route criterion. ipInDelivers ipOutRequests ipOutDiscards ipOutNoRoutes ipReasmReqds ipReasmOKs ipReasmFails ipFragOKs ipFragFails BMD00114. The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity (the switch) but could not be. Note that this counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion. Note that this counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams. The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination.

The maximum number of seconds. August 2009 . which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity (the switch).1 Command Reference Table 68 IP Statistics (stats/l3/ip) Statistics Description ipFragCreates ipRoutingDiscards The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity (the switch). ipDefaultTTL ipReasmTimeout 164 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. The number of routing entries. One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free-up buffer space for other routing entries.BLADE OS 5. which were chosen to be discarded even though they are valid. The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live (TTL) field of the IP header of datagrams originated at this entity (the switch). whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol.

August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 165 . The maximum number of routes that are supported.BLADE OS 5. BMD00114. The highest number of ARP entries ever recorded in the ARP table. /stats/l3/arp ARP Statistics This menu option enables you to display Address Resolution Protocol statistics. Use the clear option to delete all route statistics. ARP statistics: arpEntriesCur: arpEntriesMax: 3 2047 arpEntriesHighWater: 4 Table 70 ARP Statistics (/stats/l3/arp) Statistics Description arpEntriesCur arpEntriesHighWater arpEntriesMax The total number of outstanding ARP entries in the ARP table. The maximum number of ARP entries that are supported.1 Command Reference /stats/l3/route [clear] Route Statistics Route statistics: ipRoutesCur: ipRoutesMax: 11 512 ipRoutesHighWater: 11 Table 69 Route Statistics (/stats/l3/route) Statistics Description ipRoutesCur ipRoutesHighWater ipRoutesMax The total number of outstanding routes in the route table. The highest number of routes ever recorded in the route table.

166 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114.1 Command Reference /stats/l3/dns [clear] DNS Statistics This menu option enables you to display Domain Name System statistics.BLADE OS 5. DNS statistics: dnsInRequests: dnsBadRequests: 0 0 dnsOutRequests: 0 Table 71 DNS Statistics (/stats/dns) Statistics Description dnsInRequests dnsOutRequests dnsBadRequests The total number of DNS request packets that have been received. The total number of DNS response packets that have been transmitted. August 2009 . Use the clear option to delete all DNS statistics. The total number of DNS request packets received that were dropped.

The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received. The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received. The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received. and so forth). Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors.1 Command Reference /stats/l3/icmp [clear] ICMP Statistics ICMP statistics: icmpInMsgs: icmpInDestUnreachs: icmpInParmProbs: icmpInRedirects: icmpInEchoReps: icmpInTimestampReps: icmpInAddrMaskReps: icmpOutErrors: icmpOutTimeExcds: icmpOutSrcQuenchs: icmpOutEchos: icmpOutTimestamps: icmpOutAddrMasks: 245802 41 0 0 244350 0 0 0 0 0 253777 0 0 icmpInErrors: icmpInTimeExcds: icmpInSrcQuenchs: icmpInEchos: icmpInTimestamps: icmpInAddrMasks: icmpOutMsgs: icmpOutDestUnreachs: icmpOutParmProbs: icmpOutRedirects: icmpOutEchoReps: icmpOutTimestampReps: icmpOutAddrMaskReps: 1393 0 0 18 0 0 253810 15 0 0 18 0 0 Table 72 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp) Statistics Description icmpInMsgs The total number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received.BLADE OS 5. The number of ICMP Redirect messages received. stop sending data) messages received. The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received. icmpInErrors icmpInDestUnreachs icmpInTimeExcds icmpInParmProbs icmpInSrcQuenchs icmpInRedirects icmpInEchos icmpInEchoReps icmpInTimestamps icmpInTimestampReps BMD00114. The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 167 . The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received. The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received. The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received. bad length. The number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums.

The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent. The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. The total number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) attempted to send. The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent. The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent. August 2009 .BLADE OS 5. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors. since hosts do not send redirects. this object will always be zero. The number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffer. stop sending data) messages sent.1 Command Reference Table 72 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp) Statistics Description icmpInAddrMasks icmpInAddrMaskReps icmpOutMsgs The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received. The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent. The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent. The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full. The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent. The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent. icmpOutErrors icmpOutDestUnreachs icmpOutTimeExcds icmpOutParmProbs icmpOutSrcQuenchs icmpOutRedirects icmpOutEchos icmpOutEchoReps icmpOutTimestamps icmpOutTimestampReps icmpOutAddrMasks icmpOutAddrMaskReps Use the clear option to delete all ICMP statistics. 168 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. For a host. The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received. The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent. In some implementations there may be no types of errors that contribute to this counter's value. The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent. This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram.

The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-SENT state from the CLOSED state. In entities where the maximum number of connections is dynamic. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. In particular. this object should contain the value -1. The limit on the total number of TCP connections the entity (the switch) can support. an object of this type has the semantics of the UBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. an object of this type has the semantics of the LBOUND quantity described in RFC 793.BLADE OS 5. The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-RCVD state from the LISTEN state. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 169 .1 Command Reference /stats/l3/tcp [clear] TCP Statistics TCP statistics: tcpRtoAlgorithm: tcpRtoMax: tcpActiveOpens: tcpAttemptFails: tcpInSegs: tcpRetransSegs: tcpCurBuff: tcpOutRsts: 4 240000 252214 528 756401 0 0 417 tcpRtoMin: tcpMaxConn: tcpPassiveOpens: tcpEstabResets: tcpOutSegs: tcpInErrs: tcpCurConn: 0 512 7 4 756655 0 3 Table 73 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp) Statistics Description tcpRtoAlgorithm tcpRtoMin The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting unacknowledged octets. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. measured in milliseconds. when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3). The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. tcpRtoMax tcpMaxConn tcpActiveOpens tcpPassiveOpens BMD00114. In particular. when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3). measured in milliseconds.

The total number of segments received. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSE-WAIT state. The total number of outstanding memory allocations from heap by TCP protocol stack. The total number of segments retransmitted .that is. bad TCP checksums). tcpEstabResets tcpInSegs tcpOutSegs tcpRetransSegs tcpInErrs tcpCurBuff tcpCurConn tcpOutRsts Use the clear option to delete all TCP statistics. including those received in error. The number of TCP segments sent containing the RST flag. The total number of outstanding TCP sessions that are currently opened. The total number of segments sent.1 Command Reference Table 73 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp) Statistics Description tcpAttemptFails The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the SYN-SENT state or the SYN-RCVD state. 170 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. the number of TCP segments transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets. August 2009 . plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state. This count includes segments received on currently established connections. The total number of segments received in error (for example. including those on current connections but excluding those containing only retransmitted octets.

August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 171 . The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity (the switch). Use the clear option to delete all UDP statistics. BMD00114. The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at the destination port.1 Command Reference /stats/l3/udp [clear] UDP Statistics UDP statistics: udpInDatagrams: udpInErrors: 54 0 udpOutDatagrams: udpNoPorts: 43 1578077 Table 74 UDP Statistics (/stats/l3/udp) Statistics Description udpInDatagrams udpOutDatagrams udpInErrors udpNoPorts The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to the switch. The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port.BLADE OS 5.

August 2009 . BMD00114.1 Command Reference /stats/l3/igmp <VLAN number> IGMP Statistics IGMP Snoop vlan 2 statistics: ----------------------------------------------------------------------rxIgmpValidPkts: 0 rxIgmpInvalidPkts: 0 rxIgmpGenQueries: 0 rxIgmpGrpSpecificQueries: 0 rxIgmpGroupSrcSpecificQueries: 0 rxIgmpLeaves: 0 rxIgmpReports: 0 txIgmpReports: 0 txIgmpGrpSpecificQueries: 0 txIgmpLeaves: 0 rxIgmpV3CurrentStateRecords: 0 rxIgmpV3SourceListChangeRecords:0 rxIgmpV3FilterChangeRecords: 0 This menu option displays statistics about the use of the IGMP Multicast Groups. Total number of Filter Change records received.BLADE OS 5. IGMP statistics are described in the following table: Table 75 IGMP Statistics (/stats/l3/igmp) Statistic Description rxIgmpValidPkts rxIgmpInvalidPkts rxIgmpGenQueries rxIgmpGrpSpecific Queries Total number of valid IGMP packets received Total number of invalid packets received Total number of General Membership Query packets received Total number of Membership Query packets received from specific groups rxIgmpGroupSrcSpecific Total number of Group Source-Specific Queries (GSSQ) received Queries rxIgmpLeaves rxIgmpReports txIgmpReports txIgmpGrpSpecific Queries txIgmpLeaves rxIgmpV3CurrentState Records rxIgmpV3SourceList ChangeRecords rxIgmpV3FilterChange Records 172 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu Total number of Leave requests received Total number of Membership Reports received Total number of Membership reports transmitted Total number of Membership Query packets transmitted to specific groups Total number of Leave messages transmitted Total number of Current State records received Total number of Source List Change records received.

aindex Displays area statistics.Show interface(s) stats Table 76 OSPF Statistics Menu (/stats/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage general Displays global statistics. if Displays interface statistics. See page 174 for sample output.Show area(s) stats if .1 Command Reference /stats/l3/ospf OSPF Statistics Menu [OSPF stats Menu] general .BLADE OS 5. BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 173 .Show global stats aindex .

BLADE OS 5. OSPF stats ---------Rx/Tx Stats: Pkts hello database ls requests ls acks ls updates Nbr change stats: hello start n2way adjoint ok negotiation done exchange done bad requests bad sequence loading done n1way rst_ad down Timers kickoff hello retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export Rx -------0 23 4 3 7 9 Tx -------0 518 12 1 7 7 Intf change Stats: hello down loop unloop wait timer backup nbr change 2 0 2 2 2 2 0 0 2 0 0 1 4 2 0 0 2 0 5 514 1028 0 0 0 0 0 174 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114.1 Command Reference /stats/l3/ospf/general OSPF Global Statistics The OSPF General Statistics contain the sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. August 2009 .

The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Request packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is. an indication that Hello packets should now be sent to the neighbor at intervals of HelloInterval seconds. The sum total of all OSPF packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Database Description packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 175 . The sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.) across all OSPF areas and interfaces.1 Command Reference Table 77 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) Statistics Description Rx/Tx Stats: Rx Pkts Tx Pkts Rx Hello Tx Hello Rx Database Tx Database Rx ls Requests Tx ls Requests Rx ls Acks Tx ls Acks Rx ls Updates Tx ls Updates Nbr Change Stats: hello Start The sum total of all Hello packets received from neighbors on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Database Description packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Update packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Update packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Hello packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.BLADE OS 5. The sum total of all Link State Request packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Hello packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. BMD00114.

1 Command Reference Table 77 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (continued) Statistics Description n2way adjoint ok The sum total number of bidirectional communication establishment between this router and other neighboring routers. across all OSPF areas and interfaces. August 2009 . loading done n1way rst_ad down The sum total number of link state updates received for all out-of-date portions of the database across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of decisions to be made (again) as to whether an adjacency should be established/maintained with the neighbor across all OSPF areas and interfaces. bad requests bad sequence 176 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. Has an options field differing from the last Options field received in a Database Description packet. The sum total number of Link State Requests which have been received for a link state advertisement not contained in the database across all interfaces and OSPF areas. in an adjacency's final state) having transmitted a full sequence of Database Description packets. Any of these conditions indicate that some error has occurred during adjacency establishment for all OSPF areas and interfaces. in which this router is not mentioned across all OSPF interfaces and areas. The sum total number of times the Neighbor adjacency has been reset across all OPSF areas and interfaces. in the initial state of a neighbor conversation. Has an unexpected DD sequence number b. exchange done The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is. The sum total number of Hello packets received from neighbors. negotiation done The sum total number of neighbors in this state wherein the Master/slave relationship has been negotiated. The sum total number of Database Description packets which have been received that either: a. across all OSPF areas and interfaces.BLADE OS 5.) across all OSPF areas and interfaces. and sequence numbers have been exchanged. Unexpectedly has the init bit set c. The total number of Neighboring routers down (that is.

The total number of times the Autonomous System Export (ASE) timer has been fired. The sum total number of interfaces down in all OSPF areas. The sum total number of times the Wait Timer has been fired. indicating the end of the waiting period that is required before electing a (Backup) Designated Router across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of times the LSA Ack timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of times the Link State Advertisement (LSA) lock timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces.BLADE OS 5. The sum total number of changes in the set of bidirectional neighbors associated with any interface across all OSPF areas. connected to the attached network in all OSPF areas. The sum total of interfaces no longer connected to the attached network across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of Backup Designated Routers on the attached network for all OSPF areas and interfaces. The total number of times the Summary timer has been fired. backup nbr change Timers Kickoff: hello retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export The sum total number of times the Hello timer has been fired (which triggers the send of a Hello packet) across all OPSF areas and interfaces. BMD00114. The total number of times the data base age (Dbage) has been fired.1 Command Reference Table 77 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (continued) Statistics Description Intf Change Stats: hello down loop unloop wait timer The sum total number of Hello packets sent on all interfaces and areas. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 177 . The sum total number of interfaces. The sum total number of times the Retransmit timer has been fired across all OPSF areas and interfaces.

The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad interval. vrrpBadAdvers vrrpOutAdvers vrrpBadVersion vrrpBadVrid vrrpBadAddress vrrpBadData vrrpBadPassword vrrpBadInterval 178 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. The statistics for the VRRP LAN are displayed: VRRP statistics: vrrpInAdvers: vrrpOutAdvers: vrrpBadVersion: vrrpBadAddress: vrrpBadPassword: 0 0 0 0 0 vrrpBadAdvers: vrrpBadVrid: vrrpBadData: vrrpBadInterval: 0 0 0 0 Table 78 VRRP Statistics (/stats/l3/vrrp) Statistics Description vrrpInAdvers The total number of valid VRRP advertisements that have been received.1 Command Reference /stats/l3/vrrp VRRP Statistics Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the GbE2c provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had bad data. based on a number of priority criteria. The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been sent. When virtual routers are configured. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master. The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad password. If the master fails. The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad address. The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad version number.BLADE OS 5. you can display the protocol statistics for VRRP. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. August 2009 . The total number of VRRP advertisements received that were dropped. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad virtual router ID.

1 Command Reference /stats/l3/rip Routing Information Protocol Statistics RIP ALL STATS INFORMATION: RIP packets received = 12 RIP packets sent = 75 RIP request received = 0 RIP response recevied = 12 RIP request sent = 3 RIP reponse sent = 72 RIP route timeout = 0 RIP bad size packet received = RIP bad version received RIP bad zeros received RIP bad src port received RIP bad src IP received RIP packets from self received 0 = = = = = 0 0 0 0 0 BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 179 .BLADE OS 5.

Show Packet stats tcb .Show I2C stats pkt .Show STEM thread stats i2c . pkt Displays packet statistics. ucb Displays all UDP control blocks that are in use. August 2009 . To view a sample output and a description of the stats. 4. see page 184. To view a sample output. tcb Displays all TCP control blocks that are in use. see page 183.Show Memory utilization stats Table 79 Management Processor Statistics Menu Options (/stats/mp) Command Syntax and Usage thr Displays STEM thread statistics.BLADE OS 5. to check for leads and load. and 64 seconds. To view a sample output and a description of the stats.Show CPU utilization mem . This command is used by Technical Support personnel. This command is used by Technical Support personnel. see page 181. see page 183. To view a sample output and a description of the stats. 180 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114.Show All TCP control blocks in use ucb . cpu Displays CPU utilization for periods of up to 1. i2c Displays I2C statistics. mem Displays system memory statistics.1 Command Reference /stats/mp Management Processor Statistics Menu [MP-specific Statistics Menu] thr .Show All UDP control blocks in use cpu .

2009 medium packet buffers: ---------------------current: 0 hi-watermark: 1 hi-water time: 17:56:16 Tue Jul 14. BMD00114. 2009 jumbo packet buffers: ---------------------current: hi-watermark: 0 0 Table 80 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt) Statistics Description allocs frees failures small packet buffers current hi-watermark hi-water time Total number of packet allocations from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of times the packet buffers are freed (released) to the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.1 Command Reference /stats/mp/pkt MP Packet Statistics Packet counts seen by MP: allocs: 859 frees: 859 failures: 0 small packet buffers: ---------------------current: 0 hi-watermark: 4 hi-water time: 17:56:35 Tue Jul 14. Total number of packet allocation failures from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 181 .BLADE OS 5. Total number of packet allocations with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. The highest number of packet allocation with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Time stamp that indicates when the hi-watermark was reached.

BLADE OS 5. The highest number of packet allocation with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. August 2009 . 182 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. Time stamp that indicates when the hi-watermark was reached. Total number of packet allocations with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. The highest number of packet allocation with more than 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.1 Command Reference Table 80 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt) Statistics Description medium packet buffers current hi-watermark hi-water time jumbo packet buffers current hi-watermark Total number of packet allocations with more than 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.

0.0.23.0.0.5 1171 <=> 47.0.0.0/47.81.80.1 Command Reference /stats/mp/tcb TCP Statistics All TCP allocated control blocks: 10ad41e8: 0.23.80.27.5 0/1171 0.0.243 80 23 listen established Table 81 MP Specified TCP Statistics (/stats/mp/tcb) Statistics Description 10ad41e8/10ad5790 0.0 0 <=> 0.0 10ad5790: 47.27.81. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 183 .0.0/47.243 80/23 listen/established Memory Destination IP address Destination port Source IP Source port State /stats/mp/ucb UCB Statistics All UDP allocated control blocks: 161: listen BMD00114.BLADE OS 5.

The utilization of MP CPU over 4 seconds. August 2009 . CPU utilization: cpuUtil1Second: cpuUtil4Seconds: cpuUtil64Seconds: 53% 54% 54% Table 82 CPU Statistics (stats/mp/cpu) Statistics Description cpuUtil1Second cpuUtil4Seconds cpuUtil64Seconds The utilization of MP CPU over 1 second. It shows the percentage.BLADE OS 5. 184 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. It shows the percentage. The utilization of MP CPU over 64 seconds.1 Command Reference /stats/mp/cpu CPU Statistics This menu option enables you to display the CPU utilization statistics. It shows the percentage.

port 1: 26057515 26057497 BMD00114.Display ACL stats .BLADE OS 5. Table 83 ACL Statistics Menu Options (/stats/acl) Command Syntax and Usage acl <ACL number> Displays the Access Control List Statistics for a specific ACL. see page 185. port 1: Hits for ACL 2. clracl Clears all ACL statistics. /stats/acl/acl [<ACL number>] ACL Statistics List This option displays statistics for the selected ACL if an ACL number is specified. dump Displays all ACL statistics.Display all available ACL stats .1 Command Reference /stats/acl ACL Statistics Menu [ACL Menu] acl dump clracl . August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 185 . For details.Clear ACL stats ACL statistics are described in the following table. Hits for ACL 1. or for all ACLs if the option is omitted.

The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP protocol entity which represented an SNMP operation which was not allowed by the SNMP community named in the Message. The total number of SNMP Messages.BLADE OS 5. snmpInBadC'tyUses 186 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. as follows: >> Statistics# snmp clear SNMP statistics: snmpInPkts: snmpInBadC'tyNames: snmpInASNParseErrs: snmpOutPkts: snmpInTooBigs: snmpInBadValues: snmpInGenErrs: snmpInTotalSetVars: snmpInGetNexts: snmpInGetResponses: snmpOutTooBigs: snmpOutBadValues: snmpOutGenErrs: snmpOutGetNexts: snmpOutGetResponses: snmpSilentDrops: 150097 0 0 150097 0 0 0 2731 131389 0 0 0 1 0 150093 0 snmpInBadVersions: snmpInBadC'tyUses: snmpEnableAuthTraps: snmpInBadTypes: snmpInNoSuchNames: snmpInReadOnlys: snmpInTotalReqVars: snmpInGetRequests: snmpInSetRequests: snmpInTraps: snmpOutNoSuchNames: snmpOutReadOnlys: snmpOutGetRequests: snmpOutSetRequests: snmpOutTraps: snmpProxyDrops: 0 0 0 0 0 0 798464 17593 615 0 1 0 0 0 4 0 Table 84 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics Description snmpInPkts snmpInBadVersions snmpInBadC'tyNames The total number of Messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the transport service.1 Command Reference /stats/snmp [clear] SNMP Statistics Note – You can reset the SNMP counter to zero by using clear command. August 2009 . The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP entity which used an SNMP community name not known to the said entity (the switch). which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and were for an unsupported SNMP version.

As such. The total number of SNMP Messages which were passed from the SNMP protocol entity to the transport service. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is badValue. It should be noted that it is a protocol error to generate an SNMP PDU. Note: OSI's method of specifying abstract objects is called ASN. defined in X. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is too big. snmpEnableAuth Traps snmpOutPkts snmpInBadTypes snmpInTooBigs An object to enable or disable the authentication traps generated by this entity (the switch).1 Command Reference Table 84 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics Description snmpInASNParseErrs The total number of ASN. which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is genErr. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 187 . The total number of valid SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is noSuchName. ASN.BLADE OS 5. which contains the value `read-Only' in the error-status field.1 type as a string of eight-bit octets. from simple types such as integers and bit strings to structured types such as sets and sequences. this object is provided as a means of detecting incorrect implementations of the SNMP.208). defined in X. which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is `read-Only'.209). The total number of SNMP Messages which failed ASN parsing.1 is a flexible notation that allows one to define a variety of data types. snmpInNoSuchNames snmpInBadValues snmpInReadOnlys snmpInGenErrs BMD00114. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). BER describes how to represent or encode values of each ASN.1 or BER errors encountered by the SNMP protocol entity when decoding SNMP Messages received. and one set of rules for representing such objects as strings of ones and zeros is called the BER (Basic Encoding Rules.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation One.

The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). August 2009 . The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is too big.1 Command Reference Table 84 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics Description snmpInTotalReqVars The total number of MIB objects which have been retrieved successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP Get-Request and Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status is noSuchName. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. which have been altered successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is genErr. snmpInTotalSetVars snmpInGetRequests snmpInGetNexts snmpInSetRequests snmpInGetResponses snmpInTraps snmpOutTooBigs snmpOutNoSuchNames snmpOutBadValues snmpOutReadOnlys snmpOutGenErrs snmpOutGetRequests 188 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of MIB objects. Not in use. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.BLADE OS 5. which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is badValue. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs).

August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 189 . The total number of GetRequest-PDUs. snmpProxyDrops BMD00114. The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.1 Command Reference Table 84 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics Description snmpOutGetNexts snmpOutSetRequests snmpOutGet Responses snmpOutTraps snmpSilentDrops The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). GetBulkRequest-PDUs. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs). and InformRequest-PDUs delivered to the SNMP entity which were silently dropped because the transmission of the message to a proxy target failed in a manner such that no Response-PDU could be returned. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. GetNextRequest-PDUs. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. and InformRequest-PDUs delivered to the SNMPv2 entity which were silently dropped because the size of a reply containing an alternate Response-PDU with an empty variable bindings field was greater than either a local constraint or the maximum message size associated with the originator of the request. The total number of GetRequest-PDUs.BLADE OS 5. SetRequest-PDUs. GetNextRequest-PDUs. SetRequest-PDUs. GetBulkRequest-PDUs.

Updates: The total number of times the switch updated its time based on the NTP responses received from the secondary NTP server. the switch can accurately update its internal clock to be consistent with other devices on the network and generates accurate syslogs. August 2009 . Responses Received: The total number of NTP responses received from the secondary NTP server. With NTP enabled. Last update time: 18:04:16 Tue Jul 13.1 Command Reference /stats/ntp NTP Statistics BLADE OS uses NTP (Network Timing Protocol) version 3 to synchronize the switch’s internal clock with an atomic time calibrated NTP server. NTP statistics: Primary Server: Requests Sent: Responses Received: Updates: Secondary Server: Requests Sent: Responses Received: Updates: 17 17 1 0 0 0 Last update based on response from primary server. 190 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. 2009 Table 85 NTP Statistics Parameters (/stats/ntp) Field Description Primary Server Requests Sent: The total number of NTP requests the switch sent to the primary NTP server to synchronize time. 2009 Current system time: 18:55:49 Tue Jul 13. Updates: The total number of times the switch updated its time based on the NTP responses received from the primary NTP server. Secondary Server Requests Sent: The total number of NTP requests the switch sent to the secondary NTP server to synchronize time. Responses Received: The total number of NTP responses received from the primary NTP server.BLADE OS 5.

1 Command Reference Table 85 NTP Statistics Parameters (/stats/ntp) Field Description Last update based on response from primary server Last update time Current system time Last update of time on the switch based on either primary or secondary NTP response received. The switch system time when the following command was issued: /stats/ntp Note – Use the following command to delete all NTP statistics: /stats/ntp clear BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 191 . The time stamp showing the time when the switch was last updated.BLADE OS 5.

This data can be used to tune or debug switch performance.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference /stats/sfd Server Link Failure Detection Statistics This menu option allows you to display Server Link Failure Detection (SFD) statistics. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. Server Link Failure Detection statistics: Number of times LtM link failure: 1 Number of times LtM link in Blocking State: 0 Number of times LtE got auto enabled: 1 Table 86 SFD Statistics Field Number of times LtM link failure Number of times LtM link in Blocking Stat Number of times LtE got auto enabled Description The total numbers of times that link failures were detected on the downlink ports in the Link to Monitor group. /stats/dump Statistics Dump Use the dump command to dump all switch statistics available from the Statistics Menu (40K or more. The total number of times that Spanning Tree Blocking state was detected on the downlink ports in the Link to Monitor group. depending on your configuration). August 2009 . 192 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. The total numbers of times that cross-connect ports in the Link to Enable group were automatically enabled because of a failure in the Link to Monitor group. follow the command /stats/sfd with the following argument: clear. If you want to capture dump data to a file. To reset SFD statistics.

Access Control List Menu pmirr . Changes can be saved to non-volatile memory (NVRAM).Server Link Failure Detection Menu setup . Changes to configuration are not active until explicitly applied.QOS Menu acl . August 2009 193 .Port Mirroring Menu l2 .CHAPTER 6 The Configuration Menu This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for making.Backup current configuration to FTP/TFTP server gtcfg .System-wide Parameter Menu port .RMON Menu sfd .Port Menu qos . viewing.Layer 3 Menu rmon .Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg . and saving switch configuration changes.Layer 2 Menu l3 .Step by step configuration set up dump .Display current configuration BMD00114.Restore current configuration from FTP/TFTP server cur . /cfg Configuration Menu [Configuration Menu] sys .

see page 247. pmirr Displays the Mirroring Configuration Menu. 194 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. To view menu options. l2 Displays the Layer 2 Configuration Menu. with pointers to detailed menu commands. qos Displays the Quality of Service Configuration Menu. port <port number> Displays the Port Configuration Menu. see page 313. see page 238. see page 373. setup Step-by-step configuration set-up of the switch. To view menu options. see page 376. Table 87 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System Configuration Menu. To view menu options. l3 Displays the Layer 3 Configuration Menu. see page 198. To view menu options. see page 376. see page 368. rmon Displays the Remote Monitoring (RMON) Configuration Menu.1 Command Reference Each configuration option is briefly described in Table 87. see page 249. To view menu options.BLADE OS 5. To view menu options. To view menu options. August 2009 . sfd Displays the Server Link Failure Detection Configuration Menu. To view menu options. see page 263. dump Dumps current configuration to a script file. For details. For details. see page 265. acl Displays the ACL Configuration Menu. To view menu options.

settings you view in the Configuration menu (for example. The Information menu displays current run-time information of switch parameters. Applying. BMD00114. cur Displays current configuration parameters. port status) might differ from run-time information that you view in the Information menu. Therefore. see page 377. For details. All changes are considered “pending” until you explicitly apply them. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 195 . and Saving Changes As you use the configuration menus to set switch parameters. Viewing. the changes you make do not take effect immediately.1 Command Reference Table 87 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage ptcfg <FTP/TFTP server host name or IP address> <filename on host> Backs up current configuration to FTP/TFTP server. gtcfg <host name or IP address of FTP/TFTP server> <filename on host> Restores current configuration from FTP/TFTP server. While configuration changes are in the pending state. Reverting. For details. any changes are lost the next time the switch boots unless the changes are explicitly saved.BLADE OS 5. Note – The diff command is a global command. Also. Therefore. you can enter diff at any prompt in the CLI. you can do the following: View the pending changes Apply the pending changes Save the changes to flash memory Viewing Pending Changes You can view all pending configuration changes by entering diff at the menu prompt. see page 377. Note – Some operations can override the settings in the Configuration menu.

you must apply them. August 2009 . but not applied. enter the following command at any CLI prompt: # save When you save configuration changes. you can save them to flash memory on the GbE2c. # apply Note – The apply command is a global command. the changes are saved to the active configuration block.1 Command Reference Applying Pending Changes To make your configuration changes active. they will be lost the next time the system is rebooted. # revert Saving the Configuration In addition to applying the configuration changes. you can enter apply at any prompt in the administrative interface. Reverting Changes The revert command removes configuration changes that have been made.BLADE OS 5. enter apply at any prompt in the CLI. Therefore. To apply configuration changes. The configuration being replaced by the save is first copied to the backup configuration block. If you do not want the previous configuration block copied to the backup configuration block. Note – If you do not save the changes. To save the new configuration. enter the following instead: # save n 196 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. Enter revert apply to remove all changes that have not been saved.

BLADE OS 5. see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 390. For instructions on selecting the configuration to run at the next system reset. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 197 . Your options include: The active configuration block The backup configuration block Factory default configuration You can view all pending configuration changes that have been applied but not saved to flash memory using the diff flash command.1 Command Reference You can decide which configuration you want to run the next time you reset the switch. BMD00114. It is a global command that can be executed from any menu.

see page 207.Enable/disable System reset on panic .System SNMP Menu . see page 201. sshd Displays the SSH Server Menu.Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt .Set login notice .Set system timezone (daylight savings) .Enable/disable Reminders .BLADE OS 5. see page 205.Enable/disable use of DHCP on Mgmt interface .Syslog Menu .Display current system-wide parameters This menu provides configuration of switch management parameters such as user and administrator privilege mode passwords. Table 88 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys) Command Syntax and Usage syslog Displays the Syslog Menu. and management access lists.NTP Server Menu .Set system daylight savings .Set timeout for idle CLI sessions .TACACS+ Authentication Menu . To view menu options.RADIUS Authentication Menu . radius Displays the RADIUS Authentication Menu.SSH Server Menu . 198 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. To view menu options. To view menu options.LDAP Authentication Menu .1 Command Reference /cfg/sys System Configuration Menu [System Menu] syslog sshd radius tacacs+ ldap ntp ssnmp access sflow date time timezone olddst dlight idle notice bannr hprompt bootp dhcp reminder rstctrl cur . see page 203.Set login banner .Set system DST for US prior to 2007 .Enable/disable use of BOOTP .Set system time .System Access Menu . tacacs+ Displays the TACACS+ Authentication Menu. August 2009 .sFlow Menu .Set system date . Web-based management settings. To view menu options.

ssnmp Displays the System SNMP Menu. date Prompts the user for the system date. BMD00114. country. The default setting is disabled. The date retains its value when the switch is reset. To view menu options. Once a region is selected. region) by the timezone wizard. the switch updates the time to reflect local changes to Daylight Savings Time. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 199 . see page 213. The time retains its value when the switch is reset. To view menu options.1 Command Reference Table 88 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage ldap Displays the LDAP Authentication Menu. etc. ntp Displays the Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server Menu. When enabled. time Configures the system time using a 24-hour clock format. sflow Displays the sFlow menu. To view menu options. see page 214. The default value is disabled. see page 211.BLADE OS 5. access Displays the System Access Menu. see page 230. the switch will add an extra hour to the system clock so that it is consistent with the local clock. see page 236. timezone Configures the time zone where the switch resides. olddst enable|disable Enables or disables use of the Daylight Saving Time (DST) rules in effect prior to the year 2007. You are prompted to select your location (continent. To view menu options. To view menu options. dlight enable|disable Disables or enables daylight savings time in the system clock.

200 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. When enabled. the login banner is displayed. When enabled. bannr <string. dhcp disable|enable Enables or disables Dynamic Host Control Protocol for setting the IP address on the management interface. notice <maximum 1024 character multi-line login notice> <'-' to end> Displays login notice immediately before the “Enter password:” prompt. using the last known Layer 2/3 information. cur Displays the current system parameters. The default is 10 minutes. the IP address obtained from the DHCP server overrides the static IP address. It is also displayed as part of the output from the /info/sys command. the switch will query its BOOTP server for all of the switch IP parameters. from 1 to 60 minutes. The default setting is enabled. reminder disable|enable Enables or disables reminder messages in the CLI. The default setting is enabled. August 2009 . rstctrl disable|enable Enables or disables the reset control flag. the switch continues to function after a crash of the main processor. The default setting is enabled.BLADE OS 5. This notice can contain up to 1024 characters and new lines. maximum 80 characters> Configures a login banner of up to 80 characters. If you enable BOOTP. The default setting is enabled. When a user or administrator logs into the switch. bootp disable|enable Enables or disables the use of BOOTP.1 Command Reference Table 88 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage idle <idle timeout in minutes> Sets the idle timeout for CLI sessions. hprompt disable|enable Enables or disables displaying of the host name (system administrator’s name) in the Command Line Interface (CLI).

It is enabled by default. The default is 0. sever <syslog host local severity (0–7)> This option sets the severity level of the first syslog host displayed. facil2 <syslog host local facility (0-7)> This option sets the facility level of the second syslog host displayed.BLADE OS 5. log all severity levels.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/syslog System Host Log Configuration Menu [Syslog Menu] host host2 sever sever2 facil facil2 console log cur Set IP address of first syslog host Set IP address of second syslog host Set the severity of first syslog host Set the severity of second syslog host Set facility of first syslog host Set facility of second syslog host Enable/disable console output of syslog messages Enable/disable syslogging of features Display current syslog settings Table 89 Host Log Menu Options (/cfg/sys/syslog) Command Syntax and Usage host <new syslog host IP address> Sets the IP address of the first syslog host. console disable|enable Enables or disables delivering syslog messages to the console. which means log all severity levels. The default is 0. host2 <new syslog host IP address> Sets the IP address of the second syslog host. sever2 <syslog host local severity (0–7)> This option sets the severity level of the second syslog host displayed. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 201 . When necessary. which means. BMD00114. disabling console ensures the switch is not affected by syslog messages. The default is 7. The default is 7. facil <syslog host local facility (0-7)> This option sets the facility level of the first syslog host displayed.

or to enable or disable syslog on all available features.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference Table 89 Host Log Menu Options (/cfg/sys/syslog) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage log <feature|all> <enable|disable> Displays a list of features for which syslog messages can be generated. August 2009 . or servers). stg. 202 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. You can choose to enable or disable specific features (such as vlans. cur Displays the current syslog settings.

in hours. ena Enables the SCP apply and save. scpadm Set the administration password for SCP access. BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. sshport <TCP port number> Sets the SSH server port number. For the switch. dis Disables the SCP apply and save. The SSH program securely logs into another computer over a network and executes commands in a secure environment. SSH scripts can be viewed by using the /cfg/dump command (see page 376).1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/sshd Secure Shell Server Configuration Menu [SSHD Menu] intrval scpadm hkeygen skeygen sshport ena dis on off cur Set Interval for generating the RSA server key Set SCP-only admin password Generate the RSA host key Generate the RSA server key Set SSH server port number Enable the SCP apply and save Disable the SCP apply and save Turn SSH server ON Turn SSH server OFF Display current SSH server configuration Telnet traffic on the network is not secure. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 203 . for auto-generation of the RSA server key. hkeygen Generate the RSA host key. skeygen Generate the RSA server key. All data using SSH is encrypted. Table 90 SSH Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sshd) Command Syntax and Usage intrval <0-24> Set the interval. this menu enables Secure Shell access from any SSH client.

BLADE OS 5. off Disables the SSH server. August 2009 . 204 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.1 Command Reference Table 90 SSH Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sshd) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage on Enables the SSH server. cur Displays the current SSH server configuration.

Enable/disable RADIUS secure backdoor for telnet/ssh/ http/https on . before a RADIUS server authentication attempt is considered to have failed.3000.Set secondary RADIUS server secret port .Set RADIUS server retries timeout .Display current RADIUS configuration Table 91 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Sets the primary RADIUS server address. The default is 3 requests. secsrv <IP address> Sets the secondary RADIUS server address.Set secondary RADIUS server address secret .Set RADIUS server timeout bckdoor . in seconds.Set primary RADIUS server address secsrv .Set RADIUS secret secret2 . port <RADIUS port> Enter the number of the UDP port to be configured. BMD00114.Enable/disable RADIUS backdoor for telnet/ssh/http/https secbd . timeout <RADIUS server timeout seconds (1-10)> Sets the amount of time. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 205 . The default is 3 seconds. The default is 1645. secret2 <1-32 character secret> This is the secondary shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS server(s).Turn RADIUS authentication OFF cur .Set RADIUS port retries . retries <RADIUS server retries (1-3)> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different RADIUS server. secret <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS server(s).BLADE OS 5. between 1500 .1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/radius RADIUS Server Configuration Menu [RADIUS Server Menu] prisrv .Turn RADIUS authentication ON off .

BLADE OS 5. secbd disable|enable Enables or disables the RADIUS back door using secure password for Telnet/SSH/ HTTP/HTTPS. and use the administrator password to log into the switch. 206 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.1 Command Reference Table 91 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage bckdoor disable|enable Enables or disables the RADIUS backdoor for Telnet/SSH/HTTP/HTTPS. If secure backdoor is enabled (secbd ena). type in noradius as a backdoor to bypass RADIUS checking. on Enables the RADIUS server. The switch allows this only if RADIUS servers are not available. type in noradius as a backdoor to bypass RADIUS checking. so you can connect using noradius and the administrator password even if the backdoor (bckdoor) or secure backdoor (secbd) are disabled. cur Displays the current RADIUS server parameters. This command does not apply when backdoor (Telnet) is enabled. Note – If RADIUS is enabled. off Disables the RADIUS server. contact your Service and Support line. If Telnet backdoor is enabled (bckdoor ena). Backdoor for console is always enabled. The default value is disabled. To obtain the RADIUS backdoor password for your switch. The switch allows this even if RADIUS servers are available. August 2009 . and use the administrator password to log into the switch. you must login using RADIUS authentication when connecting via the console or Telnet/SSH/HTTP/HTTPS.

so it facilitates connection-oriented traffic. whereas TACACS+ separates the two operations.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/tacacs+ TACACS+ Server Configuration Menu TACACS (Terminal Access Controller Access Control system) is an authentication protocol that allows a remote access server to forward a user's logon password to an authentication server to determine whether access can be allowed to a given system. (Both TACACS and TACACS+ are described in RFC 1492. Also. authorization. It supports full-packet encryption. TACACS+ offers the following advantages over RADIUS as the authentication device: TACACS+ is TCP-based. [TACACS+ Server prisrv secsrv chpass_p chpass_s secret secret2 port retries timeout usermap bckdoor secbd cmap passch cauth clog dreq on off cur - Menu] Set IP address of primary TACACS+ server Set IP address of secondary TACACS+ server Set new password for primary server Set new password for secondary server Set secret for primary TACACS+ server Set secret for secondary TACACS+ server Set TACACS+ port number Set number of TACACS+ server retries Set timeout value of TACACS+ server retries Set user privilege mappings Enable/disable TACACS+ backdoor for telnet/ssh/ http/https Enable/disable TACACS+ secure backdoor Enable/disable TACACS+ new privilege level mapping Enable/disable TACACS+ password change Enable/disable TACACS+ command authorization Enable/disable TACACS+ command logging Enable/disable TACACS+ directed request Enable TACACS+ authentication Disable TACACS+ authentication Display current TACACS+ settings BMD00114.) TACACS+ protocol is more reliable than RADIUS. and accounting. and therefore less secure than TACACS+ and Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) protocols. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 207 . as opposed to password-only in authentication requests. RADIUS combines authentication and authorization in a user profile. as TACACS+ uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) whereas RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP). It supports de-coupled authentication.BLADE OS 5. TACACS is an encryption protocol.

The CLI will prompt you for input. port <TACACS port> Enter the number of the TCP port to be configured. secret2 <1-32 character secret> This is the secondary shared secret between the switch and the TACACS+ server(s). The CLI will prompt you for input. in seconds. chpass_s Configures the password for the secondary TACACS+ server. retries <TACACS server retries. usermap <0-15> user|oper|admin|none Maps a TACACS+ authorization level to a switch user level. secsrv <IP address> Defines the secondary TACACS+ server address. August 2009 . secret <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret between the switch and the TACACS+ server(s).BLADE OS 5. 208 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. timeout <TACACS server timeout seconds. before a TACACS+ server authentication attempt is considered to have failed. Enter a TACACS+ authorization level (0-15). between 1 .1 Command Reference Table 92 TACACS+ Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/tacacs) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Defines the primary TACACS+ server address. followed by the corresponding switch user level.65000. 4-15> Sets the amount of time. chpass_p Configures the password for the primary TACACS+ server. 1-3> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different TACACS+ server. The default is 3 requests. The default is 5 seconds. The default is 49.

August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 209 . SSH/SCP. This feature is recommended to permit access to the switch when the TACACS+ servers become unresponsive. clog disable|enable Enables or disables TACACS+ command logging.1 Command Reference Table 92 TACACS+ Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/tacacs) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage bckdoor disable|enable Enables or disables the TACACS+ back door for Telnet. secbd enable|disable Enables or disables TACACS+ secure back door access through Telnet. The default value is disabled. or HTTP/HTTPS only when the TACACS+ servers are not responding. If no back door is enabled. The default setting is disabled. It is recommended that you use Secure Backdoor to ensure the switch is secured. or HTTP/HTTPS. SSH/SCP.BLADE OS 5. cmap enable|disable Enables or disables TACACS+ privilege-level mapping. contact your Service and Support line. The default setting is disabled. cauth disable|enable Enables or disables TACACS+ command authorization. passch enable|disable Enables or disables TACACS+ password change. because Secure Backdoor disallows access through the back door when the TACACS+ servers are responding. the only way to gain access when TACACS+ servers are unresponsive is to use the back door via the console port. To obtain the TACACS+ backdoor password for your switch. BMD00114. The default setting is disabled. Enabling this feature allows you to bypass the TACACS+ servers.

and use the administrator password to log into the switch. off Disables the TACACS+ server. This is the default setting. Note – If TACACS+ is enabled. you must login using TACACS+ authentication when connecting via the console or Telnet/SSH/HTTP/HTTPS. and use the administrator password to log into the switch. so you can connect using notacacs and the administrator password even if the backdoor (bckdoor) or secure backdoor (secbd) are disabled.BLADE OS 5. type in notacacs as a backdoor to bypass TACACS+ checking. accounting. This command allows the following options: Restricted: Only the username is sent to the specified TACACS+ server. When directed-request is enabled. which uses a specified TACACS+ server for authentication. Backdoor for console is always enabled.1 Command Reference Table 92 TACACS+ Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/tacacs) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage dreq disable|enable Enables or disables TACACS+ directed request. on Enables the TACACS+ server. The switch allows this only if TACACS+ servers are not available. No-truncate: The entire login string is sent to the TACACS+ server. cur Displays current TACACS+ configuration parameters. each user must add a configured TACACS+ server hostname to the username (for example. If secure backdoor is enabled (secbd ena). The switch allows this even if TACACS+ servers are available. authorization. type in notacacs as a backdoor to bypass TACACS+ checking. August 2009 . When enabled. username@hostname) during login. 210 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. If Telnet backdoor is enabled (bckdoor ena).

4-15> Sets the amount of time. [LDAP Server Menu] prisrv .BLADE OS 5. 1-3> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different LDAP server. between 1 . The default is 389. retries <LDAP server retries. secsrv <IP address> Defines the secondary LDAP server address.Enable LDAP authentication off . in seconds.Set IP address of secondary LDAP server port .dc=mydomain.Disable LDAP authentication cur . The default is 5 seconds.dc=com BMD00114. before a LDAP server authentication attempt is considered to have failed.Set LDAP port number retries . For example: ou=people.Set domain name bckdoor . The default is 3 requests. timeout <LDAP server timeout seconds. port <LDAP port> Enter the number of the TCP port to be configured.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ldap LDAP Server Configuration Menu LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) is an authentication protocol that allows a remote access server to forward a user's logon password to an authentication server to determine whether access can be allowed to a given system.Set number of LDAP server retries timeout . Enter the full path for your organization.Display current LDAP settings Table 93 LDAP Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ldap) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Defines the primary LDAP server address. domain <domain name (1-128 characters)>|none Sets the domain name for the LDAP server.Enable/disable LDAP backdoor for telnet/ssh/http/https on . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 211 .65000.Set IP address of primary LDAP server secsrv .Set timeout value of LDAP server retries domain .

contact your Service and Support line. This is the default setting. The default setting is disabled. off Disables the LDAP server. To obtain the LDAP backdoor password for your switch. August 2009 . cur Displays current LDAP configuration parameters. 212 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. on Enables the LDAP server. SSH/SCP. or HTTP/HTTPS.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference Table 93 LDAP Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ldap) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage bckdoor disable|enable Enables or disables the LDAP back door for Telnet.

Set primary NTP server address secsrv . in minutes.Set NTP server resync interval on . BMD00114. cur Displays the current NTP service settings.BLADE OS 5. off Disables the NTP synchronization service. this option is disabled.Set secondary NTP server address intrval . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 213 . on Enables the NTP synchronization service.Turn NTP service OFF cur . intrval <5-44640> Specifies the time interval. to re-synchronize the switch clock with the NTP server. By default. Table 94 NTP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Prompts for the IP addresses of the primary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ntp NTP Server Configuration Menu [NTP Server Menu] prisrv . secsrv <IP address> Prompts for the IP addresses of the secondary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock.Turn NTP service ON off .Display current NTP configuration This menu enables you to synchronize the switch clock to a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server.

a management station (client/manager) accesses a set of variables known as MIBs (Management Information Base) provided by the managed device (agent). Each SNMP message sent to the agent contains a list of management objects to retrieve or to modify. you can manage the switch using the following standard SNMP MIBs: MIB II (RFC 1213) Ethernet MIB (RFC 1643) Bridge MIB (RFC 1493) An SNMP agent is a software process on the managed device that listens on UDP port 161 for SNMP messages.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 . If you are running an SNMP network management station on your network.Enable/disable SNMP "sysAuthenTrap" linkt .Set SNMP trap source interface for SNMPv1 timeout .Display current SNMP configuration BLADE OS supports SNMP-based network management.Enable/disable SNMP link up/down trap sfd .Set SNMP write community string trsrc . In SNMP model of network management.Set SNMP "sysName" locn .Set SNMP read community string wcomm .Set SNMP "sysLocation" cont .1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp System SNMP Configuration Menu [System SNMP Menu] snmpv3 .Set timeout for the SNMP state machine auth .Enable/disable SNMP Server Link Failure Detection trap cur . SNMP parameters that can be modified include: System name System location System contact Use of the SNMP system authentication trap function Read community string Write community string Trap community strings 214 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.SNMPv3 Menu name .Set SNMP "sysContact" rcomm .

The default read community string is public. see page 217. in minutes.BLADE OS 5. timeout <1-30> Set the timeout value for the SNMP state machine. The default write community string is private. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 215 . BMD00114. To view menu options. The default value is interface 1. The write community string controls SNMP “set” and “get” access to the switch. The read community string controls SNMP “get” access to the switch. auth disable|enable Enables or disables the use of the system authentication trap facility. wcomm <1-32 characters> Configures the SNMP write community string. To send traps through the management ports. cont <1-64 characters> Configures the name of the system contact. trsrc <interface number> Configures the source interface for SNMP traps. locn <1-64 characters> Configures the name of the system location. The default setting is disabled. linkt <port> [disable|enable] Enables or disables the sending of SNMP link up and link down traps. name <1-64 characters> Configures the name for the system.1 Command Reference Table 95 System SNMP Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp) Command Syntax and Usage snmpv3 Displays SNMPv3 menu. The default setting is enabled. specify interface 256. rcomm <1-32 characters> Configures the SNMP read community string.

1 Command Reference Table 95 System SNMP Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage sfd disable|enable Enables or disables the sending of Server Link Failure Detection traps. August 2009 .BLADE OS 5. 216 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. cur Displays the current SNMP configuration. The default setting is disabled.

[SNMPv3 Menu] usm view access group comm taddr tparam notify v1v2 cur - usmUser Table menu vacmViewTreeFamily Table menu vacmAccess Table menu vacmSecurityToGroup Table menu community Table menu targetAddr Table menu targetParams Table menu notify Table menu Enable/disable V1/V2 access Display current SNMPv3 configuration Table 96 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage usm <usmUser number [1-16]> Defines a user security model (USM) entry for an authorized user.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by supporting the following: a new SNMP message format security for messages access control remote configuration of SNMP parameters For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276. To view menu options. BMD00114. view <vacmViewTreeFamily number [1-128]> Allows you to create different MIB views.BLADE OS 5. To view menu options. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 217 . You need access control when you have to process retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity. You can also configure this entry through SNMP. see page 222. To view menu options. access <vacmAccess number [1-32]> Configures the access rights. see page 221. see page 219. The View-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user.

see page 224. tparam <target params index [1-16]> Allows you to configure SNMP parameters. security level. see page 226. and generates Notification-Class messages based on these events or conditions. see page 229. or a particular transport endpoint may be associated with several sets of SNMP parameters. There may be multiple transport endpoints associated with a particular set of SNMP parameters. This is also termed as transport endpoint. To view menu options. and for selecting community strings based on target addresses for outgoing notifications. To view menu options. consisting of message processing model. taddr <snmpTargetAddr number [1-16]> Allows you to configure destination information. consisting of a transport domain and a transport address. notify <notify index [1-16]> A notification application typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions. see page 227. The SNMP MIB provides a mechanism for performing source address validation on incoming requests. August 2009 . see page 225.1 Command Reference Table 96 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3) group <vacmSecurityToGroup number [1-16]> Maps the user name to the access group names and their access rights needed to access SNMP management objects. cur Displays the current SNMPv3 configuration. v1v2 disable|enable Allows you to enable or disable the access to SNMP version 1 and version 2. To view menu options. To view menu options. 218 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. The default setting is enabled. A group defines the access rights assigned to all names that belong to a particular group. security model. To view menu options. comm <snmpCommunity number [1-16]> The community table contains objects for mapping community strings and version-independent SNMP message parameters.BLADE OS 5. and security name information.

privpw Defines the privacy password. If you select none as the authentication protocol. auth md5|sha|none Configures the authentication protocol between HMAC-MD5-96 or HMAC-SHA-96. The privacy protocol protects messages from disclosure. You need to provide a security name to create the USM entry. otherwise you will get an error message during validation. you will get an error message. This menu helps you create a user security model entry for an authorized user. The default algorithm is none. [SNMPv3 usmUser name auth authpw priv privpw del cur 1 Menu] Set USM user name Set authentication protocol Set authentication password Set privacy protocol Set privacy password Delete usmUser entry Display current usmUser configuration Table 97 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm) Command Syntax and Usage name <1-32 characters> Defines a string that represents the name of the user.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm User Security Model Configuration Menu You can make use of a defined set of user identities using this Security Model.BLADE OS 5. authpw Allows you to create or change your password for authentication. If you selected an authentication algorithm using the above command. An SNMP engine must have the knowledge of applicable attributes of a user. The options are des (CBC-DES Symmetric Encryption Protocol) or none. This is the login name that you need in order to access the switch. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 219 . priv des|none Configures the type of privacy protocol on your switch. then make sure that you have selected one of the authentication protocols (MD5 or HMAC-SHA-96). If you specify des as the privacy protocol. BMD00114. you need to provide a password.

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

Table 97 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm) (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

del Deletes the selected USM user entries. cur Displays the selected USM user entries.

220

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view
SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu
[SNMPv3 vacmViewTreeFamily 1 Menu] name - Set view name tree - Set MIB subtree(OID) which defines a family of view subtrees mask - Set view mask type - Set view type del - Delete vacmViewTreeFamily entry cur - Display current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration

Table 98 SNMPv3 View Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view)
Command Syntax and Usage

name <1-32 characters> Defines the name for a family of view subtrees. tree <object identifier, such as 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.0 (1-32 characters)> Defines the MIB tree which, when combined with the corresponding mask, defines a family of view subtrees. mask <bitmask, 1-32 characters> Configures the bit mask, which in combination with the corresponding tree, defines a family of view subtrees. type included|excluded This command indicates whether the corresponding instances of vacmViewTreeFamilySubtree and vacmViewTreeFamilyMask define a family of view subtrees, which is included in or excluded from the MIB view. del Deletes the vacmViewTreeFamily group entry. cur Displays the current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

221

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access
View-Based Access Control Model Configuration Menu
The view-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user. Access control is needed when the user has to process SNMP retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity.
[SNMPv3 vacmAccess 1 Menu] name - Set group name model - Set security model level - Set minimum level of security rview - Set read view index wview - Set write view index nview - Set notify view index del - Delete vacmAccess entry cur - Display current vacmAccess configuration

Table 99 View-based Access Control Model Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access)
Command Syntax and Usage

name <1-32 characters> Defines the name of the group. model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Allows you to select the security model to be used. level noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv Defines the minimum level of security required to gain access rights. The level noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy protocol. The level authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol. The authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol. rview <1-32 characters> Defines a read view name that allows you read access to a particular MIB view. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted. wview <1-32 characters> Defines a write view name that allows you write access to the MIB view. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted.

222

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

Table 99 View-based Access Control Model Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access) (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

nview <1-32 characters> Defines a long notify view name that allows you notify access to the MIB view. del Deletes the View-based Access Control entry. cur Displays the View-based Access Control configuration.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

223

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group
SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu
[SNMPv3 vacmSecurityToGroup 1 Menu] model - Set security model uname - Set USM user name gname - Set group gname del - Delete vacmSecurityToGroup entry cur - Display current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration

Table 100 SNMPv3 Group Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group)
Command Syntax and Usage

model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Defines the security model. uname <1-32 characters> Sets the user name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name on page 219. gname <1-32 characters> The name for the access group as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access/name on page 222. del Deletes the vacmSecurityToGroup entry. cur Displays the current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration.

224

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/comm
SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu
This command is used for configuring the community table entry. The configured entry is stored in the community table list in the SNMP engine. This table is used to configure community strings in the Local Configuration Datastore (LCD) of SNMP engine.
[SNMPv3 snmpCommunityTable 1 Menu] index - Set community index name - Set community string uname - Set USM user name tag - Set community tag del - Delete communityTable entry cur - Display current communityTable configuration

Table 101 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/comm)
Command Syntax and Usage

index <1-32 characters> Configures the unique index value of a row in this table. name <1-32 characters> Defines the user name as defined in the /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name command. uname <1-32 characters> Defines a readable text string that represents the corresponding value of an SNMP community name in a security model. tag <1-255 characters> Configures a tag that specifies a set of transport endpoints to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap. del Deletes the community table entry. cur Displays the community table configuration.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

225

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr
SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu
This command is used to configure the target transport entry. The configured entry is stored in the target address table list in the SNMP engine. This table of transport addresses is used in the generation of SNMP messages.
[SNMPv3 snmpTargetAddrTable 1 Menu] name - Set target address name addr - Set target transport address IP port - Set target transport address port taglist - Set tag list pname - Set targetParams name del - Delete targetAddrTable entry cur - Display current targetAddrTable configuration

Table 102 Target Address Table Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr)
Command Syntax and Usage

name <1-32 characters> Defines the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier, target address name associated with this entry. addr <transport IP address> Configures a transport IPv4 address that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps. port <transport address port> Configures a transport address port that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps. taglist <1-255 characters> Allows you to configure a list of tags that are used to select target addresses for a particular operation. pname <1-32 characters> Defines the name as defined in the /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam/name command on page 227. del Deletes the Target Address Table entry. cur Displays the current Target Address Table configuration.

226

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam
SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu
You can configure the target parameters entry and store it in the target parameters table in the SNMP engine. This table contains parameters that are used to generate a message. The parameters include the message processing model (for example: SNMPv3, SNMPv2c, SNMPv1), the security model (for example: USM), the security name, and the security level (noAuthnoPriv, authNoPriv, or authPriv).
[SNMPv3 snmpTargetParamsTable 1 Menu] name - Set target params name mpmodel - Set message processing model model - Set security model uname - Set USM user name level - Set minimum level of security del - Delete targetParamsTable entry cur - Display current targetParamsTable configuration

Table 103 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam)
Command Syntax and Usage

name <1-32 characters> Defines the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier that is associated with this entry. mpmodel snmpv1|snmpv2c|snmpv3 Configures the message processing model that is used to generate SNMP messages. model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Allows you to select the security model to be used when generating the SNMP messages. uname <1-32 characters> Defines the name that identifies the user in the USM table (page 219) on whose behalf the SNMP messages are generated using this entry. level noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv Allows you to select the level of security to be used when generating the SNMP messages using this entry. The level noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy protocol. The level authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol. The authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

227

1 Command Reference Table 103 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the targetParamsTable entry.BLADE OS 5. cur Displays the current targetParamsTable configuration. August 2009 . 228 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.

Set notify tag del .Set notify name tag . BMD00114.Display current notifyTable configuration Table 104 Notify Table Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify) Command Syntax and Usage name <1-32 characters> Defines a locally arbitrary but unique identifier associated with this SNMP notify entry.Delete notifyTable entry cur . tag <1-255 characters> Allows you to configure a tag that contains a tag value which is used to select entries in the Target Address Table.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration Menu SNMPv3 uses Notification Originator to send out traps. cur Displays the current notify table configuration. that matches the value of this tag is selected. A notification typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 229 . and generates Notification-Class messages based on these events or conditions. [SNMPv3 snmpNotifyTable 1 Menu] name . del Deletes the notify table entry. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable.

HTTPS Web Access Menu snmp . user Displays the User Access Control Menu. If Global Server Load Balancing is to be used.Enable/disable Telnet access tsbbi . The default is HTTP port 80. see page 235.Display current system access configuration Table 105 System Access Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access) Command Syntax and Usage mgmt Displays the Management Configuration Menu. tnport <TCP port number> Sets an optional telnet server port number for cases where the server listens for telnet sessions on a non-standard port. 230 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. August 2009 . snmp disable|read-only|read-write Disables or provides read-only/write-read SNMP access.Enable/disable user configuration from BBI cur .BLADE OS 5. tport <TFTP port number (1-65535)> Sets the TFTP port for the switch.Management Network Definition Menu user . see page 233. wport <TCP port number (1-65535)> Sets the switch port used for serving switch Web content.Enable/disable Telnet/SSH configuration from BBI userbbi .Set HTTP (Web) server port number http . To view menu options.Set Telnet server port number tport . The default is port 69.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access System Access Configuration Menu [System Access Menu] mgmt .Set SNMP access control tnport . To view menu options. see page 232. To view menu options.User Access Control Menu (passwords) https . set this to a different port (such as 8080).Enable/disable HTTP (Web) access tnet .Set the TFTP Port for the system wport . https Displays the HTTPS Menu.

BLADE OS 5. It is enabled by default. tnet enable|disable Enables or disables Telnet access. userbbi enable|disable Enables or disables user configuration access through the Browser-Based Interface (BBI). BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 231 .1 Command Reference Table 105 System Access Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP (Web) access to the Browser-Based Interface. This command is enabled by default. tsbbi enable|disable Enables or disables Telnet/SSH configuration access through the Browser-Based Interface (BBI). cur Displays the current system access parameters.

RIP. cur Displays the current configuration. Note: If you configure the management network without including the switch interfaces. August 2009 .BLADE OS 5. which consists of a management network address and a management network mask address. Table 106 Management Network Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/mgmt) Command Syntax and Usage add <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask> Adds a defined network through which switch access is allowed through Telnet.Display current mgmt network definitions clear .Remove mgmt network definition cur .Clear current mgmt network definitions This menu is used to define IP address ranges which are allowed to access the switch for management purposes. the configuration causes the Firewall Load Balancing health checks to fail and creates a “Network Down” state on the network.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/mgmt Management Networks Configuration Menu [Management Networks Menu] add . clear Removes all defined management networks. or the Browser-Based Interface. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with a network mask address. rem <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask> Removes a defined network.Add mgmt network definition rem . 232 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. SNMP. Specify an IP address and mask address in dotted-decimal notation.

information. usrpw <1-128 characters> Sets the user (user) password.User ID Menu eject . and configuration commands on the switch.Display current user status Note – Passwords can be a maximum of 128 characters. The user has no direct responsibility for switch management. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 233 . Table 107 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user) Command Syntax and Usage uid <User ID (1-10)> Displays the User ID Menu. admpw <1-128 characters> Sets the administrator (admin) password. To view menu options. He or she can view switch status information and statistics. BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. see page 234. but cannot make any configuration changes.Set administrator password (admin) cur .Eject user usrpw . Access includes “oper” functions. including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords.Set operator password (oper) admpw . The super user administrator has complete access to all menus. cur Displays the current user status. opw <1-128 characters> Sets the operator (oper)password. eject user|oper|admin|<user name> Ejects the specified user from the switch.Set user password (user) opw . He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can reset ports or the entire switch. The operator manages all functions of the switch.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/user User Access Control Configuration Menu [User Access Control Menu] uid .

del Deletes the user ID.Delete user ID cur . pswd <1-128 characters> Sets the user password. Operator.Set class of service name . cur Displays the current user ID configuration. 234 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.Display current user configuration Table 108 User ID Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user/uid) Command Syntax and Usage cos <user|oper|admin> Sets the Class-of-Service to define the user’s authority level.Enable user ID dis . ena Enables the user ID.Set user password ena . and Administrator. with User being the most restricted level. name <1-8 characters> Sets the user name (maximum of eight characters).Disable user ID del .1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/user/uid <1-10> System User ID Configuration Menu [User ID 1 Menu] cos . BLADE OS defines these levels as: User. dis Disables the user ID. August 2009 .BLADE OS 5.Set user name pswd .

For example: Country Name (2 letter code) []: CA State or Province Name (full name) []: Ontario Locality Name (for example. certSave Allows the client. city) []: Ottawa Organization Name (for example. port <TCP port number> Defines the HTTPS Web server port number. BMD00114. email address) []: info@bladenetwork.BLADE OS 5. company) []: Blade Organizational Unit Name (for example. cur Displays the current SSL Web Access configuration. user’s name) []: Mr Smith Email (for example. A default certificate is created when HTTPS is enabled for the first time. to accept the certificate and save the certificate to Flash to be used when the switch is rebooted. It will take approximately 30 seconds to generate the certificate.net You will be asked to confirm if you want to generate the certificate.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/https HTTPS Access Configuration [https Menu] access port generate certSave cur Enable/Disable HTTPS Web access HTTPS WebServer port number Generate self-signed HTTPS server certificate save HTTPS certificate Display current SSL Web Access configuration Table 109 HTTPS Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/https) Command Syntax and Usage access ena|dis Enables or disables BBI access (Web access) using HTTPS. Then the switch will restart SSL agent. section) []: Datacenter Common Name (for example. The user can create a new certificate defining the information that they want to be used in the various fields. or the Web browser. generate Allows you to generate a certificate to connect to the SSL to be used during the key exchange. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 235 .

cur Displays the current sFlow configuration. 236 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. dis Disables the sFlow agent. The default value is 6343. saddress <IP address> Defines the sFlow server address.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/sflow sFlow Configuration Menu [sFlow Menu] ena dis saddress sport port cur Enable sFlow Disable sFlow Set the sFlow Analyzer IP address Set the sFlow Analyzer port sFlow port Menu Display sFlow configuration sFlow is a sampling method used for monitoring high speed switched networks. sport <1-65535> Configures the UDP port for the sFlow server. August 2009 .BLADE OS 5. port <port number> Configures the sFlow interface port. Table 110 sFlow Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sflow) Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables the sFlow agent. Use this menu to configure the sFlow agent on the switch.

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/sflow/port <port number> sFlow Port Configuration Menu [sFlow Port Menu] polling . Table 111 sFlow Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sflow/port) Command Syntax and Usage polling <5-60>|0 Configures the sFlow polling interval.Set the sFlow polling interval sampling . in seconds. in packets per sample. cur Displays the current sFlow port configuration.Display sFlow port configuration Use this menu to configure the sFlow port on the switch. The default value is 0 (disabled).Set the sFlow sampling rate cur . sampling <256-65536>|0 Configures the sFlow sampling rate. The default value is 0 (disabled). BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 237 .

see page 241. To view menu options. oam Displays the OAM Discovery Configuration Menu. To view menu options. Lookup Fail Threshold Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Use the Port Configuration menu to configure settings for switch ports. see page 243. this option displays the Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu.BLADE OS 5. Note – Port 19 is reserved for switch management. udld Displays the Unidirectional Link Detection (UDLD) Menu. August 2009 .1 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number> Port Configuration Menu [Port 1 Menu] gig udld oam aclqos stp 8021ppri pvid name rmon learn tag tagpvid floodblk brate mrate drate ena dis cur Gig Phy Menu UDLD Menu OAM Menu Acl/Qos Configuration Menu STP Menu . Table 112 Port Configuration Menu (/cfg/port) Command Syntax and Usage gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet.for PVRST only Set default 802. see page 244. 238 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. To view menu options.1p priority Set default port VLAN id Set port name Enable/disable RMON for port Enable/Disable FDB Learning for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable tagging on pvid Enable/disable Port flood blocking Set BroadCast Threshold Set MultiCast Threshold Set Dest.

The default setting is disabled for uplink ports and downlink ports. stp Displays the Spanning Tree Port menu. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 239 . tagpvid disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tag persistence. the VLAN tag is removed from packets whose VLAN tag matches the port PVID. rmon e|d Enables or disables Remote Monitoring for the port. To view menu options. RMON must be enabled for any RMON configurations to function. see page 245. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. Note: VLAN 4095 is reserved for switch management. name <1-64 characters>|none Sets a name for the port. pvid <VLAN number> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. The default number is 1 for non-management ports. To view menu options.BLADE OS 5. 8021ppri <0-7> Configures the port’s 802. dscpmark Enables or disables DSCP re-marking on a port. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. and enabled for management ports. see page 246. The default setting is none. The default setting is disabled for uplink ports and enabled for downlink ports.1p priority level.1 Command Reference Table 112 Port Configuration Menu (/cfg/port) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage aclqos Displays the ACL/QoS Configuration Menu. When disabled. BMD00114.

(To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 241. dis Disables the port. 240 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. ena Enables the port. mrate <0-262143>|dis Limits the number of multicast packets per second to the specified value. If disabled (dis). the port forwards all broadcast packets. which permits a port that participates in Spanning Tree to bypass the Listening and Learning states and enter directly into the Forwarding state. If disabled (dis). etc. brate <0-262143>|dis Limits the number of broadcast packets per second to the specified value. the port forwards all unknown unicast packets. This feature permits the switch to interoperate well within Rapid Spanning Tree networks. August 2009 . the port transitions into the Blocking state.1 Command Reference Table 112 Port Configuration Menu (/cfg/port) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage fastfwd disable|enable Disables or enables Port Fast Forwarding.BLADE OS 5. While in the Forwarding state. drate <0-262143>|dis Limits the number of unknown unicast packets per second to the specified value. the port forwards all multicast packets. if dictated by normal STG behavior (following priorities. If disabled (dis).).) cur Displays current port parameters. the port listens to the BPDUs to learn if there is a loop and.

Set link speed . Some options are not valid on all ports. enter the following command at any prompt: Main# /oper/port <port number>/dis Because this configuration sets a temporary state for the port. See the “Operations Menu” on page 379 for other operations-level commands.” for auto negotiation (default) BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 241 .Set flow control . /cfg/port <port number>/gig Port Link Configuration Menu [Gigabit Link speed mode fctl auto cur Menu] .1 Command Reference Temporarily Disabling a Port To temporarily disable a port without changing its stored configuration attributes.BLADE OS 5.Display current gig link configuration Link menu options are described in the following table. The choices include: 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps 10000 Mps any (auto negotiate port speed) mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode. you do not need to use apply or save. Table 113 Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port/gig) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|1000|10000|any Sets the link speed. The choices include: Full-duplex Half-duplex “Any. Some options are not valid on all ports.Set full or half duplex mode .Set autonegotiation . The port state will revert to its original configuration when the switch is reset.

August 2009 . The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control cur Displays current port parameters. 242 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference Table 113 Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port/gig) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control.

Table 114 Port UDLD Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port/udld) Command Syntax and Usage mode normal|aggressive Configures the UDLD mode for the selected port. Aggressive: In addition to the normal mode. cur Displays current port UDLD parameters.1 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number>/udld UniDirectional Link Detection Configuration Menu [UDLD Menu] mode ena dis cur Set UDLD mode Enable UDLD Disable UDLD Display current port UDLD configuration UDLD menu options are described in the following table. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 243 . BMD00114. dis Disables UDLD on the port. The port is disabled if UDLD determines that the port is mis-connected.BLADE OS 5. ena Enables UDLD on the port. as follows: Normal: Detect unidirectional links that have mis-connected interfaces. the aggressive mode disables the port if the neighbor stops sending UDLD probes for 7 seconds.

OAM is described in the IEEE 802.BLADE OS 5. Administration. OAM menu options are described in the following table. If OAM determines that the port is in an anomalous condition. the port is disabled. Table 115 Port OAM Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port/oam) Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables OAM discovery on the port. dis Disables OAM discovery on the port. 244 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.3ah standard.1 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number>/oam Port OAM Configuration Menu [OAM Menu] ena dis mode cur Enable OAM Discovery process Disable OAM Discovery process Set OAM mode Display current port OAM configuration Operation. Passive: This port allows its peer link to initiate OAM discovery. mode active|passive Configures the OAM discovery mode. and Maintenance (OAM) protocol allows the switch to detect faults on the physical port links. August 2009 . cur Displays current port OAM parameters. as follows: Active: This port link initiates OAM discovery.

Display current ACLs for this port Table 116 Port ACL Menu Options (/cfg/port/aclqos) Command Syntax and Usage add acl|grp <1-762> Adds the specified ACL or ACL Group to the port. rem acl|grp <1-762> Removes the specified ACL or ACL Group from the port. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 245 .1 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number>/aclqos Port ACL Configuration Menu [Port 2 ACL Menu] add .BLADE OS 5.Remove ACL or ACL group from this port cur . BMD00114. cur Displays current ACL QoS parameters.Add ACL or ACL group to this port rem . You can add multiple ACL Groups to a port.

Display current port stp configuration Table 117 Port STP menu options (/cfg/port/stp) Command Syntax and Usage edge e|d Enables or disables this port as an edge port. p2p.1 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number>/stp Port Spanning Tree Configuration Menu [Port 1 STP Menu] edge . cur Displays current STP parameters for the port. and can begin forwarding traffic as soon as the link is up. as follows: auto: Configures the port to detect the link type. 246 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. An edge port is not connected to a bridge. p2p: Configures the port for Point-To-Point protocol.Enable/disable edge port (for PVRST only) link . shared: Configures the port to connect to a shared medium (usually a hub). August 2009 . default: auto) (for PVRST only) cur . Configure server ports as edge ports (enabled). or shared. link auto|p2p|shared Defines the type of link connected to the port. and automatically match its settings.Set port link type (auto.

August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 247 . see page 248. This allows you to differentiate between various types of traffic.1p configuration menu. BMD00114.BLADE OS 5.802. Table 118 Quality of Service Menu Options (/cfg/qos) Command Syntax and Usage 8021p Displays 802. and provide different priority levels. To view menu options.1p priority value and DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value of incoming packets.1p Menu Use the Quality of Service (QoS) menus to configure the 802.1 Command Reference /cfg/qos Quality of Service Configuration Menu [QOS Menu] 8021p .

Enter the COSq number. The packets with a higher (non-zero) priority bits are given forwarding preference over packets with numerically lower priority bits value.1p configuration This feature provides the capability to filter IP packets based on the 802. August 2009 .1p Configuration Menu [802.1p Menu Options (/cfg/qos/8021p) Command Syntax and Usage priq <priority (0-7)> <COSq number> Maps the 802. The 802. qweight <COSq number> <weight (0-15)> Configures the weight of the selected Class of Service queue (COSq).1p priority to the Class of Service queue (COSq) priority. default [priq] [qweight] Re-sets the selected parameters to their default values.1p configuration to default values Display current 802.BLADE OS 5.1p parameters.1 Command Reference /cfg/qos/8021p 802. Table 119 802.1p priority value (0-7).1p Menu] priq qweight default cur Set priority to COS queue mapping Set weight to a COS queue Reset 802. The valid range of the COSq number is set using the numcos command. cur Displays the current 802. followed by the scheduling weight (0-15).1p bits in the packet's VLAN header. 248 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. Enter the 802. followed by the COSq that handles the matching traffic.1p bits specify the priority that you should give to the packets while forwarding them.

see page 262. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 249 . BMD00114. ACLs define matching criteria used for IP filtering and Quality of Service functions. cur Displays the current ACL parameters. To view menu options.Access Control List Group Config Menu .1 Command Reference /cfg/acl Access Control List Configuration Menu [ACL Menu] acl group cur . see page 250.BLADE OS 5. Table 120 ACL Menu Options (/cfg/acl) Command Syntax and Usage acl <1-762> Displays Access Control List configuration menu.Display current ACL configuration Use this menu to create Access Control Lists (ACLs) and ACL Groups. group <1-762> Displays ACL Group configuration menu. To view menu options.Access Control List Item Config Menu .

ipv4 Displays the ACL IP Header menu. see page 256. August 2009 . To view menu options. To view menu options. Table 121 ACL Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x) Command Syntax and Usage ethernet Displays the ACL Ethernet Header menu. see page 252. meter Displays the ACL Metering menu.1 Command Reference /cfg/acl/acl <ACL number> ACL Configuration Menu [ACL 1 Menu] ethernet ipv4 tcpudp meter re-mark pktfmt egrport action stats reset cur Ethernet Header Options Menu IP Header Options Menu TCP/UDP Header Options Menu ACL Metering Configuration Menu ACL Re-mark Configuration Menu Set to filter specific packet format types Set to filter for packets egressing this port Set filter action Enable/disable statistics for this acl Reset filtering parameters Display current filter configuration These menus allow you to define filtering criteria for each Access Control List (ACL). To view menu options. To view menu options. egrport <port number> Configures the ACL to function on egress packets. To view menu options. see page 258. re-mark Displays the ACL Re-mark menu. see page 253. To view menu options. pktfmt <packet format> Displays the ACL Packet Format menu.BLADE OS 5. 250 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. tcpudp Displays the ACL TCP/UDP Header menu. see page 261. see page 255.

August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 251 .1p priority level (0-7).BLADE OS 5. cur Displays the current ACL parameters. stats e|d Enables or disables the statistics collection for the Access Control List. BMD00114. You can choose to permit (pass) or deny (drop) packets.1 Command Reference Table 121 ACL Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage action permit|deny|setprio <0-7> Configures a filter action for packets that match the ACL definitions. or set the 802. reset Resets the ACL parameters to their default values.

Table 122 Ethernet Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/ethernet) Command Syntax and Usage smac <MAC address (such as 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> <mask (FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF)> Defines the source MAC address for this ACL. reset Resets Ethernet parameters for the ACL to their default values. pri <0-7> Defines the Ethernet priority value for the ACL. cur Displays the current Ethernet parameters for the ACL.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference /cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/ethernet Ethernet Filtering Configuration Menu smac dmac vlan etype pri reset cur Set to filter on source MAC Set to filter on destination MAC Set to filter on VLAN ID Set to filter on ethernet type Set to filter on priority Reset all fields Display current parameters This menu allows you to define Ethernet matching criteria for an ACL. August 2009 . dmac <MAC address (such as 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> <mask (FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF)> Defines the destination MAC address for this ACL. vlan <VLAN number> <VLAN mask (0xfff)> Defines a VLAN number and mask for this ACL. etype ARP|IP|IPv6|MPLS|RARP|any|<other (0xXXXX)> Defines the Ethernet type for this ACL. 252 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.

traffic with this destination IP address will match this ACL. Listed below are some of the well-known protocols. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 253 . If defined.0)> Defines a source IP address for the ACL. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation.Set to filter on destination IP address proto .BLADE OS 5.255. Number Name 1 2 6 17 89 112 tos <0-255> Defines a Type of Service (ToS) value for the ACL. If defined. traffic with this source IP address will match this ACL.255. icmp igmp tcp udp ospf vrrp BMD00114. traffic from the specified protocol matches this filter.1 Command Reference /cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/ipv4 IP version 4 Filtering Configuration Menu [Filtering IPv4 Menu] sip .Display current parameters This menu allows you to define IPv4 matching criteria for an ACL.Set to filter on source IP address dip . dip <IP address> <mask (such as 255. If defined.0)> Defines a destination IP address for the ACL.Set to filter on TOS reset . For more information on ToS. Specify the protocol number.255.Reset all fields cur .Set to filter on prototype tos .255. refer to RFC 1340 and 1349. Table 123 IP version 4 Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/ipv4) Command Syntax and Usage sip <IP address> <mask (such as 255. proto <0-255> Defines an IP protocol for the ACL.

1 Command Reference Table 123 IP version 4 Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/ipv4) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage reset Resets the IPv4 parameters for the ACL to their default values. 254 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 . cur Displays the current IPV4 parameters.

traffic with the specified TCP or UDP source port will match this ACL.BLADE OS 5.Display current parameters This menu allows you to define TCP/UDP matching criteria for an ACL. Specify the port number. Listed below are some of the well-known ports: Number Name 20 21 22 23 25 37 42 43 53 69 70 79 80 ftp-data ftp ssh telnet smtp time name whois domain tftp gopher finger http dport <destination port (1-65535)> <mask (0xFFFF)> Defines a destination port for the ACL. If defined. traffic with the specified TCP or UDP destination port will match this ACL. BMD00114.Set to filter TCP/UDP flags reset . Specify the port number. If defined.1 Command Reference /cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/tcpudp TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration Menu [Filtering TCP/UDP Menu] sport . Table 124 TCP/UDP Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/tcpudp) Command Syntax and Usage sport <source port (1-65535)> <mask (0xFFFF)> Defines a source port for the ACL. flags <value (0x0-0x3f)> Defines a TCP/UDP flag for the ACL. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 255 .Set to filter on TCP/UDP destination port flags . just as with sport above.Set to filter on TCP/UDP source port dport .Reset all fields cur .

BLADE OS 5. 256. dpass drop|pass Configures the ACL Meter to either drop or pass out-of-profile traffic. 512. August 2009 . 128. mbsize <32-4096> Configures the maximum burst size. 64. in Kilobits per second. cur Displays the current TCP/UDP Filtering parameters. 4096 enable e|d Enables or disables metering on the ACL. Table 125 ACL Metering Menu Options (/cfg/ac/acl x/meter) Command Syntax and Usage cir <64-10000000> Configures the committed rate. Enter one of the following values for mbsize: 32. 2048.1 Command Reference Table 124 TCP/UDP Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/tcpudp) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage reset Resets the TCP/UDP parameters for the ACL to their default values. The committed rate must be a multiple of 64. 256 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. 1024. in Kilobits. /cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/meter ACL Metering Configuration Menu [Metering Menu] cir mbsize enable dpass reset cur Set committed rate in KiloBits/s Set maximum burst size in KiloBits Enable/disable port metering Set to Drop or Pass out of profile traffic Reset meter parameters Display current settings This menu defines the metering profile for the selected ACL.

BLADE OS 5. cur Displays current ACL Metering parameters.1 Command Reference Table 125 ACL Metering Menu Options (/cfg/ac/acl x/meter) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage reset Reset ACL Metering parameters to their default values. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 257 . BMD00114.

cur Displays current Re-mark parameters.1 Command Reference /cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/re-mark Re-Mark Configuration Menu [Re-mark Menu] inprof outprof up1p reset cur In Profile Menu Out Profile Menu Set Update User Priority Menu Reset re-mark settings Display current settings You can choose to re-mark IP header data for the selected ACL. 258 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. see page 259. To view menu options. reset Reset ACL Re-mark parameters to their default values. see page 259.BLADE OS 5. based on whether packets fall within the ACL Metering profile. outprof Displays the Re-mark Out-of-Profile Menu. Table 126 ACL Re-mark Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/re-mark) Command Syntax and Usage inprof Displays the Re-mark In-Profile Menu. August 2009 . up1p Displays the Update User Priority Menu. To view menu options. see page 259. or out of the ACL Metering profile. You can configure different re-mark values. To view menu options.

August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 259 .In Profile Menu] updscp . reset Resets the update DSCP parameters for Out-of-Profile packets to their default values.Display current settings Table 127 ACL Re-Mark In-Profile Menu (/cfg/acl/acl x/re-mark/inprof) Command Syntax and Usage updscp <0-63> Sets the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) of In-Profile packets to the selected value. The switch sets the DSCP value on Out-of-Profile packets. cur Displays current Re-Mark In-Profile parameters.Out Of Profile Menu] updscp . reset Resets the update DSCP parameters to their default values.reset update DSCP setting cur .Set the update DSCP reset . cur Displays current Re-Mark Out-of-Profile parameters.Display current settings Table 128 ACL Re-Mark Out-of-Profile Menu (/cfg/acl/acl x/re-mark/outprof) Command Syntax and Usage updscp <0-63> Sets the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) of Out-of-Profile packets to the selected value. /cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/re-mark/outprof Re-Mark Out-of-Profile Configuration Menu [Re-marking .BLADE OS 5.Reset update DSCP settings cur . BMD00114.Set the update DSCP reset .1 Command Reference /cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/re-mark/inprof Re-Mark In-Profile Configuration Menu [Re-marking .

1p value.Set the update user priority utosp .1 Command Reference /cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/re-mark/up1p Re-mark Update User Priority Configuration Menu [Update User Priority Menu] value .Display current settings Table 129 ACL Re-Mark User Priority Menu (/cfg/acl/acl x/re-mark/up1p) Command Syntax and Usage value <0-7> Defines the 802. August 2009 . utosp enable|disable Enable or disable mapping of TOS (Type of Service) priority to 802.1p priority.Enable/Disable use of TOS precedence reset . reset Resets UP1P settings to their default values.BLADE OS 5. The value is the priority bits information in the packet structure.Reset in profile up1p settings cur . When enabled.1p value. the TOS value is used to set the 802. cur Displays current Re-Mark In-Profile User Priority parameters. 260 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.

Display current parameters This menu allows you to define Packet Format matching criteria for an ACL.BLADE OS 5.Set to filter on ethernet tagging format ipfmt .Reset all fields cur . BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 261 . Table 130 ACL Packet Format Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/pktfmt) Command Syntax and Usage ethfmt eth2|SNAP|LLC Defines the Ethernet format for the ACL.1 Command Reference /cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/pktfmt Packet Format Filtering Configuration Menu [Filtering Packet Format Menu] ethfmt .Set to filter on IP format reset . tagfmt none|tagged Defines the tagging format for the ACL. reset Resets Packet Format parameters for the ACL to their default values. ipfmt none|v4|v6 Defines the IP format for the ACL. cur Displays the current Packet Format parameters for the ACL.Set to filter on ethernet format tagfmt .

BLADE OS 5. you can assign the ACL Group to one or more ports.Add ACL to group rem .1 Command Reference /cfg/acl/group <ACL Group number> ACL Group Configuration Menu [ACL Group 1 Menu] add . August 2009 . Once you create an ACL Group.Display current ACL items in ACL group This menu allows you to compile one or more ACLs into an ACL Group. rem acl <1-762> Removes the selected ACL from the ACL Group. Table 131 ACL Group Menu Options (/cfg/acl/group x) Command Syntax and Usage add acl <1-762> Adds the selected ACL to the ACL Group.Remove ACL from group cur . 262 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. cur Displays the current ACL group parameters.

Table 132 Port Mirroring Menu Options (/cfg/pmirr) Command Syntax and Usage mirror disable|enable Enables or disables port mirroring monport <port number> Displays port-mirroring menu. cur Displays current settings of the mirrored and monitoring ports. network packets being sent and/or received on a target port are duplicated and sent to a monitor port. enable. To view menu options. Note – Traffic on VLAN 4095 is not mirrored to the uplink ports.1 Command Reference /cfg/pmirr Port Mirroring [Port Mirroring mirror monport cur Menu] Enable/Disable Mirroring Monitoring Port based PM Menu Display All Mirrored and Monitoring Ports Port mirroring is disabled by default. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 263 . you can collect detailed information about your network performance and usage.BLADE OS 5. BMD00114. By attaching a network analyzer to the monitor port. For more information about port mirroring on the switch. see page 264. see “Appendix A: Troubleshooting” in the BLADE OS Application Guide. When enabled. The Port Mirroring Menu is used to configure. and disable the monitored port.

the frame is sent to the monitoring port.BLADE OS 5. or both)> Adds the port to be mirrored. delete Deletes this monitor port. This command also allows you to enter the direction of the traffic. out. 264 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. It is necessary to specify the direction because: If the source port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is ingress or both (ingress and egress). August 2009 . cur Displays the current settings of the monitoring port.1 Command Reference /cfg/pmirr/monport Port-Mirroring Configuration Menu [Port 1 Menu] add rem delete cur Add "Mirrored" port Rem "Mirrored" port Delete this "Monitor" port Display current Port-based Port Mirroring configuration Table 133 Port Mirroring Monitor Port Menu Options (/cfg/pmirr/monport) Command Syntax and Usage add <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <direction (in. rem <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> Removes the mirrored port. the frame is sent to the monitoring port. If the destination port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is egress or both.

lldp Displays the LLDP Menu. see page 288. stp <STG number (1-128)> Displays the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu. To view menu options. see page 267.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2 Layer 2 Configuration Menu [Layer 2 Menu] 8021x mrst stp fdb lldp trunk thash lacp failovr hotlink vlan pvstcomp bpdugrd upfast update cur 802. BMD00114. see page 293.1X Configuration Menu. To view menu options. To view menu options. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 265 . see page 279. mrst Displays the Rapid Spanning Tree/Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration Menu. To view menu options. see page 285. see page 273.1x Menu Multiple Spanning Tree/Rapid Spanning Tree Menu Spanning Tree Menu FDB Menu LLDP Menu Trunk Group Menu IP Trunk Hash Menu Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Failover Menu Hot Links Menu VLAN Menu Enable/disable PVST+ compatibility mode Enable/disable BPDU Guard Enable/disable Uplink Fast UplinkFast station update rate Display current layer 2 parameters Table 134 Layer 2 Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2) Command Syntax and Usage 8021x Displays the 802. To view menu options. fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Menu. trunk <trunk group number (1-12)> Displays the Trunk Group Configuration Menu. To view menu options.BLADE OS 5.

August 2009 . upfast enable|disable Enables or disables Fast Uplink Convergence. hotlink Displays the Hot Links Configuration menu. To view menu options. which provides rapid Spanning Tree convergence to an upstream switch during failover. see page 308. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 304. To view menu options. 266 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. see page 296.BLADE OS 5. this feature increases bridge priorities to 65535 for all STGs and path cost by 3000 for all external STP ports. lacp Displays the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu. to avoid spanning-tree loops on ports with Port Fast Forwarding enabled (/cfg/port x/fastfwd ena).1 Command Reference Table 134 Layer 2 Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage thash Displays the IP Trunk Hash Menu. failovr Displays the Failover Configuration Menu. The default setting is enabled. see page 294. To view menu options. cur Displays current Layer 2 parameters. see page 298. update <10-200> Configures the station update rate. Note: When enabled. bpdugrd enable|disable Enables or disables BPDU guard. pvstcomp enable|disable Enables or disables VLAN tagging of spanning tree BPDUs. The default value is 40. vlan <VLAN number (1-4095)> Displays the VLAN Configuration Menu.

to provide port-based network access control.1x configuration menu port . Table 135 802.1X parameters. see page 271. To view menu options.1X.1x access control cur .1X Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/8021x) Command Syntax and Usage global Displays the global 802.Show 802. cur Displays current 802.1X Configuration Menu [802.1x access control dis . see page 268.Enable 802.1X Port Menu.Disable 802.BLADE OS 5.Port 802.1x configuration This feature allows you to configure the switch as an IEEE 802.1X. ena Globally enables 802. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 267 .Global 802. port <port number> Displays the 802. To view menu options.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/8021x 802. BMD00114.1x Configuration Menu] global .1X Authenticator.1x configuration menu ena . dis Globally disables 802.1X Configuration Menu.

the authenticator waits for an EAP-Response/Identity frame from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting an EAP-Request/Identity frame. txperiod <1-65535> Sets the time.Set access control mode qtperiod . The default value is 60 seconds. To view menu options.1X Global Configuration Menu] gvlan . qtperiod <0-65535> Sets the time. in seconds.1X Guest VLAN Configuration Menu.1X Guest VLAN configuration menu mode . The default value is force-auth. in seconds.802.Set EAP-Request retransmission timeout svrtmout . The default value is 30 seconds. mode force-unauth|auto|force-auth Sets the type of access control for all ports: force-unauth: the port is unauthorized unconditionally.Set EAP-Request/Identity quiet time interval txperiod . the authenticator waits before transmitting an EAP-Request/ Identity frame to the supplicant (client) after an authentication failure in the previous round of authentication.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/8021x/global 802.Set reauthentication status to on or off default .Set EAP-Request/Identity retransmission timeout suptmout .Display current 802.1X Global Configuration Menu [802. allowing all traffic. auto: the port is unauthorized until it is successfully authorized by the RADIUS server.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 .1X menu allows you to configure parameters that affect all switch ports (except the management port).1X Global Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/8021x/global) Command Syntax and Usage gvlan Displays the 802. Table 136 802.Set reauthentication time interval reauth .1X configuration cur . see page 270.Set max number of EAP-Request retransmissions raperiod .Set server authentication request timeout maxreq .1X configuration The global 802.Restore default 802. 268 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. force-auth: the port is authorized unconditionally.

the authenticator waits for a response from the RADIUS server before declaring an authentication timeout. The default value is 30 seconds.1 Command Reference Table 136 802. The default value is 2. The default value is off.1X Global Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/8021x/global) Command Syntax and Usage suptmout <1-65535> Sets the time. the authenticator waits before re-authenticating a supplicant (client) when periodic re-authentication is enabled. reauth on|off Sets the re-authentication status to on or off. The time interval between transmissions of the RADIUS Access-Request packet containing the supplicant’s (client’s) EAP-Response packet is determined by the current setting of /cfg/sys/radius/timeout (default is 3 seconds).BLADE OS 5. The default value is 30 seconds. svrtmout <1-65535> Sets the time. in seconds.1X parameters. cur Displays current global 802. maxreq <1-10> Sets the maximum number of times the authenticator retransmits an EAP-Request packet to the supplicant (client). the authenticator waits for an EAP-Response packet from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting the EAP-Request packet to the authentication server. in seconds.1X parameters to their default values. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 269 . BMD00114. raperiod <1-604800> Sets the time. in seconds. default Resets the global 802. The default value is 3600 seconds.

1X Guest VLAN parameters.1X Guest VLAN Configuration Menu [802.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/8021x/global/gvlan 802.1X Guest VLAN menu allows you to configure a Guest VLAN for unauthenticated ports. August 2009 .1X Guest VLAN. cur Displays current 802. Table 137 802.Enable 8021.BLADE OS 5.x Guest VLAN .x Guest VLAN number . dis Disables the 802. 270 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. The Guest VLAN provides limited access to switch functions.xGuest VLAN .Disable 8021.Display current Guest VLAN configuration The 802. ena Enables the 802.1X Guest VLAN Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/8021x/global/gvlan) Command Syntax and Usage vlan <VLAN number> Configures the Guest VLAN number.1X Guest vlan ena dis cur VLAN Configuration Menu] .Set 8021.1X Guest VLAN.

The default value is force-auth.1X configuration .1X Port Configuration Menu [802. txperiod <1-65535> Sets the time.Set EAP-Request retransmission timeout . The default value is 30 seconds.Display current 802.BLADE OS 5.Set server authentication request timeout .1X configuration to this port .the port is authorized unconditionally.1X Port mode qtperiod txperiod suptmout svrtmout maxreq raperiod reauth default global cur Configuration Menu] . Table 138 802.1X Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/8021x/port) Command Syntax and Usage mode force-unauth|auto|force-auth Sets the type of access control for the port: force-unauth .the port is unauthorized until it is successfully authorized by the RADIUS server.Set reauthentication status to on or off .1X configuration The 802.Set EAP-Request/Identity quiet time interval . in seconds. in seconds. The default value is 30 seconds. the authenticator waits before transmitting an EAP-Request/ Identity frame to the supplicant (client) after an authentication failure in the previous round of authentication. allowing all traffic.the port is unauthorized unconditionally.1X parameters. qtperiod <0-65535> Sets the time.Set access control mode . auto . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 271 . in seconds.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/8021x/port <port number> 802. force-auth .Apply current global 802. The default value is 60 seconds.Set max number of EAP-Request retransmissions .Set EAP-Request/Identity retransmission timeout .1X port menu allows you to configure parameters that affect the selected port in the switch. BMD00114. suptmout <1-65535> Sets the time.Restore default 802. These settings override the global 802. the authenticator waits for an EAP-Response/Identity frame from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting an EAP-Request/Identity frame.Set reauthentication time interval . the authenticator waits for an EAP-Response packet from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting the EAP-Request packet to the authentication server.

global Applies current global 802. the authenticator waits before re-authenticating a supplicant (client) when periodic re-authentication is enabled. maxreq <1-10> Sets the maximum number of times the authenticator retransmits an EAP-Request packet to the supplicant (client). the authenticator waits for a response from the RADIUS server before declaring an authentication timeout.1X Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/8021x/port) Command Syntax and Usage svrtmout <1-65535> Sets the time. The default value is 30 seconds. cur Displays current 802. The default value is off. August 2009 . in seconds. default Resets the 802.BLADE OS 5. in seconds.1X port parameters to their default values.1 Command Reference Table 138 802.1X configuration parameters to the port. The time interval between transmissions of the RADIUS Access-Request packet containing the supplicant’s (client’s) EAP-Response packet is determined by the current setting of /cfg/sys/radius/timeout (default is 3 seconds). 272 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.1X port parameters. reauth on|off Sets the re-authentication status to on or off. raperiod <1-604800> Sets the time. The default value is 2. The default value is 3600 seconds.

rev <0-65535> Configures a version number for the MSTP region.Display current MST parameters BLADE OS supports the IEEE 802.Globally turn Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP/RSTP/PVRST) OFF cur . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 273 .BLADE OS 5.Set MST region name rev . The version is used as a numerical identifier for the region. Note – When Multiple Spanning Tree is turned on. maxhop <4-60> Configures the maximum number of bridge hops a packet may traverse before it is dropped. name <1-32 characters> Configures a name for the MSTP region. MSTP allows you to map many VLANs to a small number of Spanning Tree Groups (STGs). VLAN 4095 is moved back to STG 128. IEEE 802.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/mrst RSTP/MSTP Configuration Menu [Multiple Spanning Tree Menu] cist . Table 139 MSTP/RSTP/PVRST Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst) Command Syntax and Usage cist Displays the Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) Menu.Globally turn Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP/RSTP/PVRST) ON off . MRST is turned off by default.Set Maximum Hop Count for MST (4 . The default is 20.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP). To view menu options.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).Set revision level of this MST region maxhop .60) mode .Spanning Tree Mode on . All devices within a MSTP region must have the same region name. each with its own topology.Common and Internal Spanning Tree menu name . When Multiple Spanning Tree is turned off. VLAN 4095 is moved from STG 128 to the Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST). BMD00114. see page 275. All devices within a MSTP region must have the same version number. and Per VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (PVRST). Up to 32 Spanning Tree Groups can be configured in mstp mode.

HP MSTP/RSTP (with mode set to either ‘mstp’ or ‘rstp’) is NOT interoperable with Cisco Rapid PVST+. off Globally turns RSTP/MSTP/PVRST OFF.1s MSTP supports rapid convergence. IEEE 802. PVST+ does not support rapid convergence in current versions.HP PVRST is interoperable with Cisco Rapid PVST+. so that multiple VLANs are handled by multiple Spanning-Tree instances. .e. The default mode is RSTP. including the default VLAN 1.1s standard-based MSTP implementation.HP MSTP/RSTP (with mode set to mstp) is interoperable with Cisco MST/RSTP.1w standard-based RSTP implementation runs on one STG (i. the configuration parameters for STG 1 apply to RSTP.1 Command Reference Table 139 MSTP/RSTP/PVRST Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst) Command Syntax and Usage mode rstp|mstp|pvrst Selects the Spanning Tree mode. then only a single RSTP instance (default for STG 1) is supported for all VLANs. on Globally turns RSTP/MSTP/PVRST ON. 274 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. as specified by IEEE 802.1w RSTP. as follows: Per VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree Plus (pvrst). Multiple Spanning Tree (mstp). then select mstp mode. IEEE 802. same as one Spanning-Tree instance) only. if rstp mode is selected. August 2009 . cur Displays the current RSTP/MSTP/PVRST configuration. Rapid Spanning Tree (rstp). As a result. using IEEE 802. . Note – The following configurations are unsupported or have limitations: . The following configurations are supported: . Note: When RSTP is turned on. If multiple Spanning-Tree instances are required.HP PVST+ (default Spanning Tree setting) is interoperable with Cisco Rapid PVST+ only in fallback mode: Cisco will fall back to legacy PVST+ when detecting PVST+ BPDUs by default. .BLADE OS 5.HP PVST+ (default Spanning Tree setting) is interoperable with Cisco PVST+.

port <port number> Displays the CIST Port Menu.CIST Bridge parameter menu port .1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/mrst/cist Common Internal Spanning Tree Configuration Menu [Common Internal Spanning Tree Menu] brg . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 275 .BLADE OS 5. It is equivalent to Spanning Tree Group 0. To view menu options. BMD00114. Table 140 CIST Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst/cist) Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays the CIST Bridge Menu. add <VLAN numbers> Adds selected VLANs to the CIST.Add VLAN(s) to CIST default . The CIST provides compatibility with different MSTP regions and with devices running different Spanning Tree instances.Default Common Internal Spanning Tree and Member parameters cur .CIST Port parameter menu add . cur Displays the current CIST configuration. see page 277. To view menu options. see page 276.Display current CIST parameters Table 140 describes the commands used to configure Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) parameters. default Resets all CIST parameters to their default values.

To make this switch the root bridge. 4096. configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches and bridges on your network. The lower the value. in steps of 4096 (0. the higher the bridge priority. The maximum age parameter specifies the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigures the MSTP network. cur Displays the current CIST bridge configuration..). The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the MSTP root bridge. 8192.Set CIST bridge fwd .Display current Priority (0-65535) Max Age (6-40 secs) Forward Delay (4-30 secs) CIST bridge parameters CIST bridge parameters are used only when the switch is in MSTP mode. The range is 6 to 40 seconds. August 2009 . The range is 4 to 30 seconds. The range is 0 to 65535. The default value is 61440.Set CIST bridge mxage . mxage <6-40 seconds> Configures the CIST bridge maximum age.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/mrst/cist/brg CIST Bridge Configuration Menu [CIST Bridge Menu] prior . 276 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.. and the default is 15 seconds. The forward delay parameter specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the listening state to the learning state and from the learning state to the forwarding state. CIST parameters do not affect operation of STP/PVST+.BLADE OS 5.Set CIST bridge cur . fwd <4-30 seconds> Configures the CIST bridge forward delay parameter. Table 141 CIST Bridge Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst/cist/brg) Command Syntax and Usage prior <0-65535> Configures the CIST bridge priority. and the default is 20 seconds.

16. the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. RSTP. CIST parameters do not affect operation of STP/PVST+. and the default is 128. and the default is 2 seconds.). or PVRST. in steps of 16 (0. 32. and is calculated as follows: 100Mbps = 200000 1Gbps = 20000 10Gbps = 2000 The default value of 0 (zero) indicates that the default path cost will be computed for an auto negotiated link speed. BMD00114. The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. default: auto) (for MSTP only) Enable/disable edge port (for MSTP only) Turn port's Spanning Tree ON Turn port's Spanning Tree OFF Display current port Spanning Tree parameters CIST port parameters are used to modify MRST operation on an individual port basis.The Hello time specifies how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). p2p.. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 277 .1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/mrst/cist/port <port number> CIST Port Configuration Menu [CIST Port prior cost hello link edge on off cur 1 Menu] Set port Priority (0-240) Set port Path Cost (1-200000000. or shared. The range is 1 to 10 seconds. The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment.BLADE OS 5. Port path cost is based on the port speed.. The range is 0 to 240. hello <1-10 seconds> Configures the CIST port Hello time. For each port. RSTP/MSTP is turned on by default. Table 142 CIST Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst/cist/port) Command Syntax and Usage prior <0-240> Configures the CIST port priority. 0 for auto) Set CIST port Hello Time (1-10 secs) Set MSTP link type (auto. cost <0-200000000> Configures the CIST port path cost. Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge Hello value.

cur Displays the current CIST port configuration. and can begin forwarding traffic as soon as the link is up. Note: After you configure the port as an edge port. An edge port is not connected to a bridge. shared: Configures the port to connect to a shared medium (usually a hub). edge disable|enable Enables or disables this port as an edge port. The default link type is auto. as follows: auto: Configures the port to detect the link type. Configure server ports as edge ports (enabled). p2p: Configures the port for Point-To-Point protocol. you must disable the port (/oper/port x/dis) and then re-enable the port (/oper/port x/ena) for the change to take effect. August 2009 . 278 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. off Disables MRST on the port. The default setting is disabled. on Enables MRST on the port.1 Command Reference Table 142 CIST Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst/cist/port) Command Syntax and Usage link [auto|p2p|shared] Defines the type of link connected to the port. and automatically match its settings.BLADE OS 5.

BLADE OS 5.Add VLAN(s) to Spanning Tree Group remove .Globally turn Spanning Tree OFF default . see page 281. STG is turned on by default.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/stp <STP group index> Spanning Tree Configuration Menu [Spanning Tree Group 1 Menu] brg . see page 283. To view menu options.1D Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). on Globally enables Spanning Tree Protocol. remove <VLAN number> Breaks the association between a VLAN and a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter.Globally turn Spanning Tree ON off . Note – When RSTP is turned on. port <port number> Displays the Spanning Tree Port Menu.Bridge parameter menu port .Default Spanning Tree and Member parameters cur .Port parameter menu add . STP is used to prevent loops in the network topology. Table 143 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/stg) Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays the Bridge Spanning Tree Menu. To view menu options.Display current bridge parameters BLADE OS supports the IEEE 802. clear Removes all VLANs from a spanning tree. only STG 1 can be configured.Remove all VLANs from Spanning Tree Group on . Up to 128 Spanning Tree Groups can be configured on the switch (STG 128 is reserved for management). add <VLAN number> Associates a VLAN with a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 279 .Remove VLAN(s) from Spanning Tree Group clear . BMD00114.

August 2009 . 280 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference Table 143 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/stg) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage off Globally disables Spanning Tree Protocol. default Restores a spanning tree instance to its default configuration. cur Displays current Spanning Tree Protocol parameters.

Set bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs. and the default is 61440. 4096.). configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches and bridges on your network. This command does not apply to MSTP (see CIST on page 275). BMD00114. the higher the bridge priority. This command does not apply to MSTP (see CIST on page 275). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. hello <new bridge hello time (1-10 secs)> Configures the bridge hello time. STG bridge parameters include: Bridge priority Bridge hello time Bridge maximum age Forwarding delay Table 144 Spanning Tree Bridge Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stg/brg) Command Syntax and Usage prior <new bridge priority (0-65535)> Configures the bridge priority. in steps of 4096 (0. The lower the value.. The range is 6 to 40 seconds.Display current bridge parameters Spanning Tree bridge parameters affect the global STG operation of the switch.Set bridge Max Age (6-40 secs) fwd . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 281 . The range is 1 to 10 seconds. The maximum age parameter specifies the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it re configures the STG network. and the default is 2 seconds..The hello time specifies how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU).Set bridge Hello Time [1-10 secs] mxage . RSTP/MSTP: The range is 0 to 61440. 0 to disable) cur .Set bridge Priority [0-65535] hello .1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/stp <STP group number>/brg Spanning Tree Bridge Configuration Menu [Bridge Spanning Tree Menu] prior . To make this switch the root bridge. The default value is 65534.BLADE OS 5. and the default is 20 seconds. The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the STG root bridge. mxage <new bridge max age (6-40 secs)> Configures the bridge maximum age.Set bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs) aging . 8192.

BLADE OS 5. the following formulas must be used: 2*(fwd-1) > mxage 2*(hello+1) < mxage 282 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. This command does not apply to MSTP (see CIST on page 275). The forward delay parameter specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the listening state to the learning state and from the learning state to the forwarding state. The range is 4 to 30 seconds.1 Command Reference Table 144 Spanning Tree Bridge Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stg/brg) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage fwd <new bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs)> Configures the bridge forward delay parameter. August 2009 . When configuring STG bridge parameters. and the default is 15 seconds. cur Displays the current bridge STG parameters.

and turned on for uplink ports. Table 145 Spanning Tree Port Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stg/port) Command Syntax and Usage prior <port priority (0-255)> Configures the port priority. and is calculated as follows: 100Mbps = 19 1Gbps = 4 10Gbps = 2 The default value of 0 (zero) indicates that the default path cost will be computed for an auto negotiated link speed. By default for RSTP/MSTP.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/stp <STP Group Index>/port <port number> Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu [Spanning Tree Port 1 Menu] prior .. with downlink ports configured as edge ports.Display current port Spanning Tree parameters By default for STP/PVST+.Turn port's Spanning Tree ON off .. Port path cost is based on the port speed. p2p. in steps of 16 (0. 0 for default)> Configures the port path cost. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 283 . The default value is 128.Set port link type (auto.BLADE OS 5. Spanning Tree is turned off for downlink ports and management ports.Set port Path Cost (1-65535 (802. RSTP/MSTP: The range is 0 to 240.Enable/disable edge port on .Turn port's Spanning Tree OFF cur .1D) / 1-200000000 (MSTP/RSTP) /0 for auto) link . In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. 16.Set port Priority (0-255) cost . 32. or shared. The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. cost <1-65535.) and the default is 128. STG port parameters include: Port priority Port path cost The port option of STG is turned on by default. and turned on for cross-connect ports and uplink ports. Spanning Tree is turned off for downlink ports and management ports. BMD00114. default: auto) edge .

1 Command Reference Table 145 Spanning Tree Port Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stg/port) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage link [auto|p2p|shared] Defines the type of link connected to the port. as follows: auto: Configures the port to detect the link type. August 2009 . 284 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. edge disable|enable Enables or disables this port as an edge port. on Enables STG on the port. An edge port is not connected to a bridge. and can begin forwarding traffic as soon as the link is up. The default link type is auto.BLADE OS 5. off Disables STG on the port. Configure server ports as edge ports (enabled). cur Displays the current STG port parameters. p2p: Configures the port for Point-To-Point protocol. and automatically match its settings. shared: Configures the port to connect to a shared medium (usually a hub).

The default value is 300. see page 287. see page 286. in seconds. static Displays the static FDB menu. cur Displays the current FDB parameters.BLADE OS 5. Table 146 FDB Menu Options (/cfg/l2/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage mcast Displays the static Multicast menu. aging <0-65535> Configures the aging value for FDB entries. To view menu options.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/fdb Forwarding Database Configuration Menu [FDB Menu] mcast static aging cur Static Multicast Menu Static FDB Menu Configure FDB aging value Display current FDB configuration Use the following commands to configure the Forwarding Database (FDB). BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 285 . To view menu options.

Display current Multicast Address configuration The following options are available to control the forwarding of known and unknown multicast packets: All multicast packets are flooded to the entire VLAN. Known multicast packets are forwarded only to those ports specified.BLADE OS 5. Enable Flood Blocking on ports that are not to receive multicast packets (/cfg/port x/floodblk ena). Unknown multicast packets are flooded to the entire VLAN. August 2009 . This is the default switch behavior. Table 147 Static Multicast MAC Menu Options (/cfg/l2/fdb/mcast) Command Syntax and Usage add <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port number Adds a static multicast entry. To configure this option: Define the Multicast MAC address for the VLAN and specify ports that are to receive multicast packets (/cfg/l2/fdb/mcast/add). or enter a range of ports separated by a hyphen ( .Clear all Multicast Address entries cur . To configure this option.).Add a Multicast Address entry del . 286 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. For example: add 01:00:00:23:3f:01 200 int1-int4 del <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port number> Deletes a static multicast entry. Known multicast packets are forwarded only to those ports specified.Delete a Multicast Address entry clear . Use the following commands to configure static Multicast MAC entries in the Forwarding Database (FDB). define the Multicast MAC address for the VLAN and specify ports that are to receive multicast packets (/cfg/l2/fdb/mcast/add). You can list ports separated by a space.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/fdb/mcast Static Multicast MAC Configuration Menu [Static Multicast Menu] add . Unknown multicast packets are dropped.

08:00:20:12:34:56 You can also enter the MAC address as follows: xxxxxxxxxxxx For example.Add a permanent FDB entry del .Delete a static FDB entry clear . Table 148 Static FDB Menu Options (/cfg/l2/fdb/static) Command Syntax and Usage add <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port number> Adds a permanent FDB entry.BLADE OS 5. /cfg/l2/fdb/static Static FDB Configuration Menu [Static FDB Menu] add .1 Command Reference Table 147 Static Multicast MAC Menu Options (/cfg/l2/fdb/mcast) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage clear mac <MAC address>|vlan <VLAN number>|port <port number>|all Clears static multicast entries. cur Display current static multicast entries. 080020123456 del <MAC address> <VLAN number> Deletes a permanent FDB entry. BMD00114. clear <MAC address>|all {mac|vlan|port} Clears static FDB entries. Enter the MAC address using the following format: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx For example. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 287 .Display current static FDB configuration Use the following commands to configure static entries in the Forwarding Database (FBD).Clear static FDB entries cur . cur Display current static FDB configuration.

1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/lldp LLDP Configuration Menu [LLDP configuration Menu] port . To view menu options.LLDP Port Menu msgtxint . The default value is 30.Set holdtime multiplier for LLDP advertisement notifint . in seconds.Set minimum interval for successive trap notification txdelay . The default value is 5.Set delay interval between LLDP advertisements redelay .BLADE OS 5. The default value is 2.Show current LLDP parameters Use the following commands to configure Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP). August 2009 .Globally turn LLDP Off cur . see page 290.Globally turn LLDP On off .Set transmission interval for LLDPDU msgtxhld . The transmit delay timer represents the minimum time permitted between successive LLDP transmissions on a port. The hold time is configured as a multiple of the message transmission interval. The default value is 2. in seconds. redelay <1-10> Configures the re-initialization delay interval.Set reinitialization delay interval on . in seconds. 288 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. txdelay <1-8192> Configures the transmission delay interval. Table 149 LLDP Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lldp) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the LLDP Port Configuration menu. msgtxint <5-32768> Configures the message transmission interval. The default value is 4. notifint <1-3600> Configures the trap notification interval. msgtxhld <2-10> Configures the message hold time multiplier. The re-initialization delay allows the port LLDP information to stabilize before transmitting LLDP messages.

BMD00114. off Globally turns LLDP off. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 289 . cur Display current LLDP configuration.BLADE OS 5. The default setting is on.1 Command Reference Table 149 LLDP Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lldp) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage on Globally turns LLDP on.

To view menu options. 290 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. Table 150 LLDP Port Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lldp/port) Command Syntax and Usage admstat disabled|tx_only|rx_only|tx_rx Configures the LLDP transmission type for the port. cur Display current LLDP configuration.Show current LLDP port parameters Use the following commands to configure LLDP port options.Set LLDP admin-status of this port snmptrap .1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/lldp/port <port number> LLDP Port Configuration Menu [LLDP Port 2 Menu] admstat .Enable/disable SNMP trap notification of this port tlv . snmptrap e|d Enables or disables SNMP trap notification for LLDP messages. see page 291. tlv Displays the Optional TLV menu for the selected port.BLADE OS 5. as follows: Transmit only Receive only Transmit and receive Disabled The default value is tx_rx. August 2009 .Optional TLVs Menu cur .

Enable/disable Management Address TLV for this port portvid . sysname d|e Enables or disables the System Name information type. sysdescr d|e Enables or disables the System Description information type. portvid d|e Enables or disables the Port VLAN ID information type.Enable/disable Port Description TLV for this port sysname .Enable/disable VLAN Name TLV for this port protid .Enable/disable Link Aggregation TLV for this port framesz .Display current Optional TLVs configuration Use the following commands to configure LLDP port TLV (Type.Enable/disable MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV for this port powermdi .BLADE OS 5.Enable/disable Port VLAN ID TLV for this port portprot .Enable/disable System Capabilities TLV for this port mgmtaddr .Enable/disable System Description TLV for this port syscap .Enable/disable Power Via MDI TLV for this port linkaggr . BMD00114.Enable/disable Port and Protocol VLAN ID TLV for this port vlanname . Length. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 291 .Enable/disable Maximum Frame Size TLV for this port all .Enable/disable Protocol Identity TLV for this port macphy .Enable/disable all the Optional TLVs for this port cur . Value) options for the selected port.Enable/disable System Name TLV for this port sysdescr . Table 151 Optional TLV Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lldp/port x/tlv) Command Syntax and Usage portdesc d|e Enables or disables the Port Description information type.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/lldp/port <port number>/tlv LLDP Optional TLV Configuration Menu [Optional TLVs Menu] portdesc . syscap d|e Enables or disables the System Capabilities information type. mgmtaddr d|e Enables or disables the Management Address information type.

292 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. cur Display current Optional TLV configuration. vlanname d|e Enables or disables the VLAN Name information type. powermdi d|e Enables or disables the Power via MDI information type.1 Command Reference Table 151 Optional TLV Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lldp/port x/tlv) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage portprot d|e Enables or disables the Port and VLAN Protocol ID information type. macphy d|e Enables or disables the MAC/Phy Configuration information type. linkaggr d|e Enables or disables the Link Aggregation information type. framesz d|e Enables or disables the Maximum Frame Size information type.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 . all d|e Enables or disables all optional TLV information types. protid d|e Enables or disables the Protocol ID information type.

August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 293 . duplex. combining their bandwidth to create a single.Display current Trunk Group configuration Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth connections between switches or other trunk capable devices.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/trunk <trunk group number> Trunk Configuration Menu [Trunk group 1 Menu] add . Up to 12 trunk groups can be configured on the switch. Configure all ports in a trunk group with the same properties (speed. with the following restrictions: Any physical switch port can belong to no more than one trunk group. Table 152 Trunk Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/trunk) Command Syntax and Usage add <port number> Adds a physical port to the current trunk group. By default. By default. Up to 8 ports can belong to the same trunk group. ena Enables the current trunk group.Delete trunk group cur . each trunk group is empty and disabled.Disable trunk group del . flow control. The default status of cross connect ports is disabled. STG.BLADE OS 5. Trunking from non-BLADE devices must comply with Cisco® EtherChannel® technology. A trunk is a group of ports that act together.Add port to trunk group rem . dis Disables the current trunk group. and so on).Remove port from trunk group ena . port 17 and 18 are trunked to support an internal cross-connect trunk.Enable trunk group dis . rem <port number> Removes a physical port from the current trunk group. VLAN. larger port. BMD00114.

Table 153 IP Trunk Hash Menu Options (/cfg/l2/thash) Command Syntax and Usage set Displays the Trunk Hash Settings menu. The trunk hash settings affect both static trunks and LACP trunks. 294 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. cur Display current trunk hash configuration. /cfg/l2/thash IP Trunk Hash Configuration Menu [IP Trunk Hash Menu] set .BLADE OS 5. see page 295. cur Displays current trunk group parameters.IP Trunk Hash Settings Menu cur . To view menu options.Display current IP trunk hash configuration Use the following commands to configure IP trunk hash settings for the switch. August 2009 .1 Command Reference Table 152 Trunk Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/trunk) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage del Removes the current trunk group configuration.

Enable/disable dip hash . BMD00114. You can enable one or two parameters. dip enable|disable Enable or disable trunk hashing on the destination IP.Enable/disable dmac hash .Display current trunk hash setting Trunk hash parameters are set globally for the switch. sip enable|disable Enable or disable trunk hashing on the source IP. cur Display current layer 2 trunk hash setting. to configure any of the following valid combinations: SMAC (source MAC only) DMAC (destination MAC only) SIP (source IP only) DIP (destination IP only) SIP + DIP (source IP and destination IP) SMAC + DMAC (source MAC and destination MAC) Use the following commands to configure IP trunk hash parameters for the switch.BLADE OS 5. dmac enable|disable Enable or disable trunk hashing on the destination MAC. Table 154 IP Trunk Hash Menu Options (/cfg/l2/thash/set) Command Syntax and Usage smac enable|disable Enable or disable trunk hashing on the source MAC.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/thash/set IP Trunk Hash Menu [set IP Trunk smac dmac sip dip cur Hash Settings Menu] .Enable/disable sip hash .Enable/disable smac hash . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 295 .

LACP Port Menu . default sysprio|timeout Restores the selected parameters to their default values. To view menu options. If your switch’s CPU utilization rate remains at 100% for periods of 90 seconds or more. consider using static trunks instead of LACP. Note: It is recommended that you use a timeout value of long. August 2009 . Lower numbers provide higher priority.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/lacp LACP Configuration Menu [LACP Menu] port sysprio timeout delete default cur . to reduce LACPDU processing. sysprio <1-65535> Defines the priority value (1 through 65535) for the switch. The default value is long. Choose short (3 seconds) or long (90 seconds).Restore default LACP system configuration . cur Display current LACP configuration.Set LACP system timeout scale for timing out partner info . The default value is 32768. 296 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. see page 297.Delete an LACP trunk .Set LACP system priority .BLADE OS 5. timeout short|long Defines the timeout period before invalidating LACP data from a remote partner. delete <1-65535> Deletes a selected LACP trunk. Table 155 LACP Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the LACP Port menu. based on its admin key.Display current LACP configuration Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for the switch.

but respond to LACPDUs from active ports.Restore default LACP port configuration cur . active: Turn LACP on and set this port to active.Display current LACP port configuration Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for the selected port. The default value is off. as follows: off: Turn LACP off for this port. Passive ports do not initiate LACPDUs. Table 156 LACP Port Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp/port) Command Syntax and Usage mode off|active|passive Set the LACP mode for this port. cur Displays the current LACP configuration for this port.Set LACP mode prio . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 297 . default adminkey|mode|prio Restores the selected parameters to their default values. Only ports with the same admin key and oper key (operational state generated internally) can form a LACP trunk group. adminkey <1-65535> Set the admin key for this port. prio <1-65535> Sets the priority value for the selected port. BMD00114. The default value is 32768.Set LACP port admin key default . Lower numbers provide higher priority.BLADE OS 5. passive: Turn LACP on and set this port to passive.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/lacp/port <port number> LACP Port Configuration Menu [LACP Port 1 Menu] mode .Set LACP port priority adminkey . You can use this port to manually configure a static trunk. Active ports initiate LACPDUs.

BLADE OS 5. 298 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. off Globally turns Layer 2 Failover off. When the VLAN Monitor is on. The default value is off. the switch automatically disables only downlink ports that belong to the same VLAN as ports in the failover trigger. on Globally turns Layer 2 Failover on. For more information about Layer 2 Failover. To view menu options. Table 157 Layer 2 Failover Menu Options (/cfg/l2/failovr) Command Syntax and Usage trigger <1-8> Displays the Failover Trigger menu. see “High Availability” in the BLADE OS Application Guide. vlan on|off Globally turns VLAN monitor on or off. see page 299. August 2009 . cur Displays current Layer 2 Failover parameters.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/failovr Layer 2 Failover Configuration Menu [Failover Menu] trigger vlan on off cur Trigger Menu Globally turn VLAN Monitor ON/OFF Globally turn Failover ON Globally turn Failover OFF Display current Failover configuration Use this menu to configure Layer 2 Failover.

If you enter a value of zero (0). To view menu options.Limit of Trigger ena . BMD00114.Display current Trigger configuration Table 158 Failover Trigger Menu Options (/cfg/l2/failovr/trigger) Command Syntax and Usage amon Displays the Auto Monitor menu for the selected trigger. mmon Displays the Manual Monitor menu for the selected trigger. ena Enables the selected trigger. del Deletes the selected trigger.Disable Trigger del . see page 300. limit <0-1024> Configures the minimum number of operational links allowed within each trigger before the trigger initiates a failover event.Auto Monitor Menu mmon . see page 301.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/failovr/trigger Failover Trigger Configuration Menu [Trigger 1 Menu] amon .Manual Monitor Menu limit .Delete Trigger cur . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 299 .Enable Trigger dis . dis Disables the selected trigger. To view menu options. the switch triggers a failover event only when no links in the trigger are operational.BLADE OS 5. cur Displays the current failover trigger settings.

Add trunk to Auto Monitor .1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/failovr/trigger/amon Auto Monitor Configuration Menu [Auto Monitor addtrnk remtrnk addkey remkey cur Menu] . remtrnk <trunk number> Removes a trunk group from the Auto Monitor.Remove trunk from Auto Monitor .Add LACP port adminkey to Auto Monitor .Display current Auto Monitor configuration Table 159 Auto Monitor Menu Options (/cfg/l2/failovr/trigger/amon) Command Syntax and Usage addtrnk <trunk number)> Adds a trunk group to the Auto Monitor. cur Displays the current Auto Monitor settings. LACP trunks formed with this admin key will be included in the Auto Monitor.Remove LACP port adminkey from Auto Monitor . addkey <1-65535> Adds a LACP admin key to the Auto Monitor.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 . remkey <1-65535> Removes a LACP admin key from the Auto Monitor. 300 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.

1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/failovr/trigger/mmon Manual Monitor Configuration Menu [Manual Monitor monitor control cur Menu] Monitor Menu Control Menu Display current Manual Monitor configuration Use this menu to configure Failover Manual Monitor. control Displays the Manual Monitor . BMD00114. These menus allow you to manually define both the monitor and control ports that participate in failover teaming.BLADE OS 5.Monitor menu for the selected trigger.Control menu for the selected trigger. cur Displays the current Manual Monitor settings. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 301 . Note – AMON and MMON configurations are mutually exclusive. Table 6-1 Failover Manual Monitor options (/cfg/l2/failovr/trigger/mmon) Command Syntax and Usage monitor Displays the Manual Monitor .

Monitor.BLADE OS 5.Monitor options (/cfg/l2/failovr/trigger/mmon/monitor) Command Syntax and Usage addport <port number> Adds the selected port to the Manual Monitor .Monitor. August 2009 .Monitor. The Manual Monitor . remkey <1-65535> Removes a LACP admin key from the Manual Monitor .Monitor.Monitor configuration.Monitor. cur Displays the current Manual Monitor . remport <port number> Removes the selected port from the Manual Monitor . addkey <1-65535> Adds a LACP admin key to the Manual Monitor .1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/failovr/trigger/mmon/monitor Manual Monitor Port Configuration Menu [Monitor Menu] addport remport addtrnk remtrnk addkey remkey cur - Add port to Monitor Remove port from Monitor Add trunk to Monitor Remove trunk from Monitor Add LACP port adminkey to Monitor Remove LACP port adminkey from Monitor Display current Monitor configuration Use this menu to define the port link(s) to monitor.Monitor.Monitor. LACP trunks formed with this admin key will be included in the Manual Monitor . Table 160 Failover Manual Monitor . remtrnk <trunk group number> Removes a trunk group from the Manual Monitor .Monitor configuration accepts only external uplink ports. addtrnk <trunk group number)> Adds a trunk group to the Manual Monitor . 302 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.

Control configuration.Control.Control.Control.Control. remtrnk <trunk number> Removes a trunk group from the Manual Monitor . remport <port number> Removes the selected port from the Manual Monitor .Control.Control. cur Displays the current Manual Monitor .BLADE OS 5. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 303 . remkey <1-65535> Removes a LACP admin key from the Manual Monitor . addkey <1-65535> Adds a LACP admin key to the Manual Monitor . but not management ports. addtrnk <trunk number)> Adds a trunk group to the Manual Monitor .Control.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/failovr/trigger/mmon/control Manual Monitor Control Configuration Menu [Control Menu] addport remport addtrnk remtrnk addkey remkey cur - Add port to Control Remove port from Control Add trunk to Control Remove trunk from Control Add LACP port adminkey to Control Remove LACP port adminkey from Control Display current Control configuration Use this menu to define the port link(s) to control. Table 161 Failover Manual Monitor . LACP trunks formed with this admin key will be included in the Manual Monitor .Control options (/cfg/l2/failovr/trigger/mmon/control) Command Syntax and Usage addport <port number> Adds the selected port to the Manual Monitor . The Manual Monitor–Control configuration accepts downlink and uplink ports. BMD00114.

bpdu enable|disable Enables or disables the ability to flood BPDUs on the active Hot Links interface when the interface belongs to a Spanning Tree group that is globally turned off. see page 305.Enable/disable FDB update on . The default value is off. off Globally turns Hot Links off. which allows the switch to send FDB and MAC update packets over the active interface. To view menu options.Display current Hot Links configuration Table 162 describes the Hot Links menu options. sndfdb enable|disable Enables or disables FDB Update.Globally turn Hot Links OFF cur . 304 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.Globally turn Hot Links ON off . on Globally turns Hot Links on. Table 162 Hot Links Menu Options (/cfg/l2/hotlink) Command Syntax and Usage trigger <1-5> Displays the Hot Links Trigger menu. The default setting is disabled.Trigger Menu bpdu .Enable/disable BPDU flood sndfdb . cur Displays current Hot Links configuration.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 . The default setting is disabled.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/hotlink Hot Links Configuration Menu [Hot Links Menu] trigger .

Backup Menu fdelay .Delete Trigger cur . fdelay <0-3600> Configures the Forward Delay interval. The default setting is enabled. BMD00114.Disable Trigger del . The default value is 1. preempt e|d Enables or disables pre-emption. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 305 .Set Forward Delay (secs) name .Set Trigger Name preempt .Enable Trigger dis .Master Menu backup .Enable/disable Preemption ena . dis Disables the Hot Links trigger.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/hotlink/trigger <1-5> Hot Links Trigger Configuration Menu [Trigger 2 Menu] master . name <1-32 characters> Configures a name for the trigger. ena Enables the Hot Links trigger.Display current Trigger configuration Table 163 Hot Links Trigger Menu Options (/cfg/l2/hotlink/trigger) Command Syntax and Usage master Displays the Master interface menu for the selected trigger. backup Displays the Backup interface menu for the selected trigger.BLADE OS 5. which allows the Master interface to transition to the Active state whenever it becomes available. in seconds.

trunk <trunk number>|0 Adds the selected trunk group to the Master interface. /cfg/l2/hotlink/trigger <1-5>/master Hot Links Trigger Master Configuration Menu [Master Menu] port trunk adminkey cur Set port in Master Set trunk in Master Set adminkey in Master Display current Master configuration Table 164 Hot Links Trigger Master menu (/cfg/l2/hotlink/trigger/master) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Adds the selected port to the Master interface. Enter 0 (zero) to clear the trunk group.BLADE OS 5. adminkey <0-65535> Adds a LACP admin key to the Master interface. 306 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. Enter 0 (zero) to clear the port. Enter 0 (zero) to clear the admin key. August 2009 . cur Displays the current Hot Links Master interface configuration. cur Displays the current Hot Links Trigger configuration. LACP trunks formed with this admin key will be included in the Master interface.1 Command Reference Table 163 Hot Links Trigger Menu Options (/cfg/l2/hotlink/trigger) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the Hot Links trigger.

Enter 0 (zero) to clear the admin key. trunk <trunk number>|0 Adds the selected trunk to the Backup interface. adminkey <0-65535> Adds a LACP admin key to the Backup interface. Enter 0 (zero) to clear the trunk group.BLADE OS 5. cur Displays the current Hot Links Backup interface settings.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/hotlink/trigger <1-5>/backup Hot Links Trigger Backup Configuration Menu [Backup Menu] port trunk adminkey cur Set port in Backup Set trunk in Backup Set adminkey in Backup Display current Backup configuration Table 165 Hot Links Trigger Backup menu (/cfg/l2/hotlink/trigger/backup) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Adds the selected port to the Backup interface. LACP trunks formed with this admin key will be included in the Backup interface. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 307 . BMD00114. Enter 0 (zero) to clear the port.

stg <STG index> Assigns a VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group. the VLAN menu option is disabled except VLAN 1. name Assigns a name to the VLAN or changes the existing name. Table 166 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan) Command Syntax and Usage pvlan <1-8> Displays the Protocol-based VLAN menu. and delete VLANs. Up to 1000 VLANs can be configured on the switch. The default VLAN name is the first one. change the status of each VLAN.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/vlan <VLAN number> VLAN Configuration Menu [VLAN 1 Menu] pvlan privlan name stg add rem def ena dis del cur Protocol VLAN Menu Private-VLAN Menu Set VLAN name Assign VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group Add port to VLAN Remove port from VLAN Define VLAN as list of ports Enable VLAN Disable VLAN Delete VLAN Display current VLAN configuration The commands in this menu configure VLAN attributes. change the port membership of each VLAN. VLAN 4095 is reserved for switch management. see page 310.BLADE OS 5. see page 312. 308 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. To view menu options. rem <port number> Removes port(s) from this VLAN. Downlink ports and uplink ports are in VLAN 1 by default. add <port number> Adds port(s) to the VLAN membership. privlan Displays the Private VLAN menu. By default. August 2009 . which is enabled all the time. To view menu options.

downlink ports and uplink ports are in VLAN 1. BMD00114. cur Displays the current VLAN configuration. Note – All ports must belong to at least one VLAN. del Deletes this VLAN. Any port which is removed from a VLAN and which is not a member of any other VLAN is automatically added to default VLAN 1.BLADE OS 5. Every port must be a member of at least one VLAN. you cannot add a port to more than one VLAN unless the port has VLAN tagging turned on (see the tag command on page 238). August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 309 . You cannot remove a port from VLAN 1 if the port has no membership in any other VLAN. Also. ena Enables this VLAN. By default.1 Command Reference Table 166 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage def <list of port numbers> Defines which ports are members of this VLAN. dis Disables this VLAN without removing it from the configuration.

2: ipx802. Table 167 PVLAN Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan/pvlan) Command Syntax and Usage pty <(Ether2|SNAP|LLC)> <Ethernet type> Configures the frame type and the Ethernet type for the selected protocol.Set protocol type protocol .3 Novell IPX Novell IPX SNAP NetBIOS 802.Set priority to protocol add .Enable tagging a port list for PVLAN del .2: snaEther2: xnsEther2: Novell IPX 802.BLADE OS 5. protocol <protocol type> Selects a pre-defined protocol.2 SNA 802.Display current PVLAN configuration Use this menu to configure Protocol-based VLAN (PVLAN) for the selected VLAN.Select a predefined protocol prio . such as 0080 (IPv4).Disable protocol cur . Ethernet type consists of a 4-digit (16 bit) hex code.Delete protocol ena .1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/vlan/pvlan <protocol number> Protocol-Based VLAN Configuration Menu [VLAN 1 Protocol 1 Menu] pty . August 2009 .Enable/Disable port tagging for PVLAN taglist .3: ipxEther2: ipxSnap: netbios: sna802.2 Novell IPX 802.Enable protocol dis .Add/Remove a list of ports to/from PVLAN tagpvl .2 IBM SNA Service on Ethernet XNS Compatibility rarpEther2: Reverse ARP vinesEther2: Banyan VINES 310 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. as follows: decEther2: DEC Local Area Transport ipv4Ether2: Internet IP (IPv4) ipv6Ether2: IPv6 ipx802.Add port to PVLAN rem .Remove port from PVLAN ports .

ports <port number> Defines a list of ports that belong to the selected protocol on this VLAN. Enter 0 (zero) to remove all ports. BMD00114. Enter empty to disable tagging on all ports by this PVLAN. ena Enables the selected protocol on the VLAN. del Deletes the selected protocol configuration from the VLAN. dis Disables the selected protocol on the VLAN. rem <port number> Removes a port from the selected PVLAN.1 Command Reference Table 167 PVLAN Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan/pvlan) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage prio <0-7> Configures the priority value for this PVLAN. add <port number> Adds a port to the selected PVLAN. taglist {<port number>|empty} Defines a list of ports that will be tagged by the selected protocol on this VLAN. tagpvl <port number> [enable|disable] Enables or disables port tagging on this PVLAN. cur Displays current parameters for the selected PVLAN. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 311 .BLADE OS 5.

as follows: primary: A Private VLAN must have only one primary VLAN. map <2-4094>|none Configures Private VLAN mapping between a secondary VLAN (isolated or community) and a primary VLAN. Table 168 Private VLAN Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan/privlan) Command Syntax and Usage type primary|isolated|community Defines the VLAN type. cur Displays current parameters for the selected Private VLAN. A Private VLAN may have only one isolated VLAN.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/vlan/privlan Private VLAN Configuration Menu [privlan Menu] type map ena dis cur Set Private-VLAN type Associate secondary VLAN with a primary VLAN Enable Private-VLAN Disable Private-VLAN Display current Private-VLAN configuration Use this menu to configure a Private VLAN. The primary VLAN carries unidirectional traffic to ports on the isolated VLAN or to community VLAN. A Private VLAN may have multiple community VLANs. ena Enables the Private VLAN. Enter the primary VLAN ID. August 2009 . community: Community VLANs carry upstream traffic from host ports.BLADE OS 5. dis Disables the Private VLAN. 312 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. isolated: The isolated VLAN carries unidirectional traffic from host ports.

route Displays the IP Static Route Menu. see page 317. see page 320. To view menu options. arp Displays the Address Resolution Protocol Menu. To view menu options see page 321. gw <default gateway number (1-4> Displays the IP Default Gateway Menu. see page 316.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3 Layer 3 Configuration Menu [Layer 3 Menu] if gw route arp frwd nwf rmap rip ospf igmp dns bootp sm vrrp loopif rtrid cur Interface Menu Default Gateway Menu Static Route Menu ARP Menu Forwarding Menu Network Filters Menu Route Map Menu Routing Information Protocol Menu Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Menu IGMP Menu Domain Name System Menu Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu ServerMobility Menu Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu Loopback Interface Menu Set router ID Display current IP configuration Table 169 Layer 3 Configuration Menu (/cfg/l3) Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the IP Interface Menu. To view menu options. frwd Displays the IP Forwarding Menu. To view menu options. see page 318.BLADE OS 5. To view menu options. see page 315. BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 313 . nwf <network filter number (1-256)> Displays the Network Filter Configuration Menu. To view menu options.

17. rip Displays the Routing Interface Protocol Menu. To view menu options.1 Command Reference Table 169 Layer 3 Configuration Menu (/cfg/l3) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage rmap <route map number (1-32)> Displays the Route Map Menu. rtrid <IP address (such as. ospf Displays the OSPF Menu. To view menu options. see page 325. To view menu options. vrrp Displays the Virtual Router Redundancy Configuration Menu. see page 341. dns Displays the IP Domain Name System Menu. see page 351. igmp Displays the IGMP Menu. To view menu options. see page 350. August 2009 . To view menu options.BLADE OS 5. 192. see page 349. To view menu options. cur Displays the current IP configuration. loopif Displays the IP Loopback Interface Menu. see page 329. To view menu options. bootp Displays the Bootstrap Protocol Menu. sm Displays the ServerMobility Menu. see page 367. To view menu options. see page 363.4.101)> Sets the router ID. 314 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. To view menu options see page 322.

The Interface option is disabled by default.17. Each IP interface represents the switch on an IP subnet on your network.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/if <interface number> IP Interface Configuration Menu [IP Interface addr mask vlan relay ena dis del cur 1 Menu] Set IP address Set subnet mask Set VLAN number Enable/disable BOOTP relay Enable IP interface Disable IP interface Delete IP interface Display current interface configuration The switch can be configured with up to 256 IP interfaces.0)> Configures the IP subnet address mask for the interface using dotted decimal notation. Each interface can belong to only one VLAN. cur Displays the current interface settings. Each VLAN can contain multiple IPv4 interfaces. dis Disables this IP interface.255. relay disable|enable Enables or disables the BOOTP relay on this interface. using dotted decimal notation. ena Enables this IP interface.BLADE OS 5. Table 170 IP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/if) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IPv4 address (such as 192. It is enabled by default. vlan <VLAN number> Configures the VLAN number for this interface. BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315 .101)> Configures the IPv4 address of the switch interface.4. del Removes this IP interface.255. mask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.

Disable default gateway del .17.1 Command Reference Note – If you enter an IP address for interface 1. The range is from 1 to 120 attempts.4.Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN arp . ena Enables the gateway for use.Set IP address intr .44)> Configures the IP address of the default IP gateway using dotted decimal notation. The range is from 0 to 60 seconds.BLADE OS 5.Enable/disable ARP only health checks ena . The default value is disabled. Table 171 Default Gateway Menu Options (/cfg/l3/gw) Command Syntax and Usage addr <default gateway address (such as. arp disable|enable Enables or disables Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) health checks. The intr option sets the time between health checks.Display current default gateway configuration The switch can be configured with up to 4 IPv4 gateways.Set interval between ping attempts retry . dis Disables the gateway. The default is 8 attempts. August 2009 .Enable default gateway dis . This option is disabled by default. The default is 2 seconds. /cfg/l3/gw <gateway number> Default Gateway Configuration Menu [Default gateway 1 Menu] addr . intr <0-60 seconds> The switch pings the default gateway to verify that it’s up. retry <number of attempts (1-120)> Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this default gateway inoperative. The arp option does not apply to management gateways. you are prompted to change the BOOTP setting.Delete default gateway cur . 316 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. 192.

Display current static routes Up to 128 IPv4 static routes can be configured. BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. rem <destination> <mask> [<interface number>] Removes a static route. The destination address of the route to remove must be specified using dotted decimal notation. Enter all addresses using dotted decimal notation. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 317 .1 Command Reference Table 171 Default Gateway Menu Options (/cfg/l3/gw) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the gateway from the configuration. and gateway address. Table 172 IP Static Route Configuration Menu Options (cfg/l3/route) Command Syntax and Usage add <destination> <mask> <gateway> [<interface number>] Adds a static route. cur Displays the current IPv4 static routes. cur Displays the current gateway settings.Remove static route clear . /cfg/l3/route IPv4 Static Route Configuration Menu [IP Static Route Menu] add . You will be prompted to enter a destination IP address.Add static route rem . destination subnet mask. clear <destination IP address>|<gateway IP address>|all <value> Clears the selected IPv4 static routes.Clear static routes cur .

Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet. In any IP communication.Display current ARP configuration Table 173 ARP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp) Command Syntax and Usage static Displays Static ARP menu. the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the computer or the router is present in the ARP cache. ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory. August 2009 . ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address. 318 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. rearp <2-120 minutes> Defines re-ARP period in minutes. see page 319.Set re-ARP period in minutes . You can set this duration between two and 120 minutes.Static ARP Menu . ARP queries machines on the local network for their physical addresses. [ARP Menu] static rearp cur .1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/arp ARP Configuration Menu Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer. cur Displays the current ARP configurations. To view options.

192.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/arp/static ARP Static Configuration Menu Static ARP entries are permanent in the ARP cache and do not age out like the ARP entries that are learned dynamically.17.Delete an ARP entry clear .4. [Static ARP Menu] add . Static ARPs can also be configured on some gateways as a protection against malicious ARP Cache corruption and possible DOS attacks. Static ARP entries enable the switch to reach the hosts without sending an ARP broadcast request to the network.Display current static ARP configuration Table 174 ARP Static Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp/static) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port number> Adds a permanent ARP entry.101)> Deletes a permanent ARP entry. cur Displays current static ARP configuration. Static ARPs are also useful to communicate with devices that do not respond to ARP requests. BMD00114.Add a permanent ARP entry del .Clear static ARP entries cur . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 319 . del <IP address (such as. clear [<interface number>|<VLAN number>|<port number>|all] <ARP entry number> Clears static ARP entries.BLADE OS 5.

on Enables IP forwarding (routing) on the switch.Display current IP Forwarding configuration Table 175 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd) Command Syntax and Usage dirbr disable|enable Enables or disables forwarding directed broadcasts. August 2009 . cur Displays the current IP forwarding settings. Forwarding is turned on by default.Enable/disable No ICMP Redirects on . off Disables IP forwarding (routing) on the switch. The default setting is disabled.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/frwd IP Forwarding Configuration Menu [IP Forwarding Menu] dirbr .Globally turn IP Forwarding OFF cur .BLADE OS 5. 320 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.Globally turn IP Forwarding ON off . The default setting is disabled. noicmprd disable|enable Enables or disables ICMP re-directs.Enable or disable forwarding directed broadcasts noicmprd .

BMD00114.0 mask <IP network filter mask> Sets the network filter mask that is used with addr. The default address is 0.17.4.Display current Network Filter configuration Table 176 IP Network Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/nwf) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address.0.0. cur Displays the current the Network Filter configuration.Enable Network Filter disable . delete Deletes the Network Filter configuration.Disable Network Filter delete .Delete Network Filter cur . such as 192.44> Sets the IP address that will be accepted by the peer when the filter is enabled.0. a range of IP addresses is accepted. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 321 .1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/nwf <1-256> Network Filter Configuration Menu [IP Network Filter 1 Menu] addr .IP network filter mask enable .IP Address mask .0. The default value is 0.BLADE OS 5. disable Disables the Network Filter configuration. If used with the mask option.0 enable Enables the Network Filter configuration.

The smaller the value. The default is type 1. For more information.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number> Routing Map Configuration Menu Note – The map number (1-32) represents the routing map you wish to configure. [IP Route Map alist metric type prec enable disable delete cur 1 Menu] Access List number Set metric of the matched route Set OSPF metric-type of the matched route Set the precedence of this route map Enable route map Disable route map Delete route map Display current route map configuration Routing maps control and modify routing information. Default value is 10.BLADE OS 5. 322 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. Type 1—External routes are calculated using both internal and external metrics. Type 2—External routes are calculated using only the external metrics. disable Disables the route map. type <value (1|2)>|none Assigns the type of OSPF metric. metric <1-16777214>|none Sets the metric of the matched route. the higher the precedence. enable Enables the route map. prec <value (1-255)> Sets the precedence of the route map. none—Removes the OSPF metric. see page 324. Table 177 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) Command Syntax and Usage alist <number 1-8> Displays the Access List menu. August 2009 . Type 1 routes have more cost than Type 2.

cur Displays the current route configuration. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 323 .1 Command Reference Table 177 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage delete Deletes the route map. BMD00114.BLADE OS 5.

cur Displays the current Access List configuration. August 2009 . enable Enables the access list. action permit|deny Permits or denies action for the access list. metric <1-16777214>|none Sets the metric value in the AS-External (ASE) LSA.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number>/alist <access list number> IP Access List Configuration Menu Note – The route map number (1-32) and the access list number (1-8) represent the IP access list you wish to configure.BLADE OS 5. 324 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. delete Deletes the access list. [IP Access List nwf metric action enable disable delete cur 1 Menu] Network Filter number Metric Set Network Filter action Enable Access List Disable Access List Delete Access List Display current Access List configuration Table 178 IP Access List Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/alist) Command Syntax and Usage nwf <network filter number (1-256)> Sets the network filter number. disable Disables the access list. See “/cfg/l3/nwf <1-256>” on page 321 for details.

redist fixed|static|ospf|eospf Displays the RIP Route Redistribution menu. Table 179 RIP Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rip) Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number> Displays the RIP Interface menu.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 325 . For more information.Globally turn RIP ON off . on Globally turns RIP on. For more information. cur Displays the current RIP configuration.RIP Route Redistribute Menu on .Set update period in seconds redist . see page 326. in seconds. The default value is 30 seconds. BMD00114.RIP Interface Menu update . see page 328.Globally turn RIP OFF current . off Globally turns RIP off. update <1-120> Configures the time interval for sending for RIP table updates. Note – Do not configure RIP version 1 parameters if your routing equipment uses RIP version 2.Display current RIP configuration The RIP Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol (RIP) parameters. This option is turned off by default.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rip Routing Information Protocol Configuration Menu [Routing Information Protocol Menu] if .

The default value is disabled. poison disable|enable When enabled.BLADE OS 5. the switch learns routes from other routers. The default value is version 2.Set default route action metric .Set authentication key enable . the switch supplies routes to other routers.Enable/disable multicast updates default .Enable interface disable .Enable/disable listening to route updates poison . The default value is enabled. Note – Do not configure RIP version 1 parameters if your routing equipment uses RIP version 2.Enable/disable split horizon trigg .Disable interface current .Enable/disable supplying route updates listen . When disabled. supply disable|enable When enabled. split disable|enable Enables or disables split horizon.Set metric auth . The default value is enabled.Display current RIP interface configuration The RIP Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol parameters. This option is turned off by default.Set authentication type key . listen disable|enable When enabled.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rip/if <interface number> Routing Information Protocol Interface Configuration Menu [RIP Interface 1 Menu] version . August 2009 . the switch uses split horizon with poisoned reverse. 326 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. The default value is enabled.Set RIP version supply .Enable/disable poisoned reverse split .Enable/disable triggered updates mcast . Table 180 RIP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rip/if) Command Syntax and Usage version 1|2|both Configures the RIP version used by this interface. the switch uses only split horizon.

enable Enables this RIP interface. When enabled. Triggered Updates are used to speed convergence. The default value is enabled. current Displays the current RIP configuration.0.BLADE OS 5. disable Disables this RIP interface. BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 327 . metric <1-15> Configures the route metric. default none|listen|supply|both When enabled. Triggered Updates force a router to send update messages immediately. mcast disable|enable Enables or disables multicast updates of the routing table (using address 224. the switch accepts RIP default routes from other routers. The default value is 1.1 Command Reference Table 180 RIP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rip/if) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage trigg disable|enable Enables or disables Triggered Updates. The default value is enabled. The default value is none. which indicates the relative distance to the destination. the switch rejects RIP default routes.0. The default is none. key Configures the authentication key password. When disabled. auth none|password Configures the authentication type.9). even if it is not yet time for the update message. but gives them lower priority than configured default gateways.

To remove specific route maps. Table 181 RIP Redistribution Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rip/redist) Command Syntax and Usage add <1-32> <1-32>|all Adds selected routing maps to the RIP route redistribution list. type all. 328 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. To add all 32 route maps. rem <1-32> <1-32>|all Removes the route map from the RIP route redistribution list.Display current route-maps added The following table describes the RIP Route Redistribute Menu options. ).Add rmap into route redistribution list rem .BLADE OS 5. ). To remove all 32 route maps. August 2009 . type all. separated by a comma ( .Remove rmap from route redistribution list export . The routes of the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the route redistribution list will be redistributed. enter none. To add specific route maps. To remove a previous configuration and stop exporting the routes of the protocol. export <1-15>|none Exports the routes of this protocol in which the metric and metric type are specified. enter routing map numbers. separated by a comma ( .Export all routes of this protocol cur . enter routing map numbers.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rip/redist fixed|static|ospf|eospf RIP Route Redistribution Configuration Menu [RIP Redistribute Fixed Menu] add . cur Displays the current RIP route redistribute configuration.

OSPF Virtual Links menu md5key . Host routes are used for advertising network device IP addresses to external networks to perform server load balancing within OSPF. See page 336 to view menu options. It also makes Area Border Route (ABR) load sharing and ABR failover possible. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 329 . See page 338 to view menu options.Globally turn OSPF ON off . Up to 128 host routes can be configured.OSPF MD5 Key Menu host .Set the LSDB limit default .OSPF Area (index) menu range . See page 331 to view menu options.Display current OSPF configuration Table 182 OSPF Configuration Menu (/cfg/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the area index menu.OSPF Summary Range menu if .OSPF Host Entry menu redist .Globally turn OSPF OFF cur . md5key <key ID (1-255)> Assigns a string to MD5 authentication key. See page 334 to view menu options. See page 333 to view menu options. virt <virtual link (1-3)> Displays the Virtual Links menu used to configure OSPF for a Virtual Link.OSPF Interface menu virt .OSPF Route Redistribute menu lsdb .1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf Open Shortest Path First Configuration Menu [Open Shortest Path First Menu] aindex . This area index does not represent the actual OSPF area number.BLADE OS 5. if <interface number> Displays the OSPF interface configuration menu. host <1-128> Displays the menu for configuring OSPF for the host routes. range <1-16> Displays summary routes menu for up to 16 IP addresses.Originate default route information on . BMD00114.

0 for no limit)> Sets the link state database limit.BLADE OS 5. on Enables OSPF on the switch. 330 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. Use none for no default. off Disables OSPF on the switch. lsdb <LSDB limit (0-6144.1 Command Reference Table 182 OSPF Configuration Menu (/cfg/l3/ospf) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage redist fixed|static|rip Displays Route Distribution Menu. See page 339 to view menu options. August 2009 . cur Displays the current OSPF configuration settings. default <metric (1-16777214)> <metric-type 1|2>|none Sets one default route among multiple choices in an area.

Display current OSPF area configuration Table 183 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex) Command Syntax and Usage areaid <IP address (such as.Set time interval between two SPF calculations enable .101)> Defines the IP address of the OSPF area number.BLADE OS 5. when a virtual link has to be established with the backbone. the area type must be defined as transit. For example.4. All routes received via that stub area carry the configured metric to potentially influencing routing decisions.Set authentication type spf .1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/aindex <area index> Area Index Configuration Menu [OSPF Area (index) 1 Menu] areaid . a stub area is connected to only one other area. Any area that is not a stub area or NSSA is considered to be transit area. NSSA: Not-So-Stubby Area (NSSA) is similar to stub area with additional capabilities.Set area ID type . Transit area: allows area summary information to be exchanged between routing devices. External routes from outside the Autonomous System (AS) can be advertised within the NSSA but are not distributed into other areas. Metric value assigns the priority for choosing the switch for default route.17. Metric type determines the method for influencing routing decisions for external routes. For example. Typically.Disable area delete . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 331 . metric <metric value (1-65535)> Configures a stub area to send a numeric metric value. routes originating from within the NSSA can be propagated to adjacent transit and backbone areas.Enable area disable . BMD00114.Set stub area metric auth .Set area type metric .Delete area cur . 192. Stub area: is an area where external routing information is not distributed. type transit|stub|nssa Defines the type of area.

1 Command Reference Table 183 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex) Command Syntax and Usage auth none|password|md5 none: No authentication required. spf <interval (1-255)> Sets time interval between two successive SPF (shortest path first) calculations of the shortest path tree using the Dijkstra’s algorithm. enable Enables the OSPF area. password: Authenticates simple passwords so that only trusted routing devices can participate. disable Disables the OSPF area. delete Deletes the OSPF area.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 . 332 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. md5: This parameter is used when MD5 cryptographic authentication is required. cur Displays the current OSPF configuration.

Display current OSPF summary range configuration Table 184 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP Address (such as.17. delete Deletes the OSPF summary range. current Displays the current OSPF summary range.Set area index .Enable/disable hide range .Set IP mask .Set IP address .101)> Configures the base IP address for the range. enable Enables the OSPF summary range. aindex <area index (0-2)> Configures the area index used by the switch. 192.Disable range . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 333 .0)> Configures the IP address mask for the range. BMD00114.255. 255.4. mask <IP mask (such as. disable Disables the OSPF summary range. hide disable|enable Hides the OSPF summary range.Enable range .255.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/range <range number> OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu [OSPF Summary addr mask aindex hide enable disable delete cur Range 1 Menu] .Delete range .BLADE OS 5.

between the hello packets for the interfaces.BLADE OS 5. A priority value of 0 specifies that the interface cannot be used as Designated Router (DR) or Backup Designated Router (BDR). (A priority value of 255 is the highest and 1 is the lowest. in seconds or milliseconds. prio <priority value (0-255)> Configures the priority value for the switch’s OSPF interfaces. 334 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. Usually the cost is inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the interface. hello <1-65535> hello <1-65535ms> Configures the interval.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/if <interface number> OSPF Interface Configuration Menu [OSPF Interface aindex prio cost hello dead trans retra key mdkey passive ptop enable disable delete cur 1 Menu] Set area index Set interface router priority Set interface cost Set hello interval in seconds or milliseconds Set dead interval in seconds or milliseconds Set transit delay in seconds Set retransmit interval in seconds Set authentication key Set MD5 key ID Enable/disable passive interface Enable/disable point-to-point interface Enable interface Disable interface Delete interface Display current OSPF interface configuration Table 185 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/if) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Configures the OSPF area index. Low cost indicates high bandwidth.) cost <1-65535> Configures cost set for the selected path—preferred or backup. August 2009 .

delete Deletes OSPF interface. you can disable OSPF protocol exchanges.BLADE OS 5. trans <1-3600> Configures the transit delay in seconds. mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none Assigns an MD5 key to the interface. ptop enable|disable Sets the interface as point-to-point. disable Disables OSPF interface. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 335 . but the router advertises the interface in its LSAs so that IP connectivity to the attached network segment will be established. retra <1-3600> Configures the retransmit interval in seconds. passive enable|disable Sets the interface as passive. cur Displays the current settings for OSPF interface.1 Command Reference Table 185 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/if) Command Syntax and Usage dead <1-65535> dead <1-65535ms> Configures the health parameters of a hello packet. in seconds or milliseconds. enable Enables OSPF interface. BMD00114. On a passive interface. key <key>|none Sets the authentication key to clear the password. before declaring a silent router to be down.

Default is none.Set dead interval in seconds or milliseconds .Set router ID of virtual neighbor . 336 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.Disable interface .Set hello interval in seconds or milliseconds . in seconds or milliseconds.Enable interface .Set transit delay in seconds . key <password> Configures the password (up to eight characters) for each virtual link.Set area index . dead <1-65535> dead <1-65535ms> Configures the health parameters of a hello packet. hello <1-65535)> hello <1-65535ms)> Configures the authentication parameters of a hello packet.0.Set retransmit interval in seconds . Default is five seconds.Set authentication key .1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/virt <link number> OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu [OSPF Virtual aindex hello dead trans retra nbr key mdkey enable disable delete cur Link 1 Menu] .BLADE OS 5. in seconds.Display current OSPF interface configuration Table 186 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Configures the OSPF area index.Delete interface .0. trans <1-3600> Configures the delay in transit. The default value is 60 seconds. Default is one second. Default is 0. August 2009 .0. in seconds or milliseconds.Set MD5 key ID . nbr <NBR router ID (IP address)> Configures the router ID of the virtual neighbor. retra <1-3600> Configures the retransmit interval. in seconds.

disable Disables OSPF virtual link. cur Displays the current OSPF virtual link settings. Default is none. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 337 . delete Deletes OSPF virtual link.BLADE OS 5. BMD00114. enable Enables OSPF virtual link.1 Command Reference Table 186 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt) Command Syntax and Usage mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none Sets MD5 key ID for each virtual link.

192.Disable host entry delete .Display current OSPF host entry configuration Table 187 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/host) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as.Set cost of this host entry enable .17. enable Enables OSPF host entry. 338 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.Delete host entry cur .4.101)> Configures the base IP address for the host entry. August 2009 . aindex <area index (0-2)> Configures the area index of the host. delete Deletes OSPF host entry. disable Disables OSPF host entry.Set area index cost .Enable host entry disable .BLADE OS 5. cur Displays the current OSPF host entries. cost <1-65535> Configures the cost value of the host.Set host entry IP address aindex .1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/host <host number> OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu [OSPF Host Entry 1 Menu] addr .

Removes routing maps from the rmap list. To add specific route maps. export <metric (1-16777214)> <metric type [1|2]> |none Exports the routes of this protocol as external OSPF AS-external LSAs in which the metric and metric type are specified.To add all the 32 route maps. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 339 . This option adds a route map to the route redistribution list.Export all routes of this protocol cur .Remove rmap from route redistribution list export . |all Adds selected routing maps to the rmap list. BMD00114.. To remove all 32 route maps. enter routing map numbers one per line.. NULL at end.Display current route-maps added Table 188 OSPF Route Redistribution Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/redist) Command Syntax and Usage add (<route map (1-32)> <route map [1-32]>). NULL at the end.BLADE OS 5. enter none. The routes of the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the route redistribution list will be redistributed. enter all.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/redist fixed|static|rip OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu [OSPF Redistribute Fixed Menu] add . |all Removes the route map from the route redistribution list.. cur Displays the current route map settings. enter routing map numbers one per line.Add rmap into route redistribution list rem . To remove a previous configuration and stop exporting the routes of the protocol. To remove specific route maps.. rem (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>) . enter all.

delete Deletes the authentication key for this OSPF packet. cur Displays the current MD5 key configuration. 340 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. August 2009 .BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/md5key <key ID> OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu [OSPF MD5 Key key delete cur 1 Menu] Set authentication key Delete key Display current MD5 key configuration Table 189 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/ip/ospf/md5key) Command Syntax and Usage key <1-16 characters> Sets the authentication key for this OSPF packet.

cur Displays the current IGMP configuration parameters. igmpflt Displays the IGMP Filtering Menu. see page 346. BMD00114. mrouter Displays the Static Multicast Router Menu. To view menu options. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 341 . see page 345. on Globally turns IGMP on. To view menu options. see page 342. To view menu options. off Globally turns IGMP off.BLADE OS 5. Table 190 IGMP Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp) Command Syntax and Usage snoop Displays the IGMP Snoop Menu.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/igmp IGMP Configuration Menu [IGMP Menu] snoop mrouter igmpflt on off cur IGMP Snoop Menu Static Multicast Router Menu IGMP Filtering Menu Globally turn IGMP ON Globally turn IGMP OFF Display current IGMP configuration Table 190 describes the commands used to configure basic IGMP parameters.

timeout <1-255> Configures the timeout value for IGMP Membership Reports (host).Remove VLAN(s) from IGMP Snooping clear . Table 191 describes the commands used to configure IGMP Snooping. see page 344.Set source ip to use when proxying GSQ add .Flood unregistered IPMC cpu .BLADE OS 5. The range is from 1 to 255 seconds. The switch learns which server hosts are interested in receiving multicast traffic. To view menu options.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/igmp/snoop IGMP Snooping Configuration Menu [IGMP Snoop Menu] igmpv3 . The range is from 1 to 600 seconds. if the conditions are met. The default is 255 seconds. Table 191 IGMP Snoop Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop) Command Syntax and Usage igmpv3 Displays the IGMP version 3 Menu.Display current IGMP Snooping configuration IGMP Snooping allows the switch to forward multicast traffic only to those ports that request it.Set multicast router timeout qintrval . if the proper conditions are met. 342 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.Enable/disable Fastleave processing in VLAN cur . qinterval <1-600> Configures the interval for IGMP Query Reports. the switch removes the host from its IGMP table.Set report timeout mrto . mrto <1-600 seconds> Configures the timeout value for IGMP Membership Queries (mrouter).Remove all VLAN(s) from IGMP Snooping fastlv .Add VLAN(s) to IGMP Snooping rem . August 2009 .Aggregate IGMP report srcip .IGMP Version3 Snoop Menu timeout . The default is 10 seconds. The default value is 125 seconds. Once the timeout value is reached.Send unregistered IPMC to CPU aggr .Set expected packet loss on subnet flood .Set IGMP query interval robust . Once the timeout value is reached. the switch removes the multicast router from its IGMP table. IGMP snooping prevents multicast traffic from being flooded to all ports. and forwards it only to ports connected to those servers.

If an Mrouter is present. you must disable IGMP flooding to ensure that multicast data is forwarded across the VLANs for that IPMC group. clear Removes all VLANs from IGMP Snooping. Note: If both flood and cpu are disabled.17.4. Note: If none of the IGMP hosts reside on the VLAN of the streaming server for a IPMC group. rem <VLAN number> Removes the selected VLAN(s) from IGMP Snooping. aggr enable|disable Enables or disables IGMP Membership Report aggregation. which adds an entry in the IPMC table. as follows: If no Mrouter is present. If the subnet is expected to be lossy (high rate of packet loss). srcip <IP address (such as.1 Command Reference Table 191 IGMP Snoop Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage robust <2-10> Configures the IGMP Robustness variable. increase the value. cpu enable|disable Configures the switch to forward unregistered IP multicast traffic to the MP. which allows you to tune the switch for expected packet loss on the subnet. BMD00114. The default setting is enabled. 192.BLADE OS 5. The default setting is enabled.101)> Configures the source IP address used as a proxy for IGMP Group Specific Queries. drop subsequent packets with same IPMC. The default value is 2. add <VLAN number> Adds the selected VLAN(s) to IGMP Snooping. then the switch drops all unregistered IPMC traffic. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 343 . forward subsequent packets to the Mrouter(s) on the ingress VLAN. flood enable|disable Configures the switch to flood unregistered IP multicast traffic to all ports.

This command is disabled by default. the switch ignores Exclude Reports. the switch drops IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 reports. v1v2 enable|disable Enables or disables snooping on IGMP version 1 and version 2 reports.Enable/disable snooping EXCLUDE mode reports ena . When disabled. ena Enables IGMP version 3. if the host sends a Leave message.Display current IGMP Snooping V3 configuration Table 192 describes the commands used to configure IGMP version 3. The default value is enabled.BLADE OS 5. 344 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.1 Command Reference Table 191 IGMP Snoop Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage fastlv <VLAN number> disable|enable Enables or disables Fastleave processing. exclude enable|disable Enables or disables snooping on IGMPv3 Exclude Reports. and the proper conditions are met. August 2009 . Table 192 IGMP V3 Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop/igmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage sources <1-64> Configures the maximum number of IGMP multicast sources to snoop from within the group record.Enable IGMPv3 Snooping dis . Fastleave allows the switch to immediately remove a port from the IGMP port list.Disable IGMPv3 Snooping cur . /cfg/l3/igmp/snoop/igmpv3 IGMP Version 3 Configuration Menu [IGMP V3 Snoop Menu] sources . The default value is disabled. Use this command to limit the number of IGMP sources to provide more refined control. cur Displays the current IGMP Snooping parameters.Set the number of sources to snoop in group record v1v2 .Enable/disable snooping IGMPv1/v2 reports exclude . The default value is enabled. When disabled.

Remove all Static Multicast Router Ports cur . 2. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 345 .BLADE OS 5. clear Clears all static multicast routers from the switch.1 Command Reference Table 192 IGMP V3 Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop/igmpv3) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage dis Disables IGMP version 3. /cfg/l3/igmp/mrouter IGMP Static Multicast Router Configuration Menu [Static Multicast Router Menu] add . Table 193 IGMP Static Multicast Router Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/mrouter) Command Syntax and Usage add <port number> <VLAN number> <IGMP version number> Selects a port/VLAN combination on which the static multicast router is connected. remove <port number> <VLAN number> <IGMP version number> Removes a static multicast router from the selected port/VLAN combination.Add port as Multicast Router Port rem .Display current Multicast Router configuration Table 193 describes the commands used to configure a static multicast router.Remove port as Multicast Router Port clear . Note – When you configure a static multicast router on a VLAN. the switch continues to learn dynamic multicast routers on that VLAN. BMD00114. or 3) of the multicast router. cur Displays the current IGMP version 3 configuration. cur Displays the current IGMP Static Multicast Router parameters. and configures the IGMP version (1.

IGMP Filter Definition Menu port . port <port number> Displays the IGMP Filtering Port Menu.Enable IGMP Filtering dis .Disable IGMP Filtering cur .BLADE OS 5. cur Displays the current IGMP Filtering parameters. 346 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. see page 347. To view menu options. ena Enables IGMP filtering globally.IGMP Filtering Port Menu ena . Table 194 IGMP Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt) Command Syntax and Usage filter <filter number (1-16)> Displays the IGMP Filter Definition Menu. dis Disables IGMP filtering globally. To view menu options. August 2009 . see page 348.Display current IGMP Filtering configuration Table 194 describes the commands used to configure an IGMP filter.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt IGMP Filtering Configuration Menu [IGMP Filter Menu] filter .

0. dis Disables this IGMP filter. del Deletes this filter’s parameter definitions.Disable filter del .1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt/filter <filter number> IGMP Filter Definition Menu [IGMP Filter 1 Definition Menu] range . cur Displays the current IGMP filter.Enable filter dis .Set IP Multicast address range action . BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 347 .Delete filter cur . ena Enables this IGMP filter.0. Table 195 IGMP Filter Definition Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt/filter) Command Syntax and Usage range <IP multicast address (such as 224. action allow|deny Allows or denies multicast traffic for the IP multicast addresses specified.Display current IGMP filter configuration Table 195 describes the commands used to define an IGMP filter.10)> <IP multicast address> Configures the range of IP multicast addresses for this filter.BLADE OS 5.Set filter action ena .

Enable/disable IGMP filtering on port add .Add IGMP filter to port rem . 348 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5.Display current IGMP filtering Port configuration Table 196 describes the commands used to configure a port for IGMP filtering.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt/port <port number> IGMP Filtering Port Configuration Menu [IGMP Port 1 Menu] filt . cur Displays the current IGMP filter parameters for this port. August 2009 .Remove IGMP filter from port cur . Table 196 IGMP Filter Port Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt/port) Command Syntax and Usage filt enable|disable Enables or disables IGMP filtering on this port. rem <filter number (1-16)> Removes an IGMP filter from this port. add <filter number (1-16)> Adds an IGMP filter to this port.

Display current DNS configuration The Domain Name System (DNS) Menu is used for defining the primary and secondary DNS servers on your local network.101)> You are prompted to set the IP address for your secondary DNS server. use dotted decimal notation.17. secon <IPv4 address (such as 192. BMD00114.Set default domain name cur . Table 197 Domain Name Service Menu Options (/cfg/l3/dns) Command Syntax and Usage prima <IPv4 address (such as 192.Set IP address of primary DNS server secon . traceroute. dname <dotted DNS notation>|none Sets the default domain name used by the switch. use dotted decimal notation.com cur Displays the current Domain Name System settings.101)> You are prompted to set the IP address for your primary DNS server. and tftp commands.17.4.4. To set an IPv4 address.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/dns Domain Name System Configuration Menu [Domain Name System Menu] prima . For example: mycompany.BLADE OS 5. and for setting the default domain name served by the switch services.Set IP address of secondary DNS server dname . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 349 . DNS parameters must be configured prior to using hostname parameters with the ping. To set an IPv4 address.

17. 350 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. To set an IPv4 address. use dotted decimal notation. addr2 <IPv4 address (such as 192. August 2009 .4. BOOTP relay is turned off by default.17. on Globally turns on BOOTP relay.Globally turn BOOTP relay OFF cur .101)> Sets the IP address of the BOOTP server. To set an IPv4 address.Display current BOOTP relay configuration The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) Relay Menu is used to allow hosts to obtain their configurations from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. cur Displays the current BOOTP relay configuration.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/bootp Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu [Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu] addr . Table 198 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bootp) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IPv4 address (such as 192.Set IP address of second BOOTP server on .BLADE OS 5.Set IP address of BOOTP server addr2 .Globally turn BOOTP relay ON off .4. off Globally turns off BOOTP relay. The BOOTP configuration enables the switch to forward a client request for an IP address to two DHCP/BOOTP servers with IP addresses that have been configured on the switch.101)> Sets the IP address of the second BOOTP server. use dotted decimal notation.

For more information on VRRP. based on a number of priority criteria. BMD00114. This menu is used for configuring virtual routers on this switch. used to combine all virtual routers together as one logical entity. group Displays the VRRP virtual router group menu. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 351 . To view menu options. By default. see page 358. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. see page 353. To view menu options. see the “High Availability” chapter in the Application Guide. To view menu options. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. If the master fails. Table 199 VRRP Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp) Command Syntax and Usage vr <virtual router number (1-255)> Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Menu. if <interface number> Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Interface Menu. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master.BLADE OS 5. VRRP is disabled. allowing for full active/active redundancy between switches.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp VRRP Configuration Menu [Virtual Router vr group if track hotstan on off cur Redundancy Protocol Menu] VRRP Virtual Router menu VRRP Virtual Router Group menu VRRP Interface menu VRRP Priority Tracking menu Enable/disable hot-standby processing Globally turn VRRP ON Globally turn VRRP OFF Display current VRRP configuration Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. Group options must be configured when using two or more switches in a hot-standby failover configuration where only one switch is active at any given time. BLADE OS has extended VRRP to include virtual servers as well. see page 361.

on Globally enables VRRP on this switch. hotstan disable|enable Enables or disables hot standby processing.BLADE OS 5. cur Displays the current VRRP parameters. By default. this option is disabled. August 2009 . This menu is used for weighting the criteria used when modifying priority levels in the master router election process. 352 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.1 Command Reference Table 199 VRRP Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Tracking Menu. off Globally disables VRRP on this switch. see page 362. in which two or more switches provide redundancy for each other. To view menu options.

To view menu options.Enable or disable preemption . see page 356.Set IP address .1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number> Virtual Router Configuration Menu [VRRP Virtual track vrid addr if prio adver preem ena dis del cur Router 1 Menu] . This is used in conjunction with addr (below) to define a virtual router on this switch. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router. BMD00114.Set interface number .BLADE OS 5. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 353 .Delete virtual router . vrid <virtual router ID (1-255)> Defines the virtual router ID.Set renter priority .Disable virtual router . Table 200 VRRP Virtual Router Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for this virtual router.Set advertisement interval .Set virtual router ID . The vrid for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 255. Virtual routers are disabled by default. Tracking is an BLADE OS proprietary extension to VRRP. To create a pool of VRRP-enabled routing devices which can provide redundancy to each other. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address. The default value is 1.Priority Tracking Menu .Display current VRRP virtual router configuration This menu is used for configuring virtual routers for this switch. a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address. used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router.Enable virtual router . each participating VRRP device must be configured with the same virtual router: one that shares the same vrid and addr combination. All vrid values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface belongs.

192. During the master router election process. The default interface is 1. An owner has a special priority of 255 (highest) and will always assume the role of master router. 354 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. By default.101)> Defines the IP address for this virtual router using dotted decimal notation. Note that even when preem is disabled. The default value is 1.0. this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. if <interface number> Selects a switch IP interface. This pre-emption occurs even if the preem option below is disabled. The default address is 0. this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins.4. if this virtual router is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master. adver <1-255> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. This is used in conjunction with the vrid (above) to configure the same virtual router on each participating VRRP device. When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track). this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface. the device with the highest IP interface address wins. If there is a tie. The default value is 100. This can be any integer between 1 and 254.0.0. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. preem disable|enable Enables or disables master preemption.BLADE OS 5.17. this switch is considered the “owner” of the defined virtual router. even if it must pre-empt another virtual router which has assumed master routing authority. If the IP interface has the same IP address as the addr option above. the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). prio <1-254> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual server. When enabled. this option is enabled.1 Command Reference Table 200 VRRP Virtual Router Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as. ena Enables this virtual router. August 2009 .

1 Command Reference Table 200 VRRP Virtual Router Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage dis Disables this virtual router.BLADE OS 5. BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 355 . del Deletes this virtual router from the switch configuration. cur Displays the current configuration information for this virtual router.

this virtual router can assume master routing authority when its priority level rises above that of the current master. and ports below) apply to standard virtual routers. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active on this switch.Display current VRRP virtual router configuration This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers. This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same switch. Table 201 Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs disable|enable When enabled.” A virtual server router is defined as any virtual router whose IP address (addr) is the same as any configured virtual server IP address. This command is disabled by default. continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled. the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see page 362). ifs disable|enable When enabled.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number>/track Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration Menu [VRRP Virtual vrs ifs ports cur Router 1 Priority Tracking Menu] . August 2009 . Each time one of the tracking criteria is met. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. otherwise called “virtual interface routers.BLADE OS 5. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master mode on this switch. Some tracking criteria (vrs. increasing routing and load balancing efficiency.Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers . If the virtual router pre-emption option (see preem in Table 200 on page 353) is enabled. This command is disabled by default. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. Criteria are tracked dynamically.Enable/disable tracking other interfaces . 356 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports . ifs.

A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN.1 Command Reference Table 201 Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track) Command Syntax and Usage ports disable|enable When enabled. This command is disabled by default. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 357 .BLADE OS 5. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router. BMD00114.

a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address. To view menu options. Table 202 Virtual Router Group Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for the virtual router group. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address. All vrid values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface (see if below) belongs.Set virtual router ID . 358 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/group Virtual Router Group Configuration Menu [VRRP Virtual track vrid if prio adver preem ena dis del cur Router Group Menu] . used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. The vrid for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 255.Priority Tracking Menu .Enable virtual router .Set renter priority . see page 360. which forces all virtual routers on the switch to either be master or backup as a group. Tracking is an BLADE OS proprietary extension to VRRP. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router.BLADE OS 5.Disable virtual router .Delete virtual router .Enable or disable preemption . if <interface number> Selects a switch IP interface. The default virtual router ID is 1. Note – This option is required to be configured only when using at least two switches in a hot-standby failover configuration. where only one switch is active at any time.Display current VRRP virtual router configuration The Virtual Router Group menu is used for associating all virtual routers into a single logical virtual router. The default switch IP interface number is 1. August 2009 . vrid <virtual router ID (1-255)> Defines the virtual router ID.Set advertisement interval .Set interface number .

This can be any integer between 1 and 254.BLADE OS 5. When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track). During the master router election process. By default. The default value is 100. Note that even when preem is disabled. adver <1-255> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements.1 Command Reference Table 202 Virtual Router Group Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage prio <1-254> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. BMD00114. this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). If there is a tie. if the virtual router group is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master. this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. cur Displays the current configuration information for the virtual router group. del Deletes the virtual router group from the switch configuration. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface. the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). this option is enabled. the device with the highest IP interface address wins. When enabled. dis Disables the virtual router group. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 359 . This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. The default is 1. ena Enables the virtual router group. preem disable|enable Enables or disables master preemption.

This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. Table 203 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu (/cfg/l3/vr/group/track) Command Syntax and Usage ifs disable|enable When enabled. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active on this switch. This command is disabled by default. then the tracking option will be available only under group option. August 2009 . the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. 360 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. This command is disabled by default.BLADE OS 5. The tracking setting for the other individual virtual routers will be ignored.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/group/track Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu [Virtual Router ifs ports cur Group Priority Tracking Menu] Enable/disable tracking other interfaces Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports Display current VRRP Group Tracking configuration Note – If Virtual Router Group Tracking is enabled. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router. ports disable|enable When enabled.

del Clears the authentication configuration parameters for this IP interface. [VRRP Interface auth passw del cur 1 Menu] Set authentication types Set plain-text password Delete interface Display current VRRP interface configuration This menu is used for configuring VRRP authentication parameters for the IP interfaces used with the virtual routers. passw <password> Defines a plain text password up to eight characters long.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/if <interface number> VRRP Interface Configuration Menu Note – The interface-number represents the IP interface on which authentication parameters must be configured. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 361 . or password (password authentication). The IP interface itself is not deleted. Table 204 VRRP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/if) Command Syntax and Usage auth none|password Defines the type of authentication that will be used: none (no authentication).BLADE OS 5. This password will be added to each VRRP packet transmitted by this interface when password authentication is chosen (see auth above). cur Displays the current configuration for this IP interface’s authentication parameters. BMD00114.

ifs <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (0 through 254) for active IP interfaces detected on this switch. The default value is 2. Table 205 VRRP Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (0 through 254) for virtual routers in master mode detected on this switch.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/track VRRP Tracking Configuration Menu [VRRP Tracking Menu] vrs . August 2009 . Note – These priority tracking options only define increment values.BLADE OS 5. cur Displays the current configuration of priority tracking increment values. the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through this menu. ports <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (0 through 254) for active ports on the virtual router’s VLAN. The default value is 2. These options do not affect the VRRP master router election process until options under the VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu (see page 356) are enabled.Set priority increment for virtual router tracking ifs .Display current VRRP Priority Tracking configuration This menu is used for setting weights for the various criteria used to modify priority levels during the master router election process.Set priority increment for IP interface tracking ports . Each time one of the tracking criteria is met (see “VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu” on page 356).Set priority increment for VLAN switch port tracking cur . The default value is 2. 362 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.

1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/sm ServerMobility™ Configuration Menu [ServerMobility port recovery default scheme add rem filter nsmrelay on off cur Menu] Server Mobility Port Menu Server Mobility Auto-Recovery Menu Set ServerMobility configuration to factory default Set ServerMobility encoding scheme Add ServerMobility ports Remove ServerMobility ports Enable/Disable DHCP request message filters on ports Enable/Disable relay on non-ServerMobility ports Globally turn ServerMobility ON Globally turn ServerMobility OFF Display current ServerMobility configuration The following table describes the Server Mobility Configuration menu options. as follows: vmac: Use the port’s virtual MAC address chassis: Use the chassis ID switch: Use the switch name add <port number> Configures a port as a Server Mobility port.BLADE OS 5. scheme vmac|chassis|switch Selects the ServerMobility encoding scheme. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 363 . BMD00114. rem <port number> Removes the port from Server Mobility. recovery Displays the Server Mobility Auto-Recovery menu. see the BLADE OS Application Guide. default Resets the Server Mobility parameters to their factory default values. Table 206 ServerMobility Menu Options (/cfg/l3/sm) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the Server Mobility port menu. For more information about ServerMobility.

nsmrelay e|d Enables or disables BOOTP Relay for all ports that have ServerMobility disabled. off Globally turns Server Mobility off.1 Command Reference Table 206 ServerMobility Menu Options (/cfg/l3/sm) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage filter <port number> e|d Enables or disables filtering DHCP request information on the port. so that the DHCP server receives only DHCP requests from the switch. 364 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. August 2009 . cur Displays the current ServerMobility configuration settings.BLADE OS 5. DHCP requests from the server are filtered. When enabled. on Globally turns Server Mobility on. The default value is disabled.

1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/sm/port <port number> ServerMobility™ Port Configuration Menu [Port 2 Menu] addback .Set backup port remback . cur Displays the current ServerMobility port settings. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 365 . BMD00114. Table 207 ServerMobility Port Options (/cfg/l3/sm/port) Command Syntax and Usage addback <port number> Adds a backup port to the selected port.Display current configuration The following table describes the Server Mobility Port menu options.Remove backup port cur . remback <port number> Removes the backup port.BLADE OS 5.

in seconds.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/sm/recovery ServerMobility™ Auto-Recovery Configuration Menu [Server Auto-Recovery Menu] time . dis Enables ServerMobility Auto-Recovery.Disable auto-recovery cur . If the active port fails (link state is down). ena Enables ServerMobility Auto-Recovery.BLADE OS 5. Table 208 ServerMobility Auto-Recovery Options (/cfg/l3/sm/recovery) Command Syntax and Usage time <1-255> Configures the auto-recovery timer. the backup port sends a DCHP request after the timer expires. The following table describes the Server Mobility Auto-Recovery menu options.Enable auto-recovery dis . The default value is 5 seconds. cur Displays the current ServerMobility Auto-Recovery settings. August 2009 . 366 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.Display current configuration Auto-Recovery allows a backup port to automatically take over for a failed ServerMobility port. The default setting is disabled.Set auto-recovery time ena .

BMD00114. A loopback interface is always accessible over the network.Set subnet mask ena .Enable IP interface dis . cur Displays the current IP loopback interface parameters. Table 209 IP Loopback Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/loopif) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address> Defines the loopback interface IP address.BLADE OS 5.Display current interface configuration An IP loopback interface is not connected to any physical port.Delete IP interface cur . ena Enables the loopback interface. del Deletes the selected loopback interface.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/loopif <interface number (1-5)> IP Loopback Interface Configuration Menu [IP Loopback Interface 2 Menu] addr . dis Disables the loopback interface.Disable IP interface del . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 367 . mask <subnet mask> Defines the loopback interface subnet mask.Set IP address mask .

Table 210 describes the Remote Monitoring (RMON) configuration menu options. To view menu options. see page 369.1 Command Reference /cfg/rmon Remote Monitoring Configuration [RMON Menu] hist event alarm cur RMON History Menu RMON Event Menu RMON Alarm Menu Display current RMON configuration Remote Monitoring (RMON) allows you to monitor traffic flowing through the switch. To view menu options. see page 371. August 2009 . To view menu options.BLADE OS 5. cur Displays the current RMON parameters. see page 370. The RMON MIB is described in RFC 1757. Table 210 Remote Monitoring (RMON) Menu Options (/cfg/rmon) Command Syntax and Usage hist <1-65535> Displays the RMON History Configuration menu. 368 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. alarm <1-65535> Displays the RMON Alarm Configuration menu. event <1-65535> Displays the RMON Event Configuration menu.

2.2.2. which is the number of discrete time intervals over which data is to be saved. Table 211 RMON History Menu Options (/cfg/rmon/hist) Command Syntax and Usage ifoid <1-127 characters> Configures the interface MIB Object Identifier. BMD00114. The IFOID must correspond to the standard interface OID. The maximum number of buckets that can be granted is 50.x where x is the ifIndex rbnum <1-65535> Configures the requested number of buckets. The default value is 30.1. intrval <1-3600> Configures the time interval over which the data is sampled for each bucket. cur Displays the current RMON History parameters.BLADE OS 5.3. The default value is 1800. owner <1-127 characters> Enter a text string that identifies the person or entity that uses this History index.6. as follows: 1.1 Command Reference /cfg/rmon/hist <1-65535> RMON History Configuration Menu [RMON History ifoid rbnum intrval owner delete cur 2 Menu] Set interface MIB object to monitor Set the number of requested buckets Set polling interval Set owner for the RMON group of statistics Delete this history and restore defaults Display current history configuration Table 211 describes the RMON History Menu options. delete Deletes the selected History index.1.1. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 369 .1.

an entry is made in the log table and sent to the configured syslog host.Set event type owner . For log events. August 2009 . cur Displays the current RMON Event parameters.Set description for the event type .Display current event configuration Table 212 describes the RMON Event Menu options. owner <1-127 characters> Enter a text string that identifies the person or entity that uses this event index. type none|log|trap|both Selects the type of notification provided for this event.Set owner for the event delete . Table 212 RMON Event Menu Options (/cfg/rmon/event) Command Syntax and Usage descn <1-127 characters> Enter a text string to describe the event. 370 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.1 Command Reference /cfg/rmon/event <1-65535> RMON Event Configuration Menu [RMON Event 2 Menu] descn .Delete this event and restore defaults cur .BLADE OS 5. For trap events. delete Deletes the selected RMON Event index. an SNMP trap is sent to the management station.

and the difference compared with the thresholds.Set rising threshold . sample abs|delta Configures the method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds. delta—delta value.Set falling threshold .BLADE OS 5. falling. The MIB object must be a counter.Set event index to fire on falling threshold crossing . the value of the selected variable at the last sample is subtracted from the current value.1 Command Reference /cfg/rmon/alarm <1-65535> RMON Alarm Configuration Menu [RMON Alarm 2 oid intrval sample almtype rlimit flimit revtidx fevtidx owner delete cur Menu] . BMD00114.Set alarm interval . integer.Set event index to fire on rising threshold crossing . the value of the selected variable is compared directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval. almtype rising|falling|either Configures the alarm type as rising. Table 213 RMON Alarm Menu Options (/cfg/rmon/alarm) Command Syntax and Usage oid <1-127 characters> Configures an alarm MIB Object Identifier. or time interval.Set sample type .Display current alarm configuration The Alarm RMON group can track rising or falling values for a MIB object.Delete this alarm and restore defaults .Set MIB oid datasource to monitor . The default value is 1800. as follows: abs—absolute value.Set startup alarm type . intrval <1-65535> Configures the time interval over which data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds. Table 213 describes the RMON Alarm Menu options.Set owner for the alarm . gauge. Each alarm index must correspond to an event index that triggers once the alarm threshold is crossed. or either (rising or falling). August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 371 .

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

Table 213 RMON Alarm Menu Options (/cfg/rmon/alarm) (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

rlimit <-2147483647 - 2147483647> Configures the rising threshold for the sampled statistic. When the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was less than this threshold, a single event is generated. flimit <-2147483647 - 214748364) Configures the falling threshold for the sampled statistic. When the current sampled value is less than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was greater than this threshold, a single event is generated. revtidx <1-65535> Configures the rising alarm event index that is triggered when a rising threshold is crossed. fevtidx <1-65535> Configures the falling alarm event index that is triggered when a falling threshold is crossed. owner <1-127 characters> Enter a text string that identifies the person or entity that uses this alarm index. delete Deletes the selected RMON Alarm index. cur Displays the current RMON Alarm parameters.

372

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/sfd

Server Link Failure Detection Configuration
[Server Link Failure Detection Menu] ltm - Link to Monitor Menu lte - Link to Enable Menu on - Globally turn Server Link Failure Detection ON off - Globally turn Server Link Failure Detection OFF cur - Display current Server Link Failure Detection configuration

Server Link Failure Detection (SFD) allows the switch to monitor specific downlink ports to detect server link failures. When all of the server links in the Link to Monitor (LtM) fail, the switch enables the interconnect ports. The following table describes the Server Link Failure Detection (SFD) Configuration Menu options. Table 214 Server Link Failure Detection (SFD) Menu Options (/cfg/sfd)
Command Syntax and Usage

ltm Displays the SFD Link to Monitor menu. To view menu options, see page 374. ltd Displays the SFD Link to Disable menu. To view menu options, see page 375. on Globally turns on Server Link Failure Detection. off Globally turns off Server Link Failure Detection. cur Displays the current SFD configuration parameters.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

373

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/sfd/ltm

SFD Link to Monitor Menu
[Link to Monitor Menu] addport - Add port to Link to Monitor remport - Remove port from Link to Monitor addtrnk - Add trunk to Link to Monitor remtrnk - Remove trunk from Link to Monitor addkey - Add adminkey to Link to Monitor remkey - Remove adminkey from Link to Monitor cur - Display current LtM configuration

The following table describes the Link to Monitor (LtM) Menu options. The LtM can consist of only downlink ports (1-16) or a single trunk containing only downlink ports. Table 215 SFD Link to Monitor Menu Options (/cfg/sfd/ltm)
Command Syntax and Usage

addport <port number> Adds a port to the LtM. Only downlink ports (1-16) are allowed in the SFD LtM. remport <port number> Removes a port from the LtM. addtrnk <trunk number> Adds a trunk group to the LtM. The LtM trunk group can contain only downlink ports (1-16). remtrnk <trunk number> Removes a trunk group from the LtM. addkey <1-65535> Adds an LACP admin key to the LtM. LACP trunks formed with this admin key will be included in the SFD LtM. remkey <1-65535> Removes an LACP admin key from the LtM. cur Displays the current SFD Link to Monitor parameters.

374

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/sfd/lte

SFD Link to Enable Menu
[Link to Enable addport remport addtrnk remtrnk addkey remkey cur Menu] Add port to Link to Enable Remove port from Link to Enable Add trunk to Link to Enable Remove trunk from Link to Enable Add adminkey to Link to Enable Remove adminkey from Link to Enable Display current Link to Enable configuration

The following table describes the SFD Link to Enable (LtE) Menu options. The LtE can consist of only interconnect ports or a single trunk containing only interconnect ports. Table 216 SFD Link to Enable Menu Options (/cfg/sfd/lte)
Command Syntax and Usage

addport <port number> Adds a port to the LtE. Only interconnect ports are allowed in the LtE. remport <port number> Removes a port from the LtE. addtrnk <trunk number> Adds a trunk group to the LtE. The LtE trunk group can contain only interconnect ports. remtrnk <trunk number> Removes a trunk group from the LtE. addkey <1-65535> Adds an LACP admin key to the LtE. LACP trunks formed with this admin key will be included in the LtE. remkey <1-65535> Removes an LACP admin key from the LtE. cur Displays the current SFD Link to Enable parameters.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

375

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/setup

Setup
The setup program steps you through configuring the system date and time, BOOTP, IP, Spanning Tree, port speed/mode, VLAN parameters, and IP interfaces. To start the setup program, at the Configuration# prompt, enter:
Configuration# setup

For a complete description of how to use setup, see “First-Time Configuration” on page 23.

/cfg/dump

Dump
The dump program writes the current switch configuration to the terminal screen. To start the dump program, at the Configuration# prompt, enter:
Configuration# dump

The configuration is displayed with parameters that have been changed from the default values. The screen display can be captured, edited, and placed in a script file, which can be used to configure other switches through a Telnet connection. When using Telnet to configure a new switch, paste the configuration commands from the script file at the command line prompt of the switch. The active configuration can also be saved or loaded via TFTP, as described on page 377.

376

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/ptcfg <FTP/TFTP server> <filename>

Saving the Active Switch Configuration
When the ptcfg command is used, the switch’s active configuration commands (as displayed using /cfg/dump) will be uploaded to the specified script configuration file on the FTP/TFTP server. To start the switch configuration upload, at the Configuration# prompt, enter:
Configuration# ptcfg <FTP or TFTP server> <filename>

Where server is the FTP/TFTP server IPv4 address or hostname, and filename is the name of the target script configuration file. Note – The output file is formatted with line-breaks but no carriage returns—the file cannot be viewed with editors that require carriage returns (such as Microsoft Notepad). Note – If the FTP/TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system, the specified ptcfg file must exist prior to executing the ptcfg command and must be writable (set with proper permission, and not locked by any application). The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current configuration data.

/cfg/gtcfg <FTP/TFTP server> <filename>

Restoring the Active Switch Configuration
When the gtcfg command is used, the active configuration will be replaced with the commands found in the specified configuration file. The file can contain a full switch configuration or a partial switch configuration. The configuration loaded using gtcfg is not activated until the apply command is used. If the apply command is found in the configuration script file loaded using this command, the apply action will be performed automatically. To start the switch configuration download, at the Configuration# prompt, enter:
Configuration# gtcfg <FTP or TFTP server> <filename>

Where server is the FTP/TFTP server IPv4 address or hostname, and filename is the name of the target script configuration file.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

377

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

378

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

CHAPTER 7

The Operations Menu
The Operations Menu is generally used for commands that affect switch performance immediately, but do not alter permanent switch configurations. For example, you can use the Operations Menu to immediately disable a port (without the need to apply or save the change), with the understanding that when the switch is reset, the port returns to its normally configured operation.

/oper

Operations Menu
[Operations Menu] port - Operational Port Menu vrrp - Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu passwd - Change current user password clrlog - Clear syslog messages tnetsshc - Close all telnet/SSH connections ntpreq - Send NTP request

BMD00114, August 2009

379

You need to enter the current password in use for validation.1 Command Reference The commands of the Operations Menu enable you to alter switch operational characteristics without affecting switch configuration. ntpreq Allows the user to send requests to the NTP server. August 2009 . see page 381. see page 383.BLADE OS 5. tnetsshc Closes all open Telnet and SSH connections. To view menu options. Table 217 Operations Menu (/oper) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the Operational Port Menu. To view menu options. vrrp Displays the Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu. clrlog Clears all Syslog messages. 380 Chapter 7: The Operations Menu BMD00114. passwd <1-128 characters> Allows the user to change the password.

ldis Temporarily disables FDB learning on the port. cur Displays the current settings for the port. lena Temporarily enables FDB learning on the port. To view menu options. ena Temporarily enables the port.Enable/disable RMON for port ena . Table 218 Operations-Level Port Menu Options (/oper/port) Command Syntax and Usage 8021x Displays the 802. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset.8021. and for re-setting the port.BLADE OS 5.Enable port dis .Enable FDB Learning ldis . dis Temporarily disables the port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. see page 382.1X Port Menu.x Menu rmon .Disable port lena . BMD00114.Disable FDB Learning cur . The default setting is disabled.Current port state Operations-level port options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling a port. rmon e|d Enables or disables Remote Monitoring (RMON) for the port. August 2009 Chapter 7: The Operations Menu 381 .1 Command Reference /oper/port <port number> Operations-Level Port Options Menu [Operations Port 1 Menu] 8021x .

1X options are used to temporarily set 802.1X access-control parameters for the port.1X parameters for a port. auto . This command only applies if the port’s 802.the port is placed in unauthorized state. and authentication is not required. Table 219 Operations-Level Port 802.Initiate reauthentication on this port now Operations-level port 802.1 Command Reference /oper/port <port number>/8021x Operations-Level Port 802.1X Options Menu [802. depending on the 802.the port is placed in authorized state. 382 Chapter 7: The Operations Menu BMD00114.1X mode is configured as auto.1X Menu Options (/oper/port x/8021x) Command Syntax and Usage reset Re-initializes the 802.the port is placed in unauthorized state.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 . then authentication is initiated. and traffic is blocked.Reinitialize 802. reauth Re-authenticates the supplicant (client) attached to the port.1X port configuration: force unauth . The following actions take place.1X access control on this port reauth .1X Operation Menu] reset . force auth .

August 2009 Chapter 7: The Operations Menu 383 .BLADE OS 5. After the new election. BMD00114. the current master gives up control and initiates a new election by temporarily advertising its own priority level as 0 (lowest).1 Command Reference /oper/vrrp Operations-Level VRRP Options Menu [VRRP Operations Menu] back . There are no other virtual routers available to take master control.Set virtual router to backup Table 220 Operations-Level VRRP Menu Options (/oper/vrrp) Command Syntax and Usage back <virtual router number (1-255)> Forces the specified master virtual router on this switch into backup mode. the virtual router forced into backup mode by this command will resume master control in the following cases: This switch owns the virtual router (the IP addresses of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same) This switch’s virtual router has a higher priority and preemption is enabled. When this command is executed. This is generally used for passing master control back to a preferred switch once the preferred switch has been returned to service after a failure.

August 2009 .BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference 384 Chapter 7: The Operations Menu BMD00114.

Prompt for selectable boot mode gtimg . refer to “Switch Images and Configuration Files” on page 448. /boot Boot Menu [Boot Options Menu] image .Select CLI mode to use on next boot prompt . The Boot Options Menu provides options for: Selecting a switch software image to be used when the switch is next reset Selecting a configuration block to be used when the switch is next reset Downloading or uploading a new software image to the switch via FTP/TFTP In addition to the Boot Menu. To use SNMP. BMD00114. you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator. you can use a Web browser or SNMP to work with switch image and configuration files. August 2009 385 .Reset switch [WARNING: Restarts Spanning Tree] cur .CHAPTER 8 The Boot Options Menu To use the Boot Options Menu.Upload selected software image via TFTP reset .Display current boot options Each of these options is discussed in greater detail in the following sections.Select software image to use on next boot conf .Select config block to use on next boot mode .Download new software image via TFTP ptimg .

Click the Configure context button in the toolbar. click on software updates. Loading New Software to Your Switch The switch can store up to two different software images. This lets you test the new software and reload the original active image (stored in image1). you must specify where it should be placed: either into image1. A version of the image ships with the switch. On the switch. 386 Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu BMD00114. and comes pre-installed on the device. as well as boot software. or on a local computer. you can upgrade the software running on your switch. or boot. called image1 and image2. On the support site. if your active image is currently loaded into image1. When you load new software. you would probably load the new image software into image2. use the /boot/cur command to determine the current software version.1 Command Reference Updating the Switch Software Image The switch software image is the executable code running on the HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch. August 2009 .BLADE OS 5. select System > Config/Image Control. image2. 2. called boot. Select the new software image to be loaded into switch memory the next time the switch is reset. Using the BBI You can use the Browser-Based Interface to load software onto the switch. For example. perform the following steps to load a software image: 1. The typical upgrade process for the software image consists of the following steps: Place the new image onto a FTP or TFTP server on your network. if needed. Transfer the new image to your switch. In the Navigation Window. The software image to load can reside in one of the following locations: FTP server TFTP server Local computer After you log onto the BBI. As new versions of the image are released.

BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. go to Step 4. If you are loading software from your computer (HTTP client). 3. August 2009 Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu 387 . If you are loading software from a FTP/TFTP server.1 Command Reference The Switch Image and Configuration Management page appears. enter the server’s information in the FTP/TFTP Settings section.

the page refreshes to show the new software. Enter the name of the switch software to be replaced: Enter name of switch software image to be replaced ["image1"/"image2"/"boot"]: <image> 3. See “Domain Name System Configuration Menu” on page 349. Enter name of file on FTP/TFTP server: <filename> The exact form of the name will vary by server. August 2009 . 388 Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu BMD00114. enter the file name and click Get Image. When the above requirements are met. If you are loading software from a FTP/TFTP server. Enter the hostname or IP address of the FTP or TFTP server.1 Command Reference 4. 1. select the file and click OK. However. use the following procedure to download the new software to your switch. In the Image Settings section. enter: Boot Options# gtimg 2. Using the CLI To load a new software image to your switch. Click Download via Browser. select the image version you want to replace (Image for Transfer). In the File Upload Dialog. click Browse. Enter the name of the new software file on the server.BLADE OS 5. Once the image has loaded. you need the following: The image or boot software loaded on a FTP/TFTP server on your network The hostname or IP address of the FTP/TFTP server The name of the new software image or boot file Note – The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. the file location is normally relative to the FTP or TFTP directory (usually /tftpboot). At the Boot Options# prompt. If you are loading software from your computer. Enter hostname or IP address of FTP/TFTP server: <name or IP address> 4.

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

5. Enter your username for the server, if applicable.
Enter username for FTP server or hit return for TFTP server: <username> or <Enter>

6. The system prompts you to confirm your request. You should next select a software image to run, as described below.

Selecting a Software Image to Run
You can select which software image (image1 or image2) you want to run in switch memory for the next reboot. 1. At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
Boot Options# image

2. Enter the name of the image you want the switch to use upon the next boot. The system informs you of which image is currently set to be loaded at the next reset, and prompts you to enter a new choice:
Currently set to use switch software "image1" on next reset. Specify new image to use on next reset ["image1"/"image2"]:

Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch
You can upload a software image from the switch to a FTP or TFTP server. 1. At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
Boot Options# ptimg

2. The system prompts you for information. Enter the desired image:
Enter name of switch software image to be uploaded ["image1"|"image2"|"boot"]: <image>

3.

Enter the name or the IP address of the FTP or TFTP server:
Enter hostname or IP address of FTP/TFTP server: <name or IP address>

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu

389

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

4. Enter the name of the file into which the image will be uploaded on the FTP or TFTP server:
Enter name of file on FTP/TFTP server: <filename>

5. The system then requests confirmation of what you have entered. To have the file uploaded, enter Y.
image2 currently contains Software Version 5.1 that was downloaded at 0:23:39 Thu Jan 4, 2009. Upload will transfer image2 (2788535 bytes) to file "image1" on FTP/TFTP server 192.1.1.1. Confirm upload operation (y/n) ? y

Selecting a Configuration Block
When you make configuration changes to the switch, you must save the changes so that they are retained beyond the next time the switch is reset. When you perform the save command, your new configuration changes are placed in the active configuration block. The previous configuration is copied into the backup configuration block. There is also a factory configuration block. This holds the default configuration set by the factory when your switch was manufactured. Under certain circumstances, it may be desirable to reset the switch configuration to the default. This can be useful when a custom-configured switch is moved to a network environment where it will be re-configured for a different purpose. Use the following procedure to set which configuration block you want the switch to load the next time it is reset: 1. At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
Boot Options# conf

2. Enter the name of the configuration block you want the switch to use: The system informs you of which configuration block is currently set to be loaded at the next reset, and prompts you to enter a new choice:
Currently set to use active configuration block on next reset. Specify new block to use ["active"/"backup"/"factory"]:

390

Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

Resetting the Switch
You can reset the switch to make your software image file and configuration block changes occur. Note – Resetting the switch causes the Spanning Tree Group to restart. This process can be lengthy, depending on the topology of your network. To reset the switch, at the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
>> Boot Options# reset

You are prompted to confirm your request.

Accessing the ISCLI
The default command-line interface for the switch is the BLADE OS CLI. To access the ISCLI, enter the following command and reset the switch:
Main# boot/mode iscli

To access the BLADE OS CLI, enter the following command from the ISCLI and reload the switch:
Switch (config)# boot cli-mode bladeos-cli

Users can select the CLI mode upon login, if the /boot/prompt command is enabled. Only an administrator can view and enable /boot/prompt. When /boot/prompt is enabled, the first user to log in can select the CLI mode. Subsequent users must use the selected CLI mode, until all users have logged out.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu

391

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

392

Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

CHAPTER 9

The Maintenance Menu
The Maintenance Menu is used to manage dump information and forward database information. It also includes a debugging menu to help with troubleshooting.

/maint

Maintenance Menu
Note – To use the Maintenance Menu, you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator.
[Maintenance Menu] sys - System Maintenance Menu fdb - Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu debug - Debugging Menu arp - ARP Cache Manipulation Menu route - IP Route Manipulation Menu lldp - LLDP Cache Manipulation Menu igmp - IGMP Multicast Group Menu uudmp - Uuencode FLASH dump ptdmp - Upload FLASH dump via FTP/TFTP cldmp - Clear FLASH dump tsdmp - Tech support dump pttsdmp - Upload tech support dump via FTP/TFTP

Dump information contains internal switch state data that is written to flash memory on the switch after any one of the following occurs: The watchdog timer forces a switch reset. The purpose of the watchdog timer is to reboot the switch if the switch software freezes. The switch detects a hardware or software problem that requires a reboot.

BMD00114, August 2009

393

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

Table 221 Maintenance Menu (/maint)
Command Syntax and Usage

sys Displays the System Maintenance Menu. To view menu options, see page 395. fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see page 396. debug Displays the Debugging Menu. To view menu options, see page 397. arp Displays the ARP Cache Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see page 398. route Displays the IP Route Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see page 399. lldp Displays the LLDP Cache Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see page 400. igmp Displays the IGMP Maintenance Menu. To view menu options, see page 401. uudmp Displays dump information in uuencoded format. For details, see page 404. ptdmp <host name> <file name> Saves the system dump information via FTP/TFTP. For details, see page 404. cldmp Clears dump information from flash memory. For details, see page 405. tsdmp Dumps all switch information, statistics, and configuration.You can log the tsdump output into a file. pttsdmp Redirects the technical support dump (tsdmp) to an external TFTP server.

394

Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/maint/sys

System Maintenance Menu
This menu is reserved for use by Technical Support personnel. The options are used to perform system debugging.
[System Maintenance Menu] flags - Set NVRAM flag word tmask - Set MP trace mask word

Table 222 System Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/sys)
Command Syntax and Usage

flags <new NVRAM flags word as 0xXXXXXXXX> This command sets the flags that are used for debugging purposes by Technical Support personnel. tmask <new trace mask word as 0xXXXXXXXX> [p] This command sets the trace mask that is used for debugging purposes by Technical Support personnel.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu

395

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/maint/fdb

Forwarding Database Maintenance Menu
[FDB Manipulation Menu] find - Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port - Show FDB entries for a single port vlan - Show FDB entries for a single VLAN dump - Show all FDB entries del - Delete an FDB entry clear - Clear entire FDB mcdump - Display all Multicast MAC entries added mcreload - Reload all Multicast MAC entries

The Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu can be used to view information and to delete a MAC address from the forwarding database or clear the entire forwarding database. This is helpful in identifying problems associated with MAC address learning and packet forwarding decisions. Table 223 FDB Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/fdb)
Command Syntax and Usage

find <MAC address> [<VLAN number>] Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device. Enter the MAC address using one of the following formats: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx (such as 08:00:20:12:34:56) xxxxxxxxxxxx (such as 080020123456) port <port number> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. vlan <VLAN number> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN. dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. For details, see page 73. del <MAC address> [<VLAN number>] Removes a single FDB entry. clear Clears the entire Forwarding Database from switch memory.

396

Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

mask: 0x2ffdf748 The buffer information is displayed after the header. The output from these commands can be interpreted by Technical Support personnel.Clear all flash configs The Miscellaneous Debug Menu displays trace buffer information about events that can be helpful in understanding switch operation. BMD00114. You can view the following information using the debug menu: Events traced by the Management Processor (MP) Events traced to a buffer area when a reset occurs If the switch resets for any reason.BLADE OS 5.Show MP trace buffer snap . This buffer contains information traced at the time that a reset occurred. clrcfg Deletes all flash configuration blocks. Table 224 Miscellaneous Debug Menu Options (/maint/debug) Command Syntax and Usage tbuf Displays the Management Processor trace buffer. /maint/debug Debugging Menu [Miscellaneous Debug Menu] tbuf . the MP trace buffer is saved into the snap trace buffer area. snap Displays the Management Processor snap (or post-mortem) trace buffer.Show MP snap (or post-mortem) trace buffer clrcfg .1 Command Reference Table 223 FDB Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage mcdump Displays all Multicast MAC entries in the FDB. mcreload Reloads static Multicast MAC entries. 2008. August 2009 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 397 . Header information similar to the following is shown: MP trace buffer at 13:28:15 Fri May 30.

1 Command Reference /maint/arp ARP Cache Maintenance Menu [Address Resolution Protocol Menu] find . vlan.Show ARP entries for switch's interfaces dump . August 2009 .BLADE OS 5.Show all ARP entries clear . clear Clears the entire ARP list from switch memory.Clear ARP cache Table 225 ARP Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/arp) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as. 192. dump).Show ARP entries on a single port vlan . Note – To display all ARP entries currently held in the switch. vlan <VLAN number> Shows ARP entries on a single VLAN. dump Shows all ARP entries. 398 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu BMD00114. port <port number> Shows ARP entries on a single port.17.Show a single ARP entry by IP address port . or a portion according to one of the options listed on the menu above (find. port.4. you can also refer to “ARP Information” on page 97.Show ARP entries on a single VLAN addr .101)> Shows a single ARP entry by IP address. addr Shows the list of IP addresses which the switch will respond to for ARP requests.

Clear route table Table 226 IP Route Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/route) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as. clear Clears the route table from switch memory. For a description of IP routing tags.Show all routes clear . you can also refer to “IP Routing Information” on page 94.BLADE OS 5. 192.Show routes to a single gateway type .101)> Shows a single route by destination IP address. see Table 31 on page 95 tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|broadcast|martian|multicast Shows routes of a single tag.Show routes on a single interface dump . gw <default gateway address (such as. Note – To display all routes.44)> Shows routes to a default gateway. BMD00114. For a description of IP routing types.4. 192. dump Shows all routes. see Table 32 on page 96 if <interface number> Shows routes on a single interface.Show routes of a single type tag . August 2009 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 399 .17.1 Command Reference /maint/route IP Route Manipulation Menu [IP Routing Menu] find .17. type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast Shows routes of a single type.4.Show a single route by destination IP address gw .Show routes of a single tag if .

clear Clears the LLDP cache. remodev <1-256> Displays information received from LLDP -capable devices. 400 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu BMD00114. tx Displays information about the LLDP transmit state machine.1 Command Reference /maint/lldp LLDP Cache Manipulation Menu [LLDP Menu] port rx tx remodev dump clear Show LLDP port information Show LLDP receive state machine information Show LLDP transmit state machine information Show LLDP remote devices information Show all LLDP information Clear LLDP remote devices information Table 230 describes the LLDP cache manipulation commands. dump Displays all LLDP information. rx Displays information about the LLDP receive state machine.BLADE OS 5. Table 227 LLDP Cache Manipulation Options (/maint/lldp) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) port information. August 2009 .

see page 401. To view menu options. mrouter Displays the Multicast Router Port menu. clear Clears the IGMP group table and Mrouter tables.BLADE OS 5. Table 228 IGMP Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/igmp) Command Syntax and Usage snoop Displays the IGMP Snooping Maintenance menu. see page 402. BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 401 .1 Command Reference /maint/igmp IGMP Maintenance Menu [IGMP Multicast group mrouter clear Group Menu] Multicast Group Menu IGMP Multicast Router Port Menu Clear group and mrouter tables Table 228 describes the IGMP Maintenance commands. To view menu options.

August 2009 . trunk <trunk group number> Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single trunk group.1 Command Reference /maint/igmp/snoop IGMP Snooping Maintenance Menu [IGMP Multicast find vlan port trunk detail dump clear Group Menu] Show a single group by IP group address Show groups on a single vlan Show groups on a single port Show groups on a single trunk Show detail of a single group by IP address Show all groups Clear group tables Table 228 describes the IGMP Maintenance commands. Table 229 IGMP Multicast Group Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/igmp/group) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address> Displays a single IGMP multicast group by its IP address. detail <IP address> Displays detailed information about a single IGMP multicast group. clear Clears the IGMP group tables.BLADE OS 5. vlan <VLAN number> Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single VLAN. 402 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu BMD00114. port <port number> Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single port. dump Displays information for all multicast groups.

August 2009 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 403 . dump Shows all multicast router ports. clear Clears the IGMP Multicast Router port table. Table 230 IGMP Mrouter Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/igmp/mrouter) Command Syntax and Usage vlan <VLAN number> Shows all IGMP multicast router ports on a single VLAN. BMD00114.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference /maint/igmp/mrouter IGMP Multicast Routers Maintenance Menu [IGMP Multicast vlan dump clear Routers Menu] Show all multicast router ports on a single vlan Show all multicast router ports Clear multicast router port table Table 230 describes the IGMP multicast router (Mrouter) maintenance commands.

captured to a file. at the Maintenance# prompt. dump information can be read multiple times. If the dump region is empty. Using the uudmp command. dump information is presented in uuencoded format. Once entered. The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current dump data. Note – Dump information is not cleared automatically. and not locked by any application). To save dump information via FTP/TFTP. and must be writable (set with proper permission.BLADE OS 5. In order for any subsequent dump information to be written to flash memory. This will ensure that you do not lose any information. To access dump information. the specified ptdmp file must exist prior to executing the ptdmp command. see page 405. /maint/ptdmp <FTP/TFTP server> <filename> FTP/TFTP System Dump Put Use this command to put (save) the system dump to a FTP/TFTP server.300 lines of data to be displayed on your screen and copied into the file. enter: Maintenance# ptdmp <FTP/TFTP server> <filename> Where server is the FTP/TFTP server IP address or hostname. you must manually clear the dump region. at the Maintenance# prompt. August 2009 . For more information on clearing the dump region. if you have configured your communication software to do so.1 Command Reference /maint/uudmp Uuencode Flash Dump Using this command. Note – If the FTP/TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system. the following appears: No FLASH dump available. enter: Maintenance# uudmp The dump information is displayed on your screen and. and filename is the target dump file. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the uudmp command. This format makes it easy to capture the dump information as a file or a string of characters. The command does not cause the information to be updated or cleared from flash memory. the uudmp command will cause approximately 23. 404 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu BMD00114. If you want to capture dump information to a file.

If the flash dump region is already clear. Unscheduled System Dumps If there is an unscheduled system dump to flash memory. The region must be cleared before another dump can be saved. The dump was saved at 13:43:22 Wednesday January 30. Use /maint/uudmp to extract the dump for analysis and /maint/cldmp to clear the FLASH region.1 Command Reference /maint/cldmp Clearing Dump Information To clear dump information from flash memory. at the Maintenance# prompt. the switch displays the following message: FLASH dump region is already clear. August 2009 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 405 . the following message is displayed when you log on to the switch: Note: A system dump exists in FLASH.BLADE OS 5. enter: Maintenance# cldmp The switch clears the dump region of flash memory and displays the following message: FLASH dump region cleared. BMD00114. 2009.

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference 406 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu BMD00114. August 2009 .

............................ 243.........................................................46 tab completion . 246 ACL statistics .. 19......47 B backup configuration block ........ 29 auto-negotiation setup ................................................ <Emphasis>See Bridge Protocol Data Unit..............281 broadcast IP route tag ............................... 87 apply (global command)............................................................................... 96 administrator account ............................ 377 addr IP route tag ........................................404 Cisco Ether Channel ...........................................................................................46 stacking ....................350 BPDU................................................................. saving and loading configuration ..........281 Bridge Spanning-Tree parameters . 200 BLOCKING (port state) ............................................................... 88 Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) .............. bridge parameter menu.............................................95 A abbreviating commands (CLI) .............43 shortcuts ................................. 41 commands abbreviations..................................................... August 2009 407 ................. 377 ptcfg ........ 85 BMD00114.... 29 C capture dump information to a file ..............................84. 196 autoconfiguration link ...................... 15 to 20......................................................................................... 360 active port VLAN ....................................96 IP route type .................. 88 STP transmission frequency ..................88 clear ARP entries ... 390 banner (system option) ..................................................................... 288....... 245................................21 global commands .......................................293 CIST information ......399 command (help) ............... 25......................................85.... 233 ACL Port menu ............. 377 active switch.......................... 47 access control user ................... 196............................................... 390 active IP interface ..................................... 185 active configuration block ................................................Index Symbols ..... 196 applying configuration changes........................396 routing table.... for STP ................................................................................................................................47 conventions used in this manual ................ 368 / command ..................................................................... 196.......... 377 restoring ............................279 bridge priority ............... 360 active switch configuration gtcfg ............................................................... 233 aging STP information ........................................................................ 43 [ ]..............405 FDB entry ...................................................................................... 85....... 25 admpw (system option) ...................398 dump information ...................................43 Command-Line Interface (CLI) .......................................... 21 boot options menu ....................385 bootstrap protocol .... 244...........................

..........................................195 direct (IP route type).. 120 cost STP information ......399 325 save changes ..............................50....................................................................... 27 system option .......... 242 Gigabit Ethernet ...... 214 switch IP address .................. 130 configuring ..................................................... 376 setup command ...72 Forwarding Database Menu ............................................................................................. 293 RIPRIP configurationRouting Information Protocol debugging ......73................................................... 213.............................. 376 failover ...............................98 flow control ....................................................................393 delete entry ............................... 130 dynamic routes...................................................................... 211 port mirroring ......................................... 263 port trunking .................................. 239 VRRP .... 90 fwd (STP bridge option) ...........19 delete FDB entry ........................ .......... 390 factory ..................390 factory default configuration ................................................................ 326 COS queue information..................................................................... 207 user password .... 196 setup .................................... viewing changes ................................................................... 275 default gateway interval.................................................. 298 flow control ...................................................................... bridge port .........................................................................................376 maintenance..................98 diff (global) command...... 233 view changes........................ 184 CPU utilization .................. 390 configuration menu ..............95 directed broadcasts ...................................................293 F factory configuration block .. 206.................................... 87............................320 forwarding database (FDB) ................... 85................. 23 to 39................ 239 VLAN IP interface ... 233 apply changes ............... 87.................................................................................. 195 VLAN default (PVID) .............................................................................. 199 408 Index BMD00114...29 forwarding configuration IP forwarding configuration ................................................................ 25............................................................................ 231 E EtherChannel (port trunking) ....................................BLADE OS 5.............166 downloading software............... 315 TACACS+TACACS+ ..... for health checks .......386 dump configuration command ........................................96 flag field................................................396 forwarding state (FWD) ................ 390 backup...........85 disconnect idle timeout ................. 267 administrator password ..93 interval......... 85. 89 STP port option ................................................ for health checks .................................. 390 selection ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1x802....................396 Forwarding Database Information Menu ...........................282 FwdDel (forward delay)...........................................20............................. 199 daylight savings time ................................33 first-time configuration .......................................... 376 SNMPSNMP ............................. 26 failover configuration..................................................242 setup ........ 89 D date setup .50............................................................. 184 cur (system option) ... 283 CPU statistics ..................................................... 238 IGMPIGMP .........393 default gateway information .................................................. ?? to 40 fixed IP route tag ..........................................393 duplex mode link status .....................................................................................1 Command Reference configuration 802....................20 DNS statistics ....................................................... 341 IPv4 static route ....................... 316 dump command .......396 designated port.................................................. 315 VLAN tagging ..... 316 default gateway IP address ....154 Final Steps.......... August 2009 .......................320 DISABLED (port state) ........298 FDB statistics ..........................316 default password ..............................1x ....85................ 193 configuring routing information protocol .............. 317 LDAPLDAP ...............20.............. 196 CISTCISTCommon Internal Spanning Tree .. 89........................ 351 configuration block active .......

1s ...........................................296 Layer 2 Menu .................. 342 IGMP statistics..................................... retries ........................................ 49 Interface change stats ..... 200 HTTPS ............................1w ...............................................68 Layer 3 Menu ........288 information .......................................................................128 linkt (SNMP option) ..................................162 IP subnet mask ......202 Loopback Interface configuration .................. 20 IEEE 802..........317 L LACP ...... 82 IGMP Snooping .........................362 IP network filter configuration.................................................................................................95 log (syslog messages) .......................... 86.......215 LISTENING (port state) ...................................................................................................159 IPv4 Static Route Menu .........................................130 duplex mode .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 238 global commands .................. 110 IP Information Menu ..................................................... 84..............................................320 IP forwarding information .....................................................................367 BMD00114.......................... 86 IEEE 802................. 85....32 IP switch processor statistics ............................................................................................................................................................ 377 H health checks default gateway interval....315 IP interfaces.31 tag parameters ..................................1w................................321 IP Route Manipulation Menu ...............................................50 command .......................................................................................................... 43 gtcfg (TFTP load command) ........................................... August 2009 Index 409 .....................85 LLDP configuration........... 316 retry...............31 IP configuration via setup .............................................................. selecting ...1x ..97 configuring default gateway .................................... 389 indirect (IP route type) ... 114 IGMP Multicast Router Information. 279 802.......................................85.................399 IP routing .. 235 I ICMP statistics ....................31 ARP information ...................1s ..................................296 link status ... 316 hello STP information ......................................................................... 130 Link Status Information ... 95 Information IGMP Information ...................................................................1 Command Reference G gig (Port Menu option). 43 Hot Links configuration ............... 273 802....................................92 LEARNING (port state) ...........93 IP Information ............... 238 Gigabit Ethernet configuration ................... 86 IEEE standards 802.....316 IP interface ......... 238 Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link .......31 IP forwarding directed broadcasts .................................................................. 89 Link Aggregation Control Protocolconfiguration LACP .......93 IP route tag ......360 configuring address............................................................................................................................................................78 statistics ...........157 local (IP route type) .................................................................................... 386 software.. 130 port speed ............... 273 802.........................50......................31...............................................................................................................93 IP interface active ..............1p .........................BLADE OS 5........... 95 information ................................... 115 Trunk Group Information.......... 172 image downloading ............ 177 IP address ............... 304 hot-standby failover ......................... 167 idle timeout............................................ 88 help .....1d ..... 119 Information Menu .............................109............................................................50............................................................ 358 hprompt system option ..............96 IP statistics ....................................................................315 configuring VLANs ............................................................ 90 information 802.......................................................96 priority increment value (ifs) for VRRP ................ number of failed health checks .........................................................................................................................

.............................. shortest path first .......................................BLADE OS 5....................19 VRRP authentication .....................................338 dead...............................19 user account ....................................... 52 manual style conventions ................................... 281 ospf area index ............332 stub area ... 331 authentication key.. 89 MD5 cryptographic authentication .....334 cost value of the host .......329 redistribution menu .................100 OSPF General Information ................... metering (ACL)ACL metering ...................... 401 IGMP Groups...................... 175 notice .331 priority value of the switch interface .................335 configuration..........................................................105 OSPF statistics ..............96 type ........................................ 200 NTP server menu................................................ 383 P parameters tag .......................................... 42 Maintenance IGMP ............ health parameter of a hello packet ...............................338 host routes ................................ 244 information .................................................. August 2009 410 Index .............................................333 transit area ................... 402 IGMP Multicast Routers ........................................................................................................................................................................329 cost of the selected path .................................................336 virtual neighbor....................... 273 mxage (STP bridge option) ................................... 379 Operations-Level Port Options.330 route redistribution configuration ..............................................................................................................................331 virtual link ...................................................................................................................................................339 spf................. 95 MaxAge (STP information) ............................................... 332 MD5 key ........................329 interface ....................................19 BMD00114....................... 335 media access control............................................... 81 online help .... 96 IP route type (filtered out) ................................................................ 72.............................. 181 MP........................................19 default ........................................................... 397 display MAC address ...329...............................361 passwords ....................................................................................................................................... 85...... 393 Management Processor (MP) ........329 interface configuration ................................................ 403 Maintenance Menu .......................95 Password user access control ............................. 52.................... declaring a silent router to be down ...............174 hello...........331 transit delay ......174 global .............. 41 Command-Line Interface (CLI) ......335 type ..............................................................................233 password administrator account ...........334 range number .329 virtual link configuration ............ 382 operations-level VRRP options ....................................102 OSPF Information ......................335 dead...................................................330 Not-So-Stubby Area ........ <Emphasis>See Management Processor............................................. authentication parameter of a hello packet336 host entry configuration ...................... 381.. 43 operations menu ..........334 link state database ...................................... <Emphasis>See MAC address.......................................................................................... 87........................................................................ 95 Multiple Spanning Tree configuration ...................................................... 97........... router ID ......................339 general ............................................................100 OSPF Information Route Codes......................103 OSPF general......................................................331 summary range configuration .............................. multicast IP route type ............. 396 Main Menu . 20 summary.............. 263 mp packet ............... 21 martian IP route tag (filtered) ..........336 OSPF Database Information .. 213 NTP synchronization ...........................................................336 export ......1 Command Reference M MAC (media access control) address .....173 N nbr change statistics ............ 397 monitor port ...... 256 Miscellaneous Debug Menu ....................................... 213 O OAM configuration .............................................................................................

............................. RMON information ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 51.............BLADE OS 5.................. <Emphasis>See flow control...... 242 reference ports ................... 108 RIP.................................................... 326 RSTP information ..175 S save (global command) .............. 359 priority (STP port option) ..............................................................................123 port configuration .. 215 receive flow control ..................... 51..150 route statistics ..................................................................................... 44 poisoned reverse.....390 secret radius server ............................................... 310 pwd ..................................................................................................................... 326 port configuration ...... 44 restarting switch setup .......................................326 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) ...................... 73 referenced port ........ 359 priority virtual router ..........................................239 statistics ................................................................................. 130 port speed ................................................ 377 PVID (port VLAN ID) ....................196 noback option ............ 368 BMD00114........................ 263 Port number ..............................86 rx flow control ..............................................................96 options ............................................ 50...........................................................165 routing information protocol configuration..................................... 238 port flow control..... 132 preemption assuming VRRP master routing authority...................... 44 R RADIUS server menu ...... 130 port states UNK (unknown) ..26 retries radius server ...............96 RIP Information ..205 secsrv secondary radius server .................................................................... 238 port mirroring configuration ........................ 238 configuring Gigabit Ethernet (gig) ..........................196 save command ...................................................................................... <Emphasis>See Routing Information Protocol....376 Q quiet (screen display option) ................................................. 28 disabling (temporarily) .................................. Port Menu configuration options...............326 poisoned reverse ........... as used with split horizon ............. 71.............................................................106.... 89 STP port priority .................... 205 Private VLAN ....... 356 virtual router ..................................................................................................... 241 information ................................................326 split horizon ..........205 retry health checks for default gateway .......29 Rx/Tx statistics .................1 Command Reference ping . configuration . 293 ports configuration ....................................... 283 prisrv primary radius server ..........325......................................................... 98 re-markACL re-mark menu ................................. 29. August 2009 Index 411 .............................................. 73 port trunking description ............................... 258 Remote Monitoring (RMON) ......205 Secure Shell.. 132 membership of the VLAN.................................................................................106 RIP information ..... 205 read community string (SNMP option) ........................316 rip IP route tag ............................................... 312 ptcfg (TFTP save command) ...........................................................203 setup configuration........................................... 354........376 setup command...... 293 port trunking configuration ............................. 91 priority .... 85............326 version 1 parameters ............................................................ 283 VLAN ID . 107................................... 132 PVLANProtocol-based VLAN .......................................

................................230 usrpw (user password)......... 46 snap traces buffer ............................315 switch name and location ........................... 29 port configuration ............................... 84...31 IP interface .................................................... 386 image file and version .............................295 time setup ...........................1 Command Reference setup facility ......................206 Telnet support optional setup for Telnet support .................... 397 SNMP ........................................................388 PUT and GET commands ............. 24 IP configuration .........................................................................206......................52 System Maintenance Menu ..............230 system parameters............. current ..........34 text conventions ......... 183 Telnet configuring switches using.............. 186 SNMPv3 ...................................................................... 215 SNMP statistics .................. 279 Spanning-Tree Protocol ................................................. 27 system time ................................................................................. 87........................ August 2009 412 Index ...................................................233 wport .............................21 TFTP ..............................200 login banner ................................................................................................................................................................................... 25 state (STP information) .........377 TFTP server..........................................199 hprompt .................................206... 32 port auto-negotiation mode ........................................................................... 326 stacking commands (CLI) ........................... 25 stopping................................................................ 180 Statistics Menu.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................377 thash ......................... 281 bridge priority .............................................. 215 set and get access ....................... 88 port cost option .......................................................199 tnport ............ 391 split horizon ........ 26 system date ........................................BLADE OS 5.............65 location (SNMP option) .................... 27 VLAN name ...376 telnet radius server ...............................................................................................26 subnet mask .. 283 port priority option ...205 BMD00114............................................................................. 28 switch reset effect ................................................................. 281 setup (on/off)................ 88...... 28 starting ........ 96 static route rem ...................................207 TACACS+ .................................................................................... 90 bridge parameters ............................................ 46 starting switch setup ...215 System Information ................................... 135 stopping switch setup ................................................................................................................................................201 system contact (SNMP option). 317 statis route add................................................................ 30 VLAN tagging .....199 timeout radius server ......................................................................................................................................................................... 236 shortcuts (CLI) ..........................27 system option ....................................... 89 static IP route tag ...... 213..........................................200 time ...... 29 VLANs . 26 Spanning-Tree Protocol .................................................................................................................................52 resetting ......................207 TCP .... 231 date........................................32 subnets .................................. 31 IP subnet mask .....233 cur (current system parameters) ........................................ 136 menu options. 217 software image ..................................215 date and time............... 85.................................................... 283 root bridge ..................52 information ......47 tacacs ................................... 52 spanning tree configuration ................................395 system options admpw (administrator password) ................................................ 29 restarting ..................................................................391 syslog system host log configuration ...........................................169....................... 317 statistics management processor ........... 84.... 28 port flow control ...... 30 sFlow configuration .................................................................. 213..................... 231 T tab completion (CLI) .............................................................................................................................................................. 20..160 TCP statistics .....................................................................

.......................................................360 configuration....................................................97 information .............30 tagging ..362 VRRP Information .................... authentication......................... 91 name setup......361 master advertisements ............................308 VLAN tagging port configuration .......... 183 UDLD configuration ............. August 2009 Index 413 ................................. 51................361 group options (prio) .......... 295 tx flow control..........383 password................ 353 transmit flow control.........................................................................................................178 U UCB statistics ........356 master preemption (preem) .... 160 UDP statistics ..................354 tracking .....239 port restrictions .......................362 wport ............................................................................................................................................................362 VLAN active port...................353 tracking configuration ...... 353 priority .......91 interface .......................................... 405 upgrade..........................................................71.......................... 132..................................................... 44 virtual router description .....................354 priority increment values (vrs) for VRRP.................. 309 VLAN Number ........... 358 virtual router group configuration ................. 29 type of area ospf........117 VRRP master advertisements time interval....................................................................309 setup ........................29 VLANs ...........................393 weights setting virtual router priority values. 95 typographic conventions....... 171 unknown (UNK) port state ......................................................................................................... 20 timers kickoff............................................. 397 traceroute... 90 trunk hash algorithm ........................... 358 VRRP interface configuration ........................................................................... 359 tracking criteria ............ 80 UDP ........... 21 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) authentication parameters for IP interfaces ............ 233 Uuencode Flash Dump ............ 243 information .........................................359 operations-level options.. 29...................................................361 priority election for the virtual router.................................................. 233 user account ........................................................................................................................ 242 Trunk Group Information ....................359 master preemption (prio) ............ 331 type parameters ...............29................................................................................................................... manual ...................................................... 177 tnport system option ...........................................................................................31 ARP entry information .................................................................356 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol configuration351 virtual routers increasing priority level of ......................... 91 setting default number (PVID) ........ 358 virtual router group priority tracking .................................................................... 356 virtual router group VRRP priority tracking ................................................................BLADE OS 5..............................71.....................30 port membership ................................. 230 trace buffer ............................................................................................ switch software ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 44 Tracking VRRP ............................................353.............................................................................. 386 user access control configuration ...............................230 write community string (SNMP option) .....................................................................359 VRRP statistics ...... 19 usrpw (system option) ................................. 360 W watchdog timer .........................91 VRID (virtual router ID) ........................... 404 V verbose .......215 BMD00114........32 name ....1 Command Reference timeouts idle connection .. 73 Unscheduled System Dump ..................354 priority tracking options ......239 setup ......

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->